CARLING TECHNOLOGIES TIGL50-1F-WH-A

SWITCHES & CONTROLS CATALOG There are few products that Carling Technologies hasn’t FOUNDEDIN turned “ON” and fewer industries that haven’t turned to Carling for solutions. With ISO and TS registered 1920 manufacturing facilities and technical sales offices Since its founding, Carling worldwide, Carling ranks among the world’s largest Technologies has continually manufacturers of circuit breakers, switches, power distribution forged a tradition of leadership in quality and product innovation. units, digital switching systems and electronic controls. SWITCHES & CIRCUIT CUSTOM MULTIPLEXED CONTROLS PROTECTION SOLUTIONS POWER SYSTEMS • Rocker • Hydraulic-Magnetic • PDU’s • HMI Devices & I/O Modules • Toggle • Thermal • Keypads • Programmable Displays • Pushbutton • GFCI / ELCI • Control Modules • Data Communication Interfaces • Rotary • Electrical Systems Monitoring STRATEGIC MARKETS SERVED: OTHER SERVED INDUSTRIES: Medical Industrial Control On/Off Highway Marine Telecom/Datacom Military Renewable Energy Audio / Visual Commercial Food GLOBAL LOCATIONS: HVAC Floor Care ISO9001:2008 ISO/TS16949:2009 Generators Small Appliances ISO9001:2008 ISO/TS16949:2009 Security Systems Test & Measurment ISO9001:2008 ISO14001:2004 ISO/TS16949:2009 ISO9001:2008 WORLDWIDE ISO/TS16949:2009 NUMBERS: ISO14001:2004 ISO14001:2004 ISO9001:2008 ISO9001:2008 ISO/TS16949:2009 ISO/TS16949:2009 + + 2000 150 EMPLOYEES ENGINEERS + COMPETITIVE ADVANTAGES + + 70 50 Vertical Reliable & Excellent Innovative & DISTRIBUTORS REP FIRMS Integration On-Time Delivery Customer Service Eco-Friendly Products ii www.carlingtech.com ................... ................... ................... ..................................................................................................................... Table of Contents Page Page Small-Sized Rocker Switches Electronic Switching Products NEW Product Selector Guide ................................................................. 111 CKP-Series SAE J1939 Customizable Keypad .................... 2 610/620-Series Non-Illuminated, 1P or 2P ............................ 112 Controls 611/621-Series Rocker/Paddle/Visi-Rocker®, 1P/2P .......... 114 Product Selector Guide .................................................................... 9 622/632-Series With or without Illumination ........................ 116 V-Charger Dual Port USB 2.0 ............................................. 10 651/652-Series Non-Illuminated, 1P ....................................... 118 LD-Series Dimmer ............................................................... 15 Toggle Switches LMR-Series Mirror Rotate ..................................................... 18 Product Selector Guide ............................................................... 120 LW-Series Washer/Wiper ................................................. 20 ST-Series Sealed Toggle, 1P/2P, IP67 ..............................121 Addressable Rocker Switch LT-Series Illuminated ...................................................... 126 N-Series Addressable ...................................................... 23 F-Series 1 Pole ................................................................ 128 G-Series 2 Pole ............................................................... 130 Sealed Rocker Switches H-Series 3 Pole ............................................................... 132 Product Selector Guide .............................................. 28 I-Series 4 Pole ............................................................... 132 V-Series Contura® Rockers/Paddle Actuator ............. 29 C-Series Heavy Duty 20 Amp ..................................... 134 V-Series Actuators Separately ..................................... 49 D-Series Double Insulated all Nylon ......................... 136 V-Series Accessories ...................................................... 50 110/216-Series Quick Make/Break, AC/DC ........................ 138 VP-Series Illuminated Indicators .................................... 52 DK/EK-Series Heavy Duty, AC/DC ..................................... 140 W-Series Fully Submersible ............................................ 56 MAAOA/215 High Temperature ......................................... 142 L-Series Rocker/Paddle/Locking Actuator .............. 64 Hexboot Accessories....................................................................... 144 LP-Series Illuminated Indicators .......................................74 Hardware Accessories.....................................................................145 Full-Sized Rocker Switches Pushbutton Switches Product Selector Guide .................................................................. 77 Product Selector Guide ............................................................... 146 Tippette Switches .............................................................................. 78 16-3P-Series Light Actuation Force ................................... 147 TIL/TIG-Series Non-Illuminated, 1P/2P .................................. 79 170/172-Series High-Amperage, Momentary .................... 149 TIH/TII-Series Non-Illuminated, 3P/4P ....................................79 P26-Series AC Rated with Metal Cap ............................ 151 LTIL-Series Illuminated, 1P .................................................. 79 P27-Series AC Rated with Plastic Cap ......................... 153 LTIG/LTIH-Series Illuminated, 2P/3P .......................................... 79 641-Series 1-3 Pole Maintained for Foot Controls ..... 155 Tippette Rocker and Bracket Styles ....................................... 80 110/316P-Series AC/DC for Foot Controls ............................. 158 Tippette Actuator Styles ................................................................. 81 P-Series Metal Construction Heavy Duty ................ 160 Tippette Mounting Bracket Styles ........................................... 82 PP-Series Plastic Construction Heavy Duty .............. 162 LS-Series Softspot® Illuminated, 1P ............................... 83 Hardware Accessories.....................................................................145 S-Series Bezel-less .......................................................... 85 Rotary Mid-Sized Rocker Switches Product Selector Guide ............................................................... 164 Product Selector Guide ................................................................. 89 V-Series Sealed Rotary ................................................ 165 T-Series Mini-Tippette®, Non-Illuminated, 1P ............ 90 R135-Series ON-OFF Repeating Action .......................... 172 LTA-Series Mini-Tippette®, Illuminated, 1P ...................... 92 700/800-Series Up to 8 Positions ............................................ 174 TG/LTG-Series 1P or 2P .............................................................. 94 TTG-Series 2 Independent Switches, 2P ........................ 96 NEW Battery Disconnect Switches TLG-Series Adjacent Indicator Light, 1P ......................... 98 Product Selector Guide ................................................................ 176 Circuit Designation Chart ........................................................... 100 BD-Series Up to 300A ....................................................... 177 RR/LRR-Series Round, with/without Illumination, 1P.......... 101 BD1-Series 250A with Removable Key ......................... 184 R/RSC-Series Curvette®, Non-Illuminated, 1P .................... 103 ® LRA-Series Curvette , Illuminated, 1P.............................. 105 Miniature Switches ................................... See Mini-Switch Catalog RG-Series Super Curvette®, Non-Illuminated. 1P/2P ...107 Terminology/Agency Approvals ............................................. 188 LRG-Series Super Curvette®, Illuminated, 2P ................. 109 Standard Legend Imprinting ........................................................189 Available Online are tools such as a part configurator, product selectors and stock checks. Please visit www.carlingtech.com for the latest information on all our products. Application Solution Engineers are readily available to assist you in selecting the appropriate product for your application. For further assistance, please email us at team2@carlingtech.com Custom Design Solutions can be tailor-made for most any application using our extensive engineering resources. Other Products such as miniature switches, hydraulic-magnetic, thermal and ground fault circuit breakers are also available. © 2018 Carling Technologies, Inc. Carling Technologies is a registered trademark of Carling Technologies, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries. www.carlingtech.com 1 CKP-Series Carling Keypad - Introduction CKP-SERIES CKP-Series SAE J1939 CAN KEYPAD Compliant with SAE J1939 CAN standards, the CKP-Series is a customizable keypad featuring laser etched legends and up to three dimmable LED function lights per button, which also offer diagnostic feedback by blinking if there is a fault. Sealed to an IP69 protection level, the CKP-Series can be installed inside or outside the cab making it ideal for any on/off-highway application. Its low profile design affords a seamless dashboard look and can be mounted either vertically or horizontally. The CKP-Series offers significant advantages over traditional electromechanical switches such as 1,000,000 actuation cycles, reduced wire harnessing, and easy installation. Resources: Download 3D CAD Files IGS STP Watch Product Video Product Highlights: Typical Applications: Š SAE J1939 CAN 2.0b Protocol Š Military Š IP69 Front Panel Sealing Protection Š On/Off-Highway Š Up to 3 LED Function Lights Per Button • Trucks & Buses Š Diagnostic Feedback • Construction Š Standard or Custom Laser Etched Legends • Mining Š 1,000,000+ Button Actuation Cycles • Agriculture Š Low Current Switching • Among Others Š 8 to 32V Operating Voltage Š Tactile and Audible Feedback 2 www.carlingtech.com CKP-Series Carling Keypad - Design Features CKP-Series DESIGN FEATURES LOW PROFILE DESIGN 0.57 inch [14.48 mm] thickness (see dimensional specifications for more detail) Front View SEALING PROTECTION LED FUNCTION LIGHTS CUSTOMIZABLE ICONS Fully sealed IP69 front panel One, two, or three LED Function Lights per button. Choose from our standard library Colors include Amber, Green, Red or Blue. of icons or use custom icons. Back View SEALING PROTECTION CONNECTOR 10-32 MOUNTING STUDS (2x) Fully sealed IP68 back panel Mates to the Deutsch Max tightening torque when connected DT-Series Connector 30 inch lbs. www.carlingtech.com 3 CKP-Series Carling Keypad - General Specifications General Environmental Illumination LED backlit icons and function lights Thermal -40°C to +85°C Up to 3 function lights per button The following codes were passed: Dimmable illumination, controlled Cold Soak (IEC 60068-2-1) by CAN messages Heat Soak (IEC 60068-2-2) Connection / Wiring Duetsch DT series connector Cycling/Shock (IEC 60068-2-14) (See Dimensional Specifications) Solar Radiation: IEC 60068-2-5, procedure B, 10 cycles, Total irradiation per cycle Electrical = 22.4 kWh/m2 Operating Voltage Designed for 12/24 Volt systems Low pressure IEC 60068-2-13 Minimum 8 VDC Humidity Soak: IEC 60068-2-78, 93% RH Maximum 32VDC (±3%), 10 days Sleep Mode Low current sleep mode draws Cyclic IEC 60068-2-30, test Db: Damp less than 1.5 mA throughout the Heat Cyclic (12hr + 12hr cycle), supply voltage range wakes on variant 1, 6 cycles keypress or CAN message Ingress Protection IP6k9k per ISO 20653 (front side) Supply Voltage ratings The keypad passes SAE J1455 IP6k8 per ISO 20653 when section 4.13.1 for power up, connected (back side) operating voltage, over voltage, Shock and Bump IEC 60068-2-27, Shock 500 m/s² reverse polarity, and short circuit 11 milliseconds, Bump 400 m/s² 6 EMC Transient immunity: ISO 11452-2, milliseconds 600 cycles 100 V/m, 20 MHz to 2,000 MHz, Drop test IEC 60068-2-31, Free fall, Class A per ISO 11451-1 Procedure 1, 1000 mm height, Conducted Transient immunity: drop in all 3 axes in both ISO 7637-2:2004, Annex A Table directions A2 (for 24V systems), Class A Vibration IEC 60068-2-6, Swept sine wave ESD immunity: ISO 10605:2001, section 8.2, 5 - 500 Hz 20 cycles Test level IV (8 kV direct dis 5g acceleration charge, 15 kV air discharge) IEC 60068-2-6, Vibration Transient Emission: ISO 13766, sinusoidal, section 8.1, 10 - 2000 Broadband: Annex D, Narrow Hz, 5g acceleration band: Annex E, 30-1000 MHz IEC 60068-2-64, Method 1, random excitation, 10 - 350 Hz, 5 hours in each axis Mechanical Chemical Resistance IEC 60068-2-74, Class B, Engine Overall Dimensions See Dimensional Specifications oil, Diesel, Hydraulic oil, Panel cutout See Dimensional Specifications Ethylene Glycol, Urea Notrogen, Endurance Each button functions for at least Liquid Lime, NPK Fertiliser, 1,000,000 total actuations Ammonia, Calcium Chloride, (100,000 actuations at -40°C, Brake fluid 100,000 actuations at +85°C, and Corrosion Resistance IEC 60068-2-52, Test Kb, Severity 800,000 actuations at +25°C level 4 ± 10°C) Weathering/Cracking ASTM D1171-99, method A, Resistance 72 hours Abrasion/Wear 40 cycles of ASTM F2357 testing Software Resistance: with 0.25” paper at 175 grams of CAN Protocol CAN 2.0b type interface as force defined by SAE J1939 Software Interface Integration Click below for details on integrating the CKP-Series into J1939 CAN network: www.carlingtech.com/sites/default/files/documents/ckp-series_interface.pdf *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. 4 www.carlingtech.com CKP-Series - Keypad and Icon Artwork Ordering Scheme Ordering Scheme: Part 1 (Keypad) CKP 1 1 A 1 A B A J 000 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Series Styling Button Orientation Keypad Backlight Function Un-illuminated Network Source Layout Color Light Image Code Type Address Color 1 SERIES 6 BACKLIGHT CKP Carling Keypad A White 2 KEYPAD STYLING 7 FUNCTION LIGHT COLOR 1 Standard B Amber C Green D Red E Blue 3 BUTTON LAYOUT 8 NON-ILLUMINATED IMAGE CODE 1 Two by Six A White 4 ORIENTATION 9 NETWORK TYPE A Landscape C Reverse Landscape J J1939 B Portrait D Reverse Portrait See “icon artwork button layout” section for details. 10 SOURCE ADDRESS The Source Address is a unique number (000-248) assigned to each node on a CAN network, and is determined based on the specific 5 KEYPAD COLOR CAN architecture of each customer application. 1 Black Ordering Scheme: Part 2 (Icon Artwork) Button 1 Button 2 Button 3 Button 4 Button 5 Button 6 2 RS 2 RA 3 UV 3 UW 6 MT 8 UB 11 Function 12 Icon Code 13 Function 14 Icon Code 15 Function 16 Icon Code 17 Function 18 Icon Code 19 Function 20 Icon Code 21 Function 22 Icon Code Button 7 Button 8 Button 9 Button 10 Button 11 Button 12 8 NN 8 PU 5 PR 5 PP 4 RH 4 NU 23 Function 24 Icon Code 25 Function 26 Icon Code 27 Function 28 Icon Code 29 Function 30 Icon Code 31 Function 32 Icon Code 33 Function 34 Icon Code FUNCTION LIGHT CODE (Select for positions 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29, 31, 33) Reverse Reverse Reverse Reverse Landscape Portrait Landscape Portrait Landscape Portrait Landscape Portrait 1 No Function Light 5 Closed-Open-Open 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 1 2 Open-Closed-Closed 6 Open-Closed-Open 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 1 3 Closed-Open-Closed 7 Open-Open-Closed 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 1 4 Closed Closed-Open 8 Open-Open-Open 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 1 Additional function light colors available, please consult factory. ICON CODE 00 For standard icons, see next page. For additional icons, please consult factory. Continue to next page for layout and icons. www.carlingtech.com 5 CKP-Series - Icon Artwork Orientation & Codes Orientation - Icon Artwork Button Number Layout (see dimensional specifications for more detail) C: Portrait D: Reverse Portrait A: Landscape 2 1 11 12 1 3 5 7 9 11 4 3 9 10 2 4 6 8 10 12 6 5 7 8 B: Reverse Landscape 8 7 5 6 6 12 10 8 4 2 9 10 3 4 11 9 7 5 3 1 12 11 1 2 Standard Icon Codes: UB UV UW UX UY MP MR PX MS MR MT VU MW NZ NX NY YM VW PW PZ WG RN RP YG TX SH SN SR SY WY WZ UF UG MU TN NS PB SE VZ YE NN RW PU WA YN UE NM RJ NR YD TL VR SL UC VN PK VY UZ RH NU NV RB RC RK RL MZ RG WS WT PM VV WB TB TC TD TE MY PV TA TZ WC PT PN PH RA TU TT YL SK VS UL UM WK TS VT WL VP YJ PJ RY UP NW NP RE RF PP PR TV PC YT YU PL WJ MV RR TK RT Standard Icon Codes continued on next page. 6 www.carlingtech.com CKP-Series - Icon Artwork Codes, Dimensional Specifications Standard Icon Codes: SZ VX WF WH PG SJ YA YB RM TM RD RS TP TR NT MX YC TW TJ YF TH TF TG YS YH SX RZ YP WN WP WW WX SA SB SC SD ST SU WU WV SV SW VK SF SG SS RU RV RX Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] www.carlingtech.com 7 CKP-Series - Dimensional Specificiations Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] 8 www.carlingtech.com CONTROLS Carling Technologies offers a variety of Control products for the Transportation Industry including Dimmer Control, Mirror Rotate Control, Wiper Washer Control, and USB Dual Port Charger. Engineers trust our products not only for their style but also for their performance. SELECTOR GUIDE V-Charger LD Dimmer LMR Mirror LW Wiper 1 multi-function multi-function multi-function Poles up to up to up to 12V/24VDC 10A 12VDC 1A 14VDC 8A 14VDC Ratings 5A 24VDC .5A 28VDC 4A 28VDC sealed spring-loaded access doors; rocker, paddle joystick rocker, paddle Actuator curved or square .867” x 1.734” .867” x 1.734” .867” x 1.734” .830” x 1.450” Mounting Hole [ [22mm x 44mm [22mm x 44mm [22mm x 44mm 21.08mm x 36.83mm] ] ] ] Specifications snap-in mount snap-in mount snap-in mount snap-in mount .250 tabs .250 tabs wire leads with connector .187 tabs Termination LED LED n/a LED Illumination n/a n/a n/a n/a Approvals *Options and approvals shown may apply to specific construction combinations only, consult factory for clarification. Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specifications without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 9 V-Charger Dual Port USB 2.0 Charger– Introduction V V-Char -Char ger ger V-SERIES DUAL PORT USB 2.0 CHARGERS The Carling Technologies USB V-Charger is designed to charge tablets, e-readers, mobile and gaming devices, digital cameras, as well as other compatible electronic devices. Providing a total current of 3.15 amps, the V-Charger delivers fast charging times even in extreme temperatures from -40˚C to +80˚C. This innovative product safeguards its electronics with integrated over-current and thermal overload protection, as well as optional load dump circuitry, assuring prolonged safe and reliable operation. The center LED indicates charging is in progress. Snap-in mounting for an industry standard 1.450” x .830” panel cutout makes installation easy. Additionally, the V-Charger’s double torsion spring-loaded access doors automatically close and provide up to IP65 sealing protection with precision-fit silicone rubber seals. Resources: Configure a Complete Part Download CAD & Sales Drawing Watch Product Video Product Highlights: Typical Applications: • Dual USB Charging Ports • On/Off-Highway Equipment • 3.15 Amps for Faster Charging • Golf Carts • 10,000 Operating Cycles per Port • Lawn & Garden Equipment • Up to IP65 Sealing Protection • Marine • 12-24V Operating Voltage • Military • Protection for Internal Components • Curved or Square Style Doors 10 www.carlingtech.com V-Charger Dual Port USB 2.0 Charger - Dual Port USB 2.0 Charger V-Charger DESIGN FEATURES DUAL USB 2.0 PORTS SPRING LOADED DOORS LED Total current of 3.15 amps, Stylish, curved or square double doors Green LED brightens facilitating faster charges automatically close to cover and seal to indicate charging is each port when not in use in progress SEALING PROTECTION PANEL SEAL MOUNTING Silicone rubber seal perfectly mates Prevents water ingress beneath Fits industry standard panel with door indent to provide up to panel to protect critical connections opening size of 1.450” x .830” IP65 level of sealing protection www.carlingtech.com 11 V-Charger Dual Port USB 2.0 Charger - General Specifications Electrical Environmental USB Type 2.0 Sealing IP65 for front panel components Number of USB Ports 2 (with closed curved style doors) Operating Voltage 12V/24V DC power systems IP6X for front panel components (9 to 29 VDC) (with closed square style doors) Output Voltage 5.0 VDC Operating Temperature -40° to +60°C at 3.15A Max Output Current 3.15A DC Total -40° to +70°C at 2.4A Current Draw (No Load) 12V: 1.5 mA, 24V: 3.5 mA -40° to +80°C at 2.1A Compatibility Charges mobile devices including Vibration MIL-STD 202G, Method 204D, iPad, iPhone, iPod, HTC, Galaxy, Test Condition A. 0.06DA or Blackberry, MP3 Players, Digital 10G, 10-500 Hz Cameras and PDA’s Shock MIL-STD 202G, Method 213B, LED Indicator Green LED brightens when charging Test Condition K @ 30-G. No is in progress. loss of circuit during test. Receptacle Insertion Life 10,000 operating cycles Chemical Exposure Brush method with USB doors per port minimum closed: diesel, gasoline, Terminals Copper/silver plating 1/4” (6.3 mm) brake fluid, Windex, Armor All Quick Connect terminations Thermal Shock MIL-STD 202G, Method 107G, Reverse Polarity Operational with correct polarity Test Condition A, -40° to 85°C. after reverse polarity exposure Test Criteria: Remains functional ESD 15kV air, 8 kV touch without damage. Output Protection Short Circuit and Overload Moisture Resistance MIL-STD 202G, Method 106G. Load Dump Protection 10 pulses to 174V at 1 minute Test Criteria: Remains functional (Optional) intervals per ISO 16750-2 without damage (Pulse 5a, Ri = 8 ohms) Thermal Cycling 25 Cycles -40° to 85°C, 2 hours EMI FCC Part 15, Class B for each temperature every cycle Thermal Overload Protection Operation will cease if internal Salt Spray MIL-STD 202G, Method 101E, temperature reaches 125°C. Test Condition A Charging will resume after Blowing Dust MIL-STD 810G Method 510.5, sufficient heat loss Air Velocity: 1750 ± 250 ft/min, Test Duration: 12 hours Physical Mechanical Materials Housing: Polycarbonate/PBT Doors: Polyester Endurance 10,000 open/close cycles Light Pipe: Polycarbonate minimum per door Torsion Springs and Pins: Stainless Steel Door Seal: Silicone PCBA Gasket and Panel Gasket: Closed Cell Neoprene Terminals: Silver plated Copper Electronics: Two PCB Assemblies Panel Opening 1.450” x .830” Panel Thickness .030 - .156 inches Panel Mounting Method Front Panel Insertion Installation Insertion Force 12-28 lbs typical (dependent on panel design) Panel Retention Force Greater than 35 lbs (dependent on panel design) Depth Behind Panel See Dimensional Specifications Connectors VC1, VC2 Weight Approximately 45g (1.6 oz) Styling Options Curved or square USB port doors (See Dimensional Specifications) Port Protection Twin, self-closing doors *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. GPS-0005 Ref: F 12 www.carlingtech.com V-Charger Dual Port USB 2.0 Charger - Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Ordering Scheme V USB 24 G 1 1 1 B B 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Series Product Type Source LED Circuit Termination Door Style Door Color Base Color Panel Seal Voltage Indicator Protection 1 SERIES 6 TERMINATION V 1 .250 Tab 2 PRODUCT TYPE 7 DOOR STYLE USB Charger 1 Curved 2 Square 3 SOURCE VOLTAGE 24 24 / 12 Volts DC 8 DOOR COLOR B Black 4 LED INDICATOR (VOLTAGE MATCHES SOURCE) 9 FRAME COLOR G Green 0 None B Black 5 CIRCUIT PROTECTION 10 PANEL SEAL 1 Reverse Polarity, Thermal Overload & Overcurrent 1 Yes 2 Load Dump, Reverse Polarity, Thermal Overload & Overcurrent Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] Curved Door Style Option Notes: 1 Charger to install into 1.450” X 0.830” panel opening COS-0075 Rev: C CLA-0136 Rev: B www.carlingtech.com 13 V-Charger Dual Port USB 2.0 Charger - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] Square Door Style Option Notes: 1 Charger to install into 1.450” X 0.830” panel opening CLA-0136 Rev: B 14 www.carlingtech.com LD-Series Electronic Dimmer Control - Introduction LD-Series LD-Series ELECTRONIC DIMMER CONTROLS The LD-Series represents a dynamic breakthrough in dashboard technology, with its programmable circuitry, superior design, and unparalleled performance that affords seamless integration into most any dash panel. A variety of options, along with superior performance, functionality, and aesthetics assure compliance with the most stringent customer requirements. Key features include: robust design package with all components encased in switch housing, eliminating wire chafing and providing cost-savings as well with minimized electrical connections; IP67 sealing which prevents PCB degradation and eliminates short circuit potential. Superior heat dissipation is achieved with a heat sink mass which is over 50% larger than competitive products. Fully programmable circuitry lets the designer decide illumination levels and detent positions. EMC eliminates electrical “noise” and provides interference-free radio signals. Ease of assembly is accommodated with polarized integral connectors and an industry standard mounting hole. Product Highlights: Typical Applications: Š 3 Choices for incremental dimming rates Š On/Off-Highway Equipment Š 12 or 24 Volts Š Agricultural Equipment Š Laser Etched or Lens Illumination Š Construction Equipment Š IP67 Sealing www.carlingtech.com 15 LD-Series Electronic Dimmer Control - General Specifications Electrical Environmental Contact Rating 9-16VDC, 2-10Amp. Operating Temperature -40°C to + 85°C Terminals 6.3mm (0.250” TAB) Vibration Resonance Search Individual resonance searches were Contacts solid-state load switching conducted with vibration applied Output PWM 200 Hz. along each of the three mutually EMI/EMC SAE J 1113 and SAE J 1455 perpendicular axes. Conducted Transient 24-50 Hz 0.40DA Emissions 50-2000 Hz ± 10 G’s peak RF Conducted Emissions Random Vibration Conducted Susceptibility: The random vibration endurance test Test pulse #1 conditions were sequentially Test pulse #2 conducted in each of the three Test pulse #3a, #3b mutually perpendicular axes, 1hr/axis Load Dump: Test Pulse #5 2 Freq. (Hz) PSD (G/Hz) 9.36 grms Power lead Disturbance 24 Hz 0.06 (Power Dips) 60 Hz 0.50 AF Conducted Immunity 100 Hz 0.025 Direct RF Injection (DRFI) 1000 Hz 0.025 Abnormal Vehicle Operating 2000 Hz 0.025 Conditions During the test, all units were RF Radiated Emissions operated at a load current of 2A Radiated Immunity-Absorber Lined with 12.5VDC. Chamber Salt Spray Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 101D, Test Electrostatic Discharge: Condition A. Duration 96 hrs. Shipping / handling Electrostatic Dust Per Mil-Std 810C, Method 510.2. Air Discharge: Human Static velocity 300 ± 200 Feet/Min., Test Discharge Duration 16 Hr. Dielectric Strength 1000V @ 60 Hz was applied for Moisture Resistance Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 106E. Test each unit for 1 minute Criteria-pre and post test operation Reverse Polarity 24VDC for 5 minutes of switch. Mechanical Mounting Specifications Endurance 100,000 cycles minimum .867 [22.02] 1.970 TEST CUT Physical HOLE IN 1.734 [44.04] ACTUAL .260 [6.60] MATERIAL .390 [9.91] Function Incremental for continuous 1.020 [25.91] dimming Operation Momentary MOUNTING HOLE Lighted LED’s internally dimmed Panel Thickness Range .100 [2.54] Acceptable Panel Thickness Base PBT Polyester V-0 flammability .030 to .156 (.76mm to 3.96mm) 2.265 [57.53] Recommended: Rocker Polycarbonate or Nylon 6/6 .030, .062, .093, .125 and .156 3.055 [77.60] Glass filled Bracket PBT Polyester V-0 flammability Connector Nylon 6/6 toughened Actuation Force .230 X .031 300 gm ± 50 gm T1 [5.84 X .79] BAT Weight 52 grams T2 OUTPUT T3 (LOAD) GROUND PADDLE STYLE ACTUATOR Q.C. SELECTION GUIDE 1.300 [33.02] WIRE GAGE COMPANY PACKARD .344 [8.74] 2 SERIES PART NO. AWG MM 12084590 12 3.0 1.570 [39.88] PACKARD 12052224 12 3.0 METRI-PACK 12015870 16-14 2.0-1.0 630 SERIES 12015869 20-18 1.0-.80 TIN PLATED 1.340 [34.04] 1.060 [26.92] 12020035 22-18 (2 REQ'D) .80.-.50 (2 REQ'D) BRASS 12052222 20-22 .50-.35 *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. 16 www.carlingtech.com LD-Series Electronic Dimmer Control - Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications LD 3 5 1 C C 1 3 A A FE 1 FC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Series Rating Dimming Termination Illumination Illumination Bracket Actuator Lens Lens Legend 1 Legend Legend 2 Rate Color Style/ Color Color Orientation Color 1 SERIES 9 & 10 LENS COLOR LD Electronic Dimmer Control Z No Lens Clear White Amber Green Red Blue Lens Style 1 - B G M T Large Transparent 2 RATING - 7 C H N U Large Translucent 1 4A, 12 volts A 2A, 24 volts 3 - D J P V Bar Transparent 2 10A, 12 volts C 5A, 24 volts - 9 E K R W Bar Translucent 5 A - - - - Laser Etch 3 DIMMING RATE 11 LEGEND #1 1 30 - 100% 8 positions A 0 - 100% 11 positions 00 No legend FC Dim FE Bright 5 10 - 100% 10 positions For legend options, visit us at carlingtech.com 4 TERMINATION ORIENTATION 1 1 .230 TABS (5.84 mm) 12 LEGEND ORIENTATION LAMP 1 0 No legend 1 vertical (lamp 1 on top) LAMP 2 5 & 6 ILLUMINATION 2 horizontal (lamp 1 on right) LAMP 2 LAMP 1 No lamp S 3 vertical (lamp 1 on bottom) Red Amber Green 12V LED C N H 24V LED D P J LAMP 1 LAMP 2 LAMP 2 1 LAMP 1 7 BRACKET COLOR 45-4ZQ 45-3ZQ 1 Black 2 White 3 Gray ORIENTATION 3 1 8 ACTUATOR STYLE / COLOR 13 LEGEND #2 Laser Etched Black White Gray Red 00 No legend FC Dim FE Bright Rocker 3 A B C D For legend options, visit us at carlingtech.com Paddle 4 J K M N Notes: 1 Custom colors are available. Consult factory. .867 [22.02] 1.970 TEST CUT HOLE IN 1.734 [44.04] ACTUAL .260 [6.60] MATERIAL .390 [9.91] 1.020 [25.91] MOUNTING HOLE Panel Thickness Range .100 [2.54] Acceptable Panel Thickness .030 to .156 (.76mm to 3.96mm) 2.265 [57.53] Recommended: .030, .062, .093, .125 and .156 3.055 [77.60] .230 X .031 T1 [5.84 X .79] BAT T2 OUTPUT T3 (LOAD) GROUND PADDLE STYLE ACTUATOR Q.C. SELECTION GUIDE 1.300 [33.02] WIRE GAGE COMPANY PACKARD .344 [8.74] 2 SERIES PART NO. AWG MM 12084590 3.0 12 1.570 [39.88] PACKARD 12052224 12 3.0 METRI-PACK 12015870 16-14 2.0-1.0 630 SERIES 12015869 20-18 1.0-.80 TIN PLATED 1.340 [34.04] 1.060 [26.92] BRASS 12020035 22-18 (2 REQ'D) .80.-.50 (2 REQ'D) 12052222 20-22 .50-.35 www.carlingtech.com 17 ORIENTATION 4 ORIENTATION 2 LMR-Series Mirror Rotate Control - Introduction LMR-Series LMR-Series MIRROR ROTATE CONTROLS As an extension of the L-Series family of control products, the LMR-Series provides the means to control one or two mirrors and up to four separate motors from one easy to operate joy stick control. When used in conjunction with our dimmer control and wiper/washer control, Carling Technologies provides a solution to most any dashboard control need within the Transportation market. Product Highlights: Typical Applications: Š Two or four axis Š On/Off-Highway Equipment Š Controls up to four separate motors Š Agricultural Equipment Š Industry standard 44 x 22mm mounting hole Š Construction Equipment Š Includes Delphi-Packard 8 pin connector 18 www.carlingtech.com LMR-Series Mirror Rotate Control - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications 1 Actuator Termination 3 4 axis joy stick style 9” wire leads with Delphi-Packard connector #12047886 Electrical Mechanism 1A 14V; .5A 28V Sliding contacts in conjunction with a circuit board Sealing internal boot and potted wire leads protect critical components from dust and moisture LMR 01 1 1 2 3 Base Part Number Color Legend 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / RATING / FUNCTION / TERMINATION LMR 2 position (left, right), 4 axis (N,S,E,W) with wire leads 2 ACTUATOR /BRACKET COLOR 01 Black 2 3 LEGEND Z no legend 1 2 arrows symbol (left, right) 2 4 arrows symbol (front, back and left, right) Notes: 1 Compatible with Delphi-Packard #12045688. 2 All legends are imprinted in white. All product supplied with Mirror L & R legend on top of bracket and detent and directional legend on actuator. 3 Delphi-Packard is a registered trademark of Delphi-Packard Electrical Systems, Warren, Ohio. 1.965 .867 [22.02] [49.91] WIRE COLOR CAV I.D. 40 ORANGE A 81A WHITE B TEST CUT 82A LT. BLUE C HOLE IN 1.734 [44.04] 1.021 ACTUAL 88A YELLOW D [25.94] MATERIAL 88B YEL-BLK ST. E 82B LT. BL-BLK ST. F 81B WHT-NLK ST. G 150 BLACK H PLUG MOUNTING HOLE 1.480 [37.59] .090 L.H. MIRROR R.H. MIRROR [2.29] 88B 89 89 88B M M M M UP 89 RIGHT 81A UP 89 RIGHT 81B DOWN LEFT DOWN LEFT 1.280 [35.51] CONN P/N 12045688 9.060 [230.12] CONN P/N 12047886 88A 82A 89 81A 88B 82B LH RH 81B 89 40 150 V/D L/R BATTERY GROUND SCHEMATIC *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 19 MIRROR L R LW-Series Wiper/Washer Control - Introduction LW-Series LW-Series WIPER/WASHER CONTROLS The LW-Series Electronic Wiper Washer Control combines two switches into one self-contained unit allowing effortless control of both wash and wipe functions from a singular location. A variety of features and options including, Continuous low and high speed wiper positions, Six intermittent delay intervals ranging from 3-18 seconds, Push-to-wash button and an LED Night-light indicator combine to provide the flexibility to meet most any Cab design. The LW series is available for 14 or 28 volt operation and can be adapted to single or dual relay systems. Product Highlights: Typical Applications: Š Controls both wash and wipe functions of vehicles Š On/Off-Highway Equipment Š 14 or 28 Volts Š Agricultural Equipment Š Illuminated or Non-illuminated options Š Construction Equipment Š Laser etched legends available 20 www.carlingtech.com LW-Series Wiper/Washer Control - General Specifications Electrical Physical Characteristics Contact Rating 1 relay Illumination LED, rated 100,000 hours 1/2 life 8 amps, 14VDC Cover Acetate 4 amps, 28VDC Washer Actuator Silicone 2 relays Toggle Actuator Nylon 6/6 glass filled 1 amps, 14VDC Bracket Nylon 6/6 1 amps, 28VDC Connector Nylon 6/6 rated 85°C polarized Terminals .187 (7.4mm) Quick Connect Washer Function Momentary terminations standard. Toggle Function Maintained Intermittent Protection Reverse polarity protection Operation Momentary Over voltage protection Weight 44 grams Cold cranking protection according to SAE J1455, Sections. 4.11.1.1.1 Environmental and 4.11.1.2.1 Transient voltage protection which Operating Temperature -25°C to +85°C includes load dump and inductive Temperature Cycle According to SAE J1455, switching according to SAE J1455, Sec. 4.1.3.1 (See Figure below) sec. 4.11.2.2 T Electrostatic discharge protection 85C according to SAE J1455 Sec. 4.11.2.2.5.1 (Discharge a 150 pf capacitor that has been charged to a potential of 15kV through 150 Ohm resistor.) amb Meets all other EMI/EMC -40C requirements for class C trucks. 4 16 24 hour Mechanical Mechanical Vibration Sinusoidal Vibration: 10-55-10 Thermal Shock According to SAE J1455, Hz, 0.06” DA, one minute-cycle, Sec. 4.1.3.2 (See Figure below) three hours/axis T Random Vibration: Three 85 °C hours/axis, three mutually perpendicular axes with a test level 4G’s. Frequency Amplitude 5Hz 0.16 G2/Hz 100Hz 0.16 G2/Hz -40 °C 500Hz -3dB/octave roll-off Tests were conducted according 0 2 4 8 12 14 16 18 6 10 to SAE J1455, Sec 5.7 and hour Sec. 4.9.4. Shock: MIL-STD-202G Method Humidity According to SAE J1455, Sec. 4.2.3 (30 cycles for 8 hrs. with maximum 213B, Test Condition K, 30G’s, 11 ms. temperature of 85°C and 95% Endurance According to SAE J2349, March relative humidity. 97 for windshield washer switch Dust Bombardment According to SAE J1455, Sec. 4.7.3 for Trucks, Buses and (with dust concentration of 0.88gm/m for 24 hours.) Multipurpose Vehicles (20,000 cycle minimum). Salt Spray MIL-STD-202G, Method 101D for 96 hours. *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 21 LW-Series Wiper/Washer Control - Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications LW 1 A 1 1 Z 1 1 AG 1 00 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Legend Legend 2 Series Rating Intermittent Wiper/ Lamp 1 Lamp 2 Bracket Rocker/ Legend 1 Timing Washer Color Paddle Orientation Timing Color 1 SERIES 8 ROCKER / PADDLE COLOR LW Wiper/Washer Control with six intermittent positions: 1 Black low. high, wash/wipe 9 LEGEND #1 1 2 RATING 00 No legend 1 8A, 14VDC (1 relay) 4 1A, 14VDC (1 relay) For legend options, visit us at carlingtech.com 2 4A, 28VDC (1 relay) 5 1A, 14VDC (2 relay) 3 1A, 14VDC (1 relay) 6 1A, 28VDC (2 relay) 10 LEGEND ORIENTATION 0 No legend 1 Vertical (lamp 1 on top) 3 INTERMITTENT TIMING 2 Horizontal (lamp 1 on right) A 2-15 seconds 4 WIPER/WASHER TIMING 1 3 seconds 5 LAMP #1 (ABOVE WASH) Z No Lamp 2 Red LED 11 LEGEND #2 1 Green LED 3 Amber LED 00 No legend For legend options, visit us at carlingtech.com 6 LAMP #2 (ABOVE WIPE) Notes: Z No Lamp 2 Red LED 1 Relay coil current is 1A max. Relay must have an arc suppression in parallel with the coil. 1 Green LED 3 Amber LED Ref P/N LC2-01 for black wiper/washer connector housing. 7 BRACKET COLOR 1 Black 1.975±.010 [50.18±0.25] 0.060R MAX. 4 PLACES [1.52] 1.013±.010 [25.74' 0.25] 0.278 [7.06] TEST CUT LOW INTERMITTENT OFF 1.739±.008 OPENING HIGH IN ACTUAL [44.17 ±0.20] MATERIAL 1.082 PRESS TO WASH [27.49] .866 - .881 [22.00-22.38] SWITCH MOUNTING HOLE 3.492 [88.70] 2.522 [64.06] 1.724 [43.79] 1.700 0.855 [43.18] [21.72] Principles of operation: From the OFF position, moving the toggle one step up puts the function into the intermittent slower mode (18 sec.). Moving the toggle another step up reduces the delay time by 3 sec for each of the next six steps. The seventh step up puts the motor into a continuous low-speed mode and the last step up puts the motor into the high-speed mode. Reversing the previous steps puts the motor finally into the stop/parking mode. During the OFF position, intermittent and low-speed modes, pressing the wash button activates the wash function. Wipe function starts after a two second delay from the onset of the washing and continues for three continuous wipes after the wash button is released. For convenience, the wash function is not active during the high-speed mode. The Wiper Control is designed to interface with single or dual relay systems for intermittent delay and the park function. The high speed is driven directly via a power transistor internal to the module. The coil of the relay is pulled down to ground during the intermittent, low-speed and high-speed modes respectively. (Contact Carling Technologies for wiring diagrams) 22 www.carlingtech.com N-Series Addressable Rocker Switches - Introduction N-Series N-Series ADDRESSABLE ROCKER SWITCHES The N-Series Addressable Switch combines the look and feel of a traditional electro-mechanical control coupled with a built in PCB and provides a flexible, cost effective alternative to a CAN/LIN based switch. The N-Series produces up to 144 individual switch IDs by using a resistive ladder circuit. Different switch IDs are achieved by changing the resistor values tied to individual loads, which can then be assigned to the specific functions that the switch is controlling. Each switch is connected to an ECU and the application software is written to recognize the switch IDs to determine which load is being controlled as well as the selected actuator position. As a result, the wiring harnesses are more simplified and specific loads can now be rearranged without the need for a costly and time consuming harness redesign, giving designers the ultimate in design flexibility. Resources: Download 3D CAD Files IGS STP Product Highlights: Typical Applications: Š Cost effective alternative to CAN/LIN based switch Š On-Highway Transportation Equipment Š Up to 144 individual switch IDs Š Agricultural Equipment Š Simplified wiring harnesses Š Construction Equipment Š Readdressable loads without harness redesign Š Marine Š Available with paddle or rocker actuator www.carlingtech.com 23 N-Series Addressable Rocker Switches - General Specifications Electrical Environmental Contact Rating .4VA @ 28VDC (MAX) Environmental IP67 for above the panel Dielectric Strength 1250 Volts RMS between pole to components of the actual switch, pole 3750 Volts RMS between live representing an index of protection parts and accessible surfaces as applied to electrical equipment Insulation Resistance 50 Megaohms in accordance with IEC 529, BS Contact Bounce 20 milliseconds max. 5490, DIN 400 50 & NFC 20 010. Contacts gold plated Operating Temperature -40°C to +85°C Terminals Brass or copper/silver plate Vibration Per SAE J1399 “electronic 3/16” (4.76mm) Tachometer Specification” for Class Quick Connect terminations II truck and bus applications. standard. Test Criteria: No change in resistance and no evidence of Mechanical physical damage. Salt Spray Exposure to 95% water, 5% NCI Endurance 250,000 cycles minimum fog solution at 95 degrees F according to ASTM B 117-90 “Standard Method of Salt Physical Spray (fog) Testing”. Test Criteria: Lighted Incandescent - rated 10,000 hours No visual evidence of corrosion or LED - rated 100,000 hours 1/2 life external physical damage. (LED is internally ballasted for Humidity Samples were exposed to selected voltages to 24VDC) temperature profile, while Seals Rocker, base & bracket are sealed. maintaining 90% +- 5% relative Base Nylon 66 GF rated to 85°C with a humidity for 30 cycles. Test flammability rating of 94V0. Criteria: No evidence of external Rocker and Paddle Nylon 66 Reinforced, rated to physical deterioration. 105°C Laser Etched Rocker Polycarbonate rated at 100°C. Mounting Specifications Lens Polycarbonate rated at 100°C. .867 [22.02] 1.970 Front snap-in. Connector Nylon 66 rated at 85°C. Polarized. Bracket Nylon Zytel Actuator Travel (Angular Displacement) TEST CUT HOLE IN 1.734 [44.04] ACTUAL 2 position 26° .260 [6.60] MATERIAL .390 [9.91] 3 position 13° from center 1.020 [25.91] MOUNTING HOLE Panel Thickness Range .100 [2.54] Acceptable Panel Thickness .030 to .156 (.76mm to 3.96mm) 2.265 [57.53] Recommended: .030, .062, .093, .125 and .156 3.055 [77.60] .250 X .031 T1 [6.35 X .79] BAT T2 OUTPUT T3 (LOAD) GROUND PADDLE STYLE ACTUATOR Q.C. SELECTION GUIDE 1.300 [33.02] WIRE GAGE *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. COMPANY PACKARD .344 [8.74] 2 SERIES PART NO. AWG MM 24 www.carlingtech.com 12084590 12 3.0 1.570 [39.88] PACKARD 12052224 12 3.0 METRI-PACK 12015870 16-14 2.0-1.0 630 SERIES 12015869 20-18 1.0-.80 TIN PLATED 1.340 [34.04] 1.060 [26.92] 12020035 22-18 (2 REQ'D) .80.-.50 (2 REQ'D) BRASS 12052222 20-22 .50-.35 N-Series Addressable Rocker Switches - Ordering Scheme N 4 1 2 1 A N H 1 1 1 2 46 1 EK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Series Circuit R1 R2 Resistor Illumination Lamp Lamp Bracket Actuator Lens Style Lens Style Legend Actuator Legend & Color & Color Orientation Lens Legend Resistive Resistive Constants Lamp 1 Lamp 2 ID ID 1 SERIES 7,8 LAMP (SAME CODING FOR BOTH SELECTIONS) N Selection 7: above terminals 10 & 9; Selection 8: above terminals 12 & 11 No lamp 0 2 2 CIRCUIT LED* Red Amber Green Terminal Orientation 12VDC C N H * Consult factory for “daylight bright”, blue/green and white LED options. ( ) - momentary Typical current draw for LED is 20ma. 1 9 BRACKET COLOR Black White Gray Red Standard Bracket 6 7 8 9 Rockerguard at Lamp 1 L B C D Position: 1 2 3 Rockerguard at Lamp 2 E F G H STANDARD 2 & 4 Connected Terminals 1 & 2 1 10 ACTUATOR STYLE AND COLOR 4 ON NONE ON Black White Gray Red Laser Etched 5 (ON) NONE ON Rocker A B C D 1 6 ON ON ON Paddle J N K M 7 (ON) ON ON 8 (ON) ON (ON) 11 & 12 LENS STYLE AND COLOR Lens color for LEDs must be clear, white, or match color of LED. 3 R1 RESISTIVE IDENTIFICATION 1 1020 7 3570 0 - No Actuator Z - No Lens 2 1300 8 4320 Clear White Amber Green Red Blue 3 1620 A 5230 1 - B G M T Large Transparent 4 2000 B 6340 - 7 C H N U Large Translucent 5 2430 C 7870 3 - D J P V Bar Transparent 6 2940 D 10000 - 9 E K R W Bar Translucent 5 A - - - - Laser Etch background color 4 R2 RESISTIVE IDENTIFICATION 1 1020 7 3570 13 LEGEND ORIENTATION 2 1300 8 4320 00 No legend this location / no actuator 3 1620 A 5230 For legend options & codes, see pages 54-65 of this catalog. 4 2000 B 6340 5 2430 C 7870 6 2940 D 10000 14 LEGEND ORIENTATION 0 No legend (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) 1 Orientation 1 - vertical, lamp 1 on top 5 RESISTOR CONSTANTS (INDICATES SWITCH STATE) 2 Orientation 2 - horizontal, lamp 1 on right R3 R4 R5 3 Orientation 3 - vertical, lamp 1 on bottom 1 1300 10000 5320 4 Orientation 4 - vertical, lamp 1 on left 2 825 6650 3830 6 ILLUMINATION Lamp #1:above terminals 9 & 10 end of switch.; Lamp #2 above terminals 11 & 12 end of switch. Positive (+) and negative (-) symbols apply to LED lamps only. Lamps Illumination Type Lamp wired to Terminals S None 1 2 3 4 A # 1 Standard 10+ 12- 3AA-146 3AA-246 # 2 Standard 11+ 9- B # 1 & 2 Special Parallel 11+ 9- C # 1 & 2 Special Parallel 10+ 9- 15 ACTUATOR LENS LEGEND 1 # 1 Independent 10+ 9- 00 No legend this location / no actuator 2 # 2 Independent 12+ 11- For legend options & codes, see pages 54-65 of this catalog. 3 #1 Independent 10+ 9- Notes: #2 Independent 12+ 9- 1 Custom colors are available. Consult factory. 4 #1 Independent 10+ 9- 2 Switch supplied with .187 tab terminals. #2 Independent 12+ 11- www.carlingtech.com 25 N-Series Addressable Rocker Switches - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] N-SERIES N-SERIES SHOWN WITH LASER ETCHED ACTUATOR SHOWN WITH ROCKER GUARD 1.970 [50.04] 1.020 [25.91] .400 [10.16] .435 [10.16] 1.450 [36.83] .855 [21.72] N-SERIES N-SERIES SHOWN WITH LARGE LENS SHOWN WITH BARS LENS AND PADDLE ACTUATOR AND CONNECTOR 1.970 [50.04] 1.020 [25.91] .400 [10.16] .391 [7.62] 2.380 [60.45] N-SERIES N-SERIES LH1 REMOVABLE HOLE PLUG WITH NON-SERRATED WINGS LH2 HOLE PLUG WITH SERRATED WINGS LC2-01 BLACK .187 TAB CONNECTOR (PACKARD 480-SERIES) 1.970 [50.04] 1.020 [25.91] .500 [12.70] .920 [23.37] 1.325 [33.66] .300 [7.62] 1.710 [43.43] .790 [20.07] .855 [21.72] 26 www.carlingtech.com N-Series Addressable Rocker Switches - Circuit Diagrams & Lamp Circuit Diagrams Circuit Diagrams: Lamp Circuit Diagrams: SWITCH CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS SWITCH CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS LAMP CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS LAMP CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS CIRCUIT CIRCUIT SCHEMATIC SCHEMATIC CODE CODE ILLUM. ILLUM. SCHEMATIC SCHEMATIC CODE CODE 9 9 (-) 9 (-) 9 (+) 11 (+) 11 INTERNAL INTERNAL CIRCUIT CIRCUIT R5 R3 R4 R1 R2 R5 R3 R4 R1 R2 P1 P3 P1 P3 BOARD BOARD 4 4 2 2 1 1 (TYPICAL) (TYPICAL) A A (-) 12 (-) 12 (+) 10 (+) 10 2 7 8 2 7 8 9 9 (-) 9 (-) 9 (+) 11 (+) 11 B B R5 R3 R4 R1 R2 R5 R3 R4 R1 R2 P1 P3 P1 P3 1 2 1 2 5 5 2 7 8 2 7 8 (-) 9 (-) 9 9 9 C 1 C 2 1 2 P2 P2 R5 R3 R4 R1 R2 R5 R3 R4 R1 R2 P1 P3 P1 P3 (+) 10 (+) 10 6 6 (-) 9 (-) 9 2 7 8 2 7 8 1 1 1 1 9 9 (+) 10 (+) 10 P2 P2 R5 R5 R3 R4 R1 R2 R3 R4 R1 R2 P1 P1 P3 P3 7 7 (-) 11 (-) 11 2 7 8 2 7 8 2 2 2 2 (+) 12 (+) 12 9 9 (-) 9 (-) 9 P2 P2 R5 R3 R4 R1 R2 R5 R3 R4 R1 R2 P1 P1 P3 P3 8 8 1 2 1 2 3 3 2 7 8 2 7 8 (+) 12 (+) 12 (+) 10 (+) 10 (-) 9 (-) 9 (-) 11 (-) 11 2 2 1 1 4 4 (+) 12 (+) 12 (+) 10 (+) 10 www.carlingtech.com 27 SEALED ROCKERS Carling’s Sealed Rocker switches feature the V-Series Contura and L-Series families of illuminated and non-illuminated rocker switches, which set the industry standard for sealed switches. They offer complete protection against dust and prolonged effects of spray and immersion under pressure. SELECTOR GUIDE V-Series W-Series L-Series 1, 2 1, 2 1, 2 Poles up to up to 20/15A 12/24VDC up to 15A 125VAC Ratings 15A 125VAC 10A 24VDC 10A 250VAC 10A 250VAC 20A 18VDC IP68 including connector, bezel- IP66/68, rocker, paddle, locking IP67, rocker, paddle, less rocker, paddle & locking Actuator rocker locking rocker rocker .830” x 1.450” .830” x 1.450” .867” x 1.734” Mounting Hole [ [ [ 21.08mm x 36.83mm] 21.08mm x 36.83mm] 22mm x 44mm] Specifications snap-in mount snap-in mount snap-in mount .250 tabs .187 tab solder lug .110 tabs Termination .250 tabs wire leads incandescent, LED, neon LED incandescent, LED Illumination UL, CSA n/a n/a Approvals *Options and approvals shown may apply to specific construction combinations only, consult factory for clarification. Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specifications without prior notice. 28 www.carlingtech.com V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Introduction V V-Series -Series CONTURA SWITCHES Carling Technologies’ sealed V-Series Contura switches are well known for their cutting edge design, high quality, maximum performance and unmatched reliability. These switches are a staple in the marine and transportation industries and have passed a range of environmental, corrosion, temperature, vibration, shock and sealing tests including MIL Std 202F, MIL Std 510.1, UL 1500, ISO 8846, IEC 60529 and BS 5490 among others, making them one of the most rugged and reliable switches ever manufactured. Resources: Download 3D CAD Files IGS STP Watch Product Video Product Highlights: Typical Applications: • Certified to IP66/68 with dual seals around lamps • Marine Panels and rocker stem. • Emergency Vehicles • Silver plated butt contact mechanism provides • Trucks reliability up to and beyond 100K electrical cycles • Buses • Greaseless construction withstands temperature • Construction Equipment extremes down to -40˚C • Motorcycles & ATVs • The switch accommodates up to 10 terminals and • Farm Equipment endless illumination and circuit options. • Commercial Appliances • The switch connector allows the user to preload • Military Vehicles FQC terminals for ease of assembly. • Mining Equipment • Numerous choices of removable rockers allow for • Golf Carts style change without having to retest or re-qualify • Floor Cleaning Equipment the switch base. • Utility Vehicles www.carlingtech.com 29 V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Design Features V-Series Switch DESIGN FEATURES INTERCHANGEABLE ACTUATORS DUAL SEAL PROTECTION CLEAN CONNECTIONS Panel redesign is a snap with our wide Seals out water, dust, Options for both eight and ten range of rocker styles. Achieve maximum debris, and enables switch terminal base styles with AMP & design variety with minimum inventory. certification to IP66/68 for Packard compatible connectors Simply swap rockers to create an entirely front panel components. affords myriad circuit options new look for your panel. while providing ease of assembly. MULTIPLE LIGHTING OPTIONS BRASS ROLLER PIN SILVER PLATED BUTT OPTIONAL PANEL SEAL In addition to Incandescent Robust mechanism CONTACT MECHANISM Helps prevent water/dust lamps, our LED illumination is eliminates the need for Providing 50k to 100k ingress behind panel. offered in a wide array of light lubricants. Enables switch electrical cycles and intensities, colors, as well as to withstand -40°C to a variety of different dual level, tri-color, and flashing +85°C temperatures. electrical ratings. options. *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. 30 www.carlingtech.com V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Actuator Options & Accessories Contura II & III Contura X The Contura II & III actuators are The raised bracket/bezel on the constructed of thermoplastic Contura X helps prevent inadvertent polycarbonate and are offered with actuation of the rocker, as well as a hard nylon overlay or a “soft-touch” preventing debris from being trapped elastomer overlay. These models under the actuator. This curved rocker incorporate aesthetic designs on style is available with a variety of the top and bottom of the rocker lenses and legends. featuring two rows of raised “bumps” on the Contura II and three “indented” lines on the Contura III. Contura IV Contura XI The Contura IV’s “Shape to create The raised bracket/bezel on the a Shape” actuator works with the Contura XI helps prevent inadvertent curves, contours & advanced styling actuation of the rocker, as well as of the latest panel designs, flowing preventing debris from being trapped with these advanced curves & radii. under the actuator. This convex style This actuator style fits on the Contura rocker is available with a wide variety flush bracket/bezel. of lenses and legends. Contura XII Contura V The Contura XII version features a The symmetrically curved Contura paddle style actuator with the raised V actuator provides the perfect bracket/bezel of Contura X and XI. The complement to the Contura IV’s contoured handle design provides “Shape to create a Shape” design intuitive recognition and ease of concept. With its flush style mounting operation and is available with all bracket, Contura V can be mounted in Contura X and XI lens and legend between two Contura IV’s, by itself, or offerings. in groups. Contura VI (WAVE) Contura XIV The Contura VI WAVE sealed rocker The Contura XIV represents a sleek new switches, when used in a row, create crossover rocker design which should an uniquely appealing “wave” design appeal to Trucks, Buses and Heavy on your panel. A variety of colors and Vehicles as well as the Marine Industry. finishes are available for both rocker Intuitive feel is provided by recessed and wave insert. Contura VI features ridges along with a Center Groove bar and oval lenses. which effectively defines the boundary between top and bottom switch functions. Contura VII Illuminated Indicators Contura VII featuring gently & Accessories curved corners and edges assuring Alert operator of systems functions compatibility with most any panel or malfunctions, are offered with design. Intuitive feel is maximized removable/replaceable lamps in by the use of 2 embossed circular Contura II, II, V or X styles. Accessories pads located at opposite ends of include connectors, mounting panels, the rocker. Any combination of Bar hole plugs, panel seals, and actuator or Oval style lenses can be located removal tools. Refer to accessories page in the pads providing a truly unique for full details look, exclusive to Contura VII. www.carlingtech.com 31 V–Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - General Specifications Electrical Agency Certifications Contact Rating .4VA @ 24VDC (MAX) resistive 15 amps, 125VAC 10 amps, 250VAC 1/2 HP 125-250VAC 20 amps, 4-14VDC Environmental 15 amps, 15-28VDC 10A, 14VT Sealing Sealed version: IP66/68, this rating applies to front panel components of 6A, 125VAC L the actual switch only, and signifies Dielectric Strength 1500 Volts RMS complete protection against dust as Insulation Resistance 50 Megohms well as powerful jets of water. Initial Contact Resistance 10 milliohms max. @ 4VDC Corrosion Mixed Flowing Gas (MFG) Class III Life 50,000 - 100,000 cycles circuit 3 year accelerated exposure per dependent ASTM B-827, B-845 Silver and gold Contacts Silver alloy, silver tin-oxide, fine contacts silver Operating Temp. -40°C to +85°C Terminals Brass or copper/silver plate 1/4” Vibration 1 Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 204D (6.3mm) Quick Connect Test Condition A 0.06 DA or 10G’s terminations standard. Solder lug, 10-500 Hz. Tested with VCH connector. Test criteria - No loss of circuit during Wire Lead test, pre and post test contact resistance. Mechanical Vibration 2 Resonance search Endurance 150,000 cycles minimum 24-50 Hz 0.40 DA circuit dependent 50-2000 Hz ±10 G’s peak Horizontal Axis 3-5 G’s max. Random Physical 24 Hz 0.06 PSD-Gsq/Hz Lighted Incandescent - rated 10,000 60 Hz 0.50 hours Neon - rated 25,000 hours 100 Hz 0.50 LED - rated 100,000 hours 1/2 life 200 Hz 0.025 (LED is internally ballasted for 2000 Hz 0.025 voltages to 24VDC) No loss of circuit during test; <10μ Seals Internal seconds chatter. Optional external gasket panel seal Shock Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 213B, Test Base Polyester blend rated to 125°C with Condition K @ 30G’s. Tested with VCH connector. Test criteria - No loss a UL flammability rating of 94V0. of circuit during test, pre and post Contura II,III,IV,V, Hard Surface: Basic actuator test contact resistance. VI, VII Actuator structure molded of thermoplastic Salt Spray Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 101D, Test polycarbonate with a hard Nylon 66 Condition A, 96 Hrs. Sealed version only. thermoplastic surface overlay. Dust Mil STD 810, Method 510.2 Air Velocity Soft Surface: Basic actuator structure 300 Ft/Min Duration 16Hr molded of thermoplastic polycarbonate Thermal Shock Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 107F, Test with an elastomer overlay. Cond. A, -55°C to +85°C. Test criteria - Contura X,XI,XII Actuator,VP Nylon 66 Reinforced rated to 105°C pre and post test contact resistance Lens Polycarbonate rated at 100°C Moisture Resistance Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 106F, Test Criteria - pre and post test contact Contura XIV Polycarbonate lens/sub-rocker with resistance ABS shell Ignition Protection All Contura switches with sealed construction meet the requirements Actuator Travel (Angular Displacement) of UL1500/ISO8846 for ignition 2 position 18° protection, in addition to 3 positions 9° from center conformance with EC directive 94/25/EC for marine products. .830[21.08] Mounting Specifications Panel Thickness Range Gaskets Acceptable Panel Thickness TEST CUT HOLE IN 0 .030 to .250 (.76 to 6.35mm) 1.450[36.83] ACTUAL MATERIAL 1 .030 to .109 & .147 to .157 (.76 to 2.77mm & 3.73 to 3.98mm) Recommended: No gasket with panel SWITCH MOUNTING HOLE thickness of .032, .062, .093, .125,.187 or .250 32 www.carlingtech.com V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Contura II & III - Ordering Scheme V 1 D A B T 0 B A R B 00 0 00 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Series Circuit Rating Termination Illumination Lamp Lamp Bracket Actuator Lens Color Legend Legend Actuator Orientation Lens Legend 6,7 LAMP (SAME CODING FOR BOTH SELECTIONS) 1 SERIES Selection 6: above terminals 1 & 4; Selection 7: above terminals 3 & 6 V No lamp 0 Neon 1 125VAC 2 250VAC Incandescent 4 3V 5 6V 6 12V 7 18V 8 24V 2 CIRCUIT LED* superbright superbright Terminal Connections as viewed ( ) - momentary Red Amber Green Red from bottom of switch: SP - single pole - uses terminals 1, 2 & 3. 2VDC A L F R 8 terminal 10 terminal DP - double pole uses terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 & 6. 6VDC B M G S 8 - - 7 8 - - 7 Terminals 7, 8, 9 & 10 for lamp circuit only. 12VDC C N H T 1 - - 4 1 - - 4 24VDC D P J V 2 - - 5 2 - - 5 * Consult factory for “daylight bright” LED options. Typical current draw for LED is 20ma. 3 - - 6 3 - - 6 10 - - 9 Position: 1 2 3 1 8 FLUSH BRACKET COLOR , PANEL SEAL SP DP 2 & 3, 5 & 6 Connected Terminals 1 & 2, 4 & 5 Black White Gray 1 A ON NONE OFF No Seal B W G 2 B (ON) NONE OFF 3 C ON NONE (OFF) One Seal C Y H 4 D ON NONE ON 5 F ON NONE (ON) 6 J ON OFF ON 9 ACTUATOR 7 K ON OFF (ON) 0 No Actuator 8 L (ON) OFF (ON) A, B Contura II SPECIAL CIRCUITS C, D Contura III H* 2 & 3 2 & 3, 5 & 4 5 & 4 G* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 OFF Actuator thick end over terminals: 3,6 1,4 S* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 1 & 2 M* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 OFF R* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 2 & 1 10 LENS E* 5 & 6 5 & 3 5 & 1 0 - No Actuator Z - No Lens *Jumper between terminals 2 & 5 for circuits H,G,M,R & S are specified in Clear White Amber Green Red Blue selection 4. External jumper between terminals 2 & 4 for circuit E are 1 6 8 G M T provided by customer. Circuit E may be used for SP OFF-ON-ON circuit. 2 7 C H N U 3 8 D J P V 3 Square lens options only available for Contura II. 3 RATING 1 .4VA @ 28VDC Resistive 4 9 E K R W B 15A 24V 5 A F L S Y C 20A 18V Lens color for LEDs must be clear, white, or match color of LED. D 20A 12V Green or blue lenses are not recommended with Neon lamps. E 20A 14V, 10A 14VT (circuit 1, 4 , A & D only) F 10A 14V, 6A 14VT (circuit G only) M .4VA/20A 12V 1 11 ACTUATOR COLOR AND TEXTURE N .4VA/15A 24V 0 - No Actuator Black Gray Red White Soft Surface B G R W 4 TERMINATION / BASE STYLE Hard Surface C H S Y 8 term 10 Term Termination Jumper 1 2 .250 TAB (QC) no barriers No A B .250 TAB (QC) with barriers No 2 12 ACTUATOR LENS OR BODY LEGENDS J K .250 TAB (QC) no barriers Yes T2 to 5 11 ON 12 OFF 13 I 14 O 3 5 Solder Lug no barriers No OFF ON O I C D Solder Lug No 5 6 Wire Leads no barriers No 15 O O 16 O O 17 O I 18 I O E F Wire Leads No F N N F Note: Codes J & K for circuits H, G & M. Do not use silicone based F F lubricants to reduce terminal insertion forces during connector assembly, For additional legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. as it is detrimental to function and performance. 13 LEGEND ORIENTATION 5 ILLUMINATION 0 No legend (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) Lamp #1:above terminals 1 & 4 end of switch.; Lamp #2 above terminals 1 Orientation 1 3 & 6 end of switch. Positive (+) and negative (-) symbols apply to LED 2 Orientation 2 lamps only 3 Orientation 3 Sealed Unsealed Lamps Illumination Type Lamp wired to Terminals 4 Orientation 4 S 0 NONE – – A 1 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) B 2 1 DOWN 3 (+) 7 (–) C 3 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) 1 2 3 4 D 4 1 DOWN 3 (+) 7 (–) 2 DOWN 1 (+) 7 (–) E 5 1 UP 1 (+) 7 (–) 14 ACTUATOR LENS LEGEND 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) 00 No legend this location / no actuator F 6 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) Selection 14 required when switch 2 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) requires two legends. If the two legends consist of one lens and one G 7 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) body legend, lens legend must be specified in selection 12; body legend 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) specified in selection 14. H Z 2 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) For legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. U Y 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 10 (+) 9 (–) Notes: SINGLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY Consult factory to verify horsepower rating for your particular circuit choice. J 8 1 DOWN 3 (+) 8 (–) 1 Custom colors are available. Consult factory. 2 INDEPENDENT 6 (+) 7 (–) 2 Body legends not available on Soft surface actuators; White imprinting is standard K W 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) on black actuators; Black imprinting is standard on white, red and gray actuators. 2 INDEPENDENT 6 (+) 7 (–) Custom colors are available, consult factory. DOUBLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY 3 Additional ratings available. See V-Series Switch Accessories page. L 9 1 DOWN 3 (+) 6 (–) 4 Contura II available with two square lenses. Consult factory for details. M R 1 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) N T 1 DOWN 3 (+) 6 (–) 2 DOWN 1 (+) 4 (–) P V 1 UP 1 (+) 4 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) www.carlingtech.com 33 V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Contura II & III Locking - Ordering Scheme V 1 D A S W 0 B A Z E 00 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Series Circuit Rating Termination Illumination Lock Lamp Bracket Actuator Lens Function Legend Legend Orientation 1 SERIES 7 LAMP Lamp above terminals 3 & 6 end of switch V No lamp 0 Neon 1 125VAC 2 250VAC Incandescent 4 3V 5 6V 6 12V 7 18V 8 24V 2 CIRCUIT LED* superbright superbright Terminal Connections as viewed ( ) - momentary Red Amber Green Red from bottom of switch: SP - single pole - uses terminals 1, 2 & 3. 2VDC A L F R 8 terminal 10 terminal DP - double pole uses terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 & 6. 6VDC B M G S 8 - - 7 8 - - 7 Terminals 7, 8, 9 & 10 for lamp circuit only. 12VDC C N H T 1 - - 4 1 - - 4 24VDC D P J V * Consult factory for “daylight bright” LED options. Typical current draw for 2 - - 5 2 - - 5 LED is 20ma. 3 - - 6 3 - - 6 10 - - 9 Position: 1 2 3 1 8 FLUSH BRACKET COLOR , PANEL SEAL SP DP 2 & 3, 5 & 6 Connected Terminals 1 & 2, 4 & 5 Black White Gray 1 A ON NONE OFF No Seal B W G 4 D ON NONE ON 6 J ON OFF ON One Seal C Y H 7 K ON OFF (ON) 8 L (ON) OFF (ON) 1 9 N OFF NONE ON 9 HARD SURFACE ACTUATOR SPECIAL CIRCUITS Black Gray Red White H* 2 & 3 2 & 3, 5 & 4 5 & 4 Contura II A B G H G* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 OFF S* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 1 & 2 Contura III C D E F M* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 OFF R* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 2 & 1 Actuator orientation above terminals: 3,6 1,4 E* 5 & 6 5 & 3 5 & 1 *Jumper between terminals 2 & 5 for circuits H,G,M,R & S are specified in selection 4. External jumper between terminals 2 & 4 for circuit E are 10 LENS provided by customer. Circuit E may be used for SP OFF-ON-ON circuit. Z - No Lens Clear White Amber Green Red Blue 3 8 D J P V 4 3 RATING 1 .4VA @ 28VDC Resistive Lens color for LEDs must be clear, white, or match color of LED. Green or blue lenses are not recommended with Neon lamps. B 15A 24V C 20A 18V D 20A 12V 1 E 20A 14V, 10A 14VT (circuit 1, 4 , A & D only) 11 ACTUATOR LOCK FUNCTION AND COLOR 3 F 10A 14V, 6A 14VT (circuit G only) Lock Color Up Down Up & Down Center M .4VA/20A 12V Match Actuator A H R 1 N .4VA/15A 24V Black B J S 2 White C K T 3 Red D L V 4 4 TERMINATION / BASE STYLE Safety Orange E M W 5 8 term 10 Term Termination Jumper 1 2 .250 TAB (QC) no barriers No 2 A B .250 TAB (QC) with barriers No 12 ACTUATOR LENS OR BODY LEGEND J K .250 TAB (QC) no barriers Yes T2 to 5 00 - No Legend 3 5 Solder Lug no barriers No 21 22 23 24 C D Solder Lug No OFF ON O I 5 6 Wire Leads no barriers No E F Wire Leads No 25 O 26 O 27 O 28 I Note: Codes J & K for circuits H, G & M. Do not use silicone based F N lubricants to reduce terminal insertion forces during connector assembly, F For additional legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. as it is detrimental to function and performance. 13 LEGEND ORIENTATION 5 ILLUMINATION & SWITCH SEALING 0 No legend (used with codes 21-28 in selection 12) Lamp #1:above terminals 1 & 4 end of switch.; Lamp #2 above terminals 1 Orientation 1 3 & 6 end of switch. Positive (+) and negative (-) symbols apply to LED 2 Orientation 2 lamps only 3 Orientation 3 Sealed Unsealed Lamps Illumination Type Lamp wired to Terminals 4 Orientation 4 S 0 NONE – – C 3 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) 1 2 3 4 H Z 2 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) DOUBLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY M R 1 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) 6 LOCK Lock above terminals 1 & 4 end of switch W lock Notes: Consult factory to verify horsepower rating for your particular circuit choice. 1 Custom colors are available. Consult factory. 2 White imprinting is standard on black actuators; Black imprinting is standard on white, red and gray actuators. Custom colors are available, consult factory. 3 Only available with 3 position circuits. Center OFF and special circuits only available with center position lock function. 4 Additional ratings available. See V-Series Switch Accessories page. 34 www.carlingtech.com V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Contura IV - Ordering Scheme V 1 D A B T 0 B E P C 00 0 00 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Series Circuit Rating Termination Illumination Lamp Lamp Bracket Actuator Lens Color Legend Legend Actuator Orientation Lens Legend 6,7 LAMP (SAME CODING FOR BOTH SELECTIONS) 1 SERIES Selection 6: above terminals 1 & 4; Selection 7: above terminals 3 & 6 V No lamp 0 Neon 1 125VAC 2 250VAC Incandescent 4 3V 5 6V 6 12V 7 18V 8 24V 2 CIRCUIT LED* superbright superbright Terminal Connections as viewed ( ) - momentary Red Amber Green Red from bottom of switch: SP - single pole - uses terminals 1, 2 & 3. 2VDC A L F R 8 terminal 10 terminal DP - double pole uses terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 & 6. 6VDC B M G S 8 - - 7 8 - - 7 Terminals 7, 8, 9 & 10 for lamp circuit only. 12VDC C N H T 1 - - 4 1 - - 4 24VDC D P J V 2 - - 5 2 - - 5 * Consult factory for “daylight bright” LED options. Typical current draw for LED is 20ma. 3 - - 6 3 - - 6 10 - - 9 Position: 1 2 3 1 8 FLUSH BRACKET COLOR , PANEL SEAL SP DP 2 & 3, 5 & 6 Connected Terminals 1 & 2, 4 & 5 Black White Gray 1 A ON NONE OFF No Seal B W G 2 B (ON) NONE OFF One Seal C Y H 3 C ON NONE (OFF) 4 D ON NONE ON 5 F ON NONE (ON) 6 J ON OFF ON 9 ACTUATOR 1,4 7 K ON OFF (ON) 0 No Actuator 8 L (ON) OFF (ON) E Contura IV, left orientation SPECIAL CIRCUITS T Contura IV, left orientation, laser etched H* 2 & 3 2 & 3, 5 & 4 5 & 4 F Contura IV, right orientation G* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 OFF R Contura IV, right orientation, laser etched S* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 1 & 2 3,6 Actuator orientation over terminals: M* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 OFF R* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 2 & 1 10 LENS E* 5 & 6 5 & 3 5 & 1 0 - No Actuator Z - No Lens *Jumper between terminals 2 & 5 for circuits H,G,M,R & S are specified in Clear White Amber Green Red Blue selection 4. External jumper between terminals 2 & 4 for circuit E are 1 6 8 G M T provided by customer. Circuit E may be used for SP OFF-ON-ON circuit. 2 7 C H N U 3 8 D J P V 4 3 RATING 4 9 E K R W 1 .4VA @ 28VDC Resistive 5 A F L S Y B 15A 24V E F C 20A 18V Lens color for LEDs must be clear, white, or match color of LED. D 20A 12V Green or blue lenses are not recommended with Neon lamps. E 20A 14V, 10A 14VT (circuit 1, 4 , A & D only) F 10A 14V, 6A 14VT (circuit G only) 1,5,6 M .4VA/20A 12V 11 ACTUATOR COLOR N .4VA/15A 24V No Actuator 0 Black C Gray H Red S White Y Nickel D Pewter E 4 TERMINATION / BASE STYLE 8 term 10 Term Termination Jumper 2 12 ACTUATOR LENS OR BODY LEGENDS 1 2 .250 TAB (QC) no barriers No 11 ON 12 OFF 13 I 14 O A B .250 TAB (QC) with barriers No OFF ON O I J K .250 TAB (QC) no barriers Yes T2 to 5 3 5 Solder Lug no barriers No 15 O O 16 O O 17 O I 18 I O C D Solder Lug No F N N F 5 6 Wire Leads no barriers No F F E F Wire Leads No For additional legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. Note: Codes J & K for circuits H, G & M. Do not use silicone based lubricants to reduce terminal insertion forces during connector assembly, as it is detrimental to function and performance. 13 LEGEND ORIENTATION 0 No legend (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) 1 Orientation 1 2 Orientation 2 5 ILLUMINATION & SWITCH SEALING 3 Orientation 3 Lamp #1:above terminals 1 & 4 end of switch.; Lamp #2 above terminals 4 Orientation 4 3 & 6 end of switch. Positive (+) and negative (-) symbols apply to LED lamps only 1 2 3 4 Sealed Unsealed Lamps Illumination Type Lamp wired to Terminals S 0 NONE – – A 1 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 14 ACTUATOR LENS LEGEND B 2 1 DOWN 3 (+) 7 (–) 00 No legend this location / no actuator C 3 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) Selection 14 required when switch D 4 1 DOWN 3 (+) 7 (–) requires two legends. If the two legends consist of one lens and one 2 DOWN 1 (+) 7 (–) body legend, lens legend must be specified in selection 12; body legend E 5 1 UP 1 (+) 7 (–) specified in selection 14. 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) For legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. F 6 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) Notes: G 7 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) Consult factory to verify horsepower rating for your particular circuit choice. 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) 1 Custom colors are available. Consult factory. H Z 2 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 White imprinting is standard on black actuators; Black imprinting is standard on white, U Y 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) red and gray actuators. Custom colors are available, consult factory. 2 INDEPENDENT 10 (+) 9 (–) 3 Gloss brow is on left side of E actuator and right side of F actuator. SINGLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY 4 Additional ratings available. See V-Series Switch Accessories page. J 8 1 DOWN 3 (+) 8 (–) 5 Laser etched rocker only available with lens code Z & actuator colors black, 2 INDEPENDENT 6 (+) 7 (–) nickel or pewter. K W 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 6 Pewter and nickel colors only available with laser etched actuator. 2 INDEPENDENT 6 (+) 7 (–) DOUBLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY L 9 1 DOWN 3 (+) 6 (–) M R 1 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) N T 1 DOWN 3 (+) 6 (–) 2 DOWN 1 (+) 4 (–) P V 1 UP 1 (+) 4 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) www.carlingtech.com 35 V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Contura V - Ordering Scheme V 1 D A B T 0 B G P C 00 0 00 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Series Circuit Rating Termination Illumination Lamp Lamp Bracket Actuator Lens Color Legend Legend Actuator Orientation Lens Legend 6,7 LAMP (SAME CODING FOR BOTH SELECTIONS) 1 SERIES Selection 6: above terminals 1 & 4; Selection 7: above terminals 3 & 6 V No lamp 0 Neon 1 125VAC 2 250VAC Incandescent 4 3V 5 6V 6 12V 7 18V 8 24V 2 CIRCUIT LED* superbright superbright Terminal Connections as viewed ( ) - momentary Red Amber Green Red from bottom of switch: SP - single pole - uses terminals 1, 2 & 3. 2VDC A L F R 8 terminal 10 terminal DP - double pole uses terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 & 6. 6VDC B M G S 8 - - 7 8 - - 7 Terminals 7, 8, 9 & 10 for lamp circuit only. 12VDC C N H T 1 - - 4 1 - - 4 24VDC D P J V * Consult factory for “daylight bright” LED options. Typical current draw for 2 - - 5 2 - - 5 LED is 20ma. 3 - - 6 3 - - 6 10 - - 9 Position: 1 2 3 1 8 FLUSH BRACKET COLOR , PANEL SEAL SP DP 2 & 3, 5 & 6 Connected Terminals 1 & 2, 4 & 5 Black White Gray 1 A ON NONE OFF No Seal B W G 2 B (ON) NONE OFF One Seal C Y H 3 C ON NONE (OFF) 4 D ON NONE ON 5 F ON NONE (ON) 6 J ON OFF ON 9 ACTUATOR 7 K ON OFF (ON) 0 No Actuator 8 L (ON) OFF (ON) G Contura V SPECIAL CIRCUITS P Contura V, laser etched H* 2 & 3 2 & 3, 5 & 4 5 & 4 G* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 OFF S* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 1 & 2 10 Lens M* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 OFF 0 - No Actuator Z - No Lens style & location: #1 / #2 R* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 2 & 1 Clear White Amber Green Red Blue E* 5 & 6 5 & 3 5 & 1 1 6 8 G M T *Jumper between terminals 2 & 5 for circuits H,G,M,R & S are specified in 2 7 C H N U selection 4. External jumper between terminals 2 & 4 for circuit E are provided by customer. Circuit E may be used for SP OFF-ON-ON circuit. 3 8 D J P V 4 9 E K R W 5 A F L S Y 4 3 RATING Lens color for LEDs must be clear, white, or match color of LED. 1 .4VA @ 28VDC Resistive Green or blue lenses are not recommended with Neon lamps. B 15A 24V C 20A 18V 1,3,5 D 20A 12V 11 ACTUATOR COLOR E 20A 14V, 10A 14VT (circuit 1, 4 , A & D only) No Actuator 0 Black C Gray H Red S F 10A 14V, 6A 14VT (circuit G only) White Y Nickel D Pewter E M .4VA/20A 12V N .4VA/15A 24V 2,6 12 ACTUATOR LENS OR BODY LEGENDS 11 ON 12 OFF 13 I 14 O 4 TERMINATION / BASE STYLE 8 term 10 Term Termination Jumper OFF ON O I 1 2 .250 TAB (QC) no barriers No 15 O O 16 O O 17 O I 18 I O A B .250 TAB (QC) with barriers No F N N F J K .250 TAB (QC) no barriers Yes T2 to 5 F F 3 5 Solder Lug no barriers No C D Solder Lug No For additional legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. 5 6 Wire Leads no barriers No E F Wire Leads No Note: Codes J & K for circuits H, G & M. Do not use silicone based 13 LEGEND ORIENTATION 0 No legend (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) lubricants to reduce terminal insertion forces during connector assembly, 1 Orientation 1 as it is detrimental to function and performance. 2 Orientation 2 3 Orientation 3 4 Orientation 4 5 ILLUMINATION & SWITCH SEALING Lamp #1:above terminals 1 & 4 end of switch.; Lamp #2 above terminals 3 & 6 end of switch. Positive (+) and negative (-) symbols apply to LED lamps only 1 2 3 4 Sealed Unsealed Lamps Illumination Type Lamp wired to Terminals S 0 NONE – – A 1 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) B 2 1 DOWN 3 (+) 7 (–) 14 ACTUATOR LENS LEGEND 00 No legend this location / no actuator C 3 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) Selection 14 required when switch D 4 1 DOWN 3 (+) 7 (–) requires two legends. If the two legends consist of one lens and one 2 DOWN 1 (+) 7 (–) body legend, lens legend must be specified in selection 12; body legend E 5 1 UP 1 (+) 7 (–) specified in selection 14. 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) For legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. F 6 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) Notes: G 7 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) Consult factory to verify horsepower rating for your particular circuit choice. 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) 1 Custom colors are available. Consult factory. H Z 2 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 White imprinting is standard on black actuators; Black imprinting is standard on U Y 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) white, red and gray actuators. Custom colors are available, consult factory. 2 INDEPENDENT 10 (+) 9 (–) 3 Laser Etched rocker only available with lens code Z & actuator colors black, SINGLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY nickel or pewter. J 8 1 DOWN 3 (+) 8 (–) 4 Additional ratings available. See V-Series Switch Accessories page. 2 INDEPENDENT 6 (+) 7 (–) 5 Nickel and Pewter colors only available with laser etched actuator. K W 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 6 Consult factory for laser etched lens callout. 2 INDEPENDENT 6 (+) 7 (–) DOUBLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY L 9 1 DOWN 3 (+) 6 (–) M R 1 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) N T 1 DOWN 3 (+) 6 (–) 2 DOWN 1 (+) 4 (–) P V 1 UP 1 (+) 4 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) 36 www.carlingtech.com V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Contura IV & V Locking - Ordering Scheme V 1 D A S W 0 B J Z E 00 0 8 9 10 11 12 13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Series Circuit Rating Termination Illumination Lock Lamp Bracket Actuator Lens Function Legend Legend Orientation 1 SERIES 7 LAMP V Lamp above terminals 3 & 6 end of switch No lamp 0 Neon 1 125VAC 2 250VAC 3 Incandescent 4 3V 5 6V 6 12V 7 18V 8 24V 2 CIRCUIT LED* superbright superbright Terminal Connections as viewed ( ) - momentary Red Amber Green Red from bottom of switch: SP - single pole - uses terminals 1, 2 & 3. 2VDC A L F R 8 terminal 10 terminal DP - double pole uses terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 & 6. 6VDC B M G S 8 - - 7 8 - - 7 Terminals 7, 8, 9 & 10 for lamp circuit only. 12VDC C N H T 1 - - 4 1 - - 4 24VDC D P J V * Consult factory for “daylight bright” LED options. Typical current draw for 2 - - 5 2 - - 5 LED is 20ma. 3 - - 6 3 - - 6 10 - - 9 Position: 1 2 3 1 8 FLUSH BRACKET COLOR , PANEL SEAL SP DP 2 & 3, 5 & 6 Connected Terminals 1 & 2, 4 & 5 Black White Gray 1 A ON NONE OFF No Seal B W G 4 D ON NONE ON One Seal C Y H 6 J ON OFF ON 7 K ON OFF (ON) 8 L (ON) OFF (ON) 9 N OFF NONE ON 9 HARD SURFACE ACTUATOR CONTURA IV: Orientation Black Gray Red White Left J K L M 4 3 RATING Right N P R S 1 .4VA @ 28VDC Resistive B 15A 24V CONTURA V: Actuator orientation over terminals: 3,6 1,4 C 20A 18V Orientation Black Gray Red White D 20A 12V U V W Y E 20A 14V, 10A 14VT (circuit 1, 4 , A & D only) F 10A 14V, 6A 14VT (circuit G only) Actuator orientation over terminals: 3,6 1,4 M .4VA/20A 12V N .4VA/15A 24V 5 10 LENS 4 TERMINATION / BASE STYLE Z - No Lens 8 term 10 Term Termination Jumper Clear White Amber Green Red Blue 1 2 .250 TAB (QC) no barriers No A B C D E F bar lens A B .250 TAB (QC) with barriers No G H J K L M oval lens J K .250 TAB (QC) no barriers Yes T2 to 5 3 5 Solder Lug no barriers No Lens color for LEDs must be clear, white, or match color of LED. C D Solder Lug No Green or blue lenses are not recommended with Neon lamps. 5 6 Wire Leads no barriers No E F Wire Leads No Note: Codes J & K for circuits H, G & M. Do not use silicone based 1 11 ACTUATOR LOCK FUNCTION AND COLOR lubricants to reduce terminal insertion forces during connector assembly, 3 Lock Color Up Down Up & Down Center as it is detrimental to function and performance. Match Actuator A H R 1 Black B J S 2 White C K T 3 5 ILLUMINATION & SWITCH SEALING Lamp #1:above terminals 1 & 4 end of switch.; Lamp #2 above terminals Red D L V 4 3 & 6 end of switch. Positive (+) and negative (-) symbols apply to LED Safety Orange E M W 5 lamps only Gray F G N 6 Sealed Unsealed Lamps Illumination Type Lamp wired to Terminals S 0 NONE – – C 3 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) 2 12 ACTUATOR LENS OR BODY LEGEND H Z 2 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 00 - No Legend DOUBLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY 21 22 23 24 M R 1 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) OFF ON O I 25 O 26 O 27 O 28 I 6 LOCK F N Lock above terminals 1 & 4 end of switch. F 6 W low profile lock Y high profile lock For additional legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. Notes: Consult factory to verify horsepower rating for your particular circuit choice. 13 LEGEND ORIENTATION 1 Custom colors are available. Consult factory. 0 No legend 2 White imprinting is standard on black actuators; Black imprinting is standard on white, 1 Orientation 1 red and gray actuators. Custom colors are available, consult factory. 2 Orientation 2 3 Only available with 3 position circuits. Center OFF and special circuits only available 3 Orientation 3 with center position lock function. 4 Orientation 4 4 Additional ratings available. See V-Series Switch Accessories page. 5 Located at T3-6 end of switch. 1 2 3 4 6 Contura V style only. www.carlingtech.com 37 V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Contura VI WAVE - Ordering Scheme V 1 D B G N T B H A 7 C B AC 1 00 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Bracket Actuator Lens Lens Color Insert Actuator Legend Actuator Series Circuit Rating Termination Illumination Lamp Lamp Color Lens Orientation Lens Legend 1 SERIES 6,7 LAMP V Lamp above terminals 3 & 6 end of switch No lamp 0 Neon 1 125VAC 2 250VAC Incandescent 4 3V 5 6V 6 12V 7 18V 8 24V 2 CIRCUIT LED* superbright superbright Terminal Connections as viewed ( ) - momentary Red Amber Green Red from bottom of switch: SP - single pole - uses terminals 1, 2 & 3. 2VDC A L F R 8 terminal 10 terminal DP - double pole uses terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 & 6. 6VDC B M G S 8 - - 7 8 - - 7 Terminals 7, 8, 9 & 10 for lamp circuit only. 12VDC C N H T 1 - - 4 1 - - 4 24VDC D P J V * Consult factory for “daylight bright” LED options. Typical current draw for 2 - - 5 2 - - 5 LED is 20ma. 3 - - 6 3 - - 6 10 - - 9 Position: 1 2 3 1 8 FLUSH BRACKET COLOR , PANEL SEAL SP DP 2 & 3, 5 & 6 Connected Terminals 1 & 2, 4 & 5 Black White Gray 1 A ON NONE OFF No Seal B W G 2 B (ON) NONE OFF 3 C ON NONE (OFF) One Seal C Y H 4 D ON NONE ON 5 F ON NONE (ON) 9 ACTUATOR 6 J ON OFF ON 7 K ON OFF (ON) 0 No Actuator H High Insert L Low Insert 8 L (ON) OFF (ON) SPECIAL CIRCUITS H* 2 & 3 2 & 3, 5 & 4 5 & 4 10,11 LENS G* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 OFF 0 - No Actuator Z - No Lens S* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 1 & 2 Clear White Amber Green Red Blue M* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 OFF R* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 2 & 1 – 7 C H N U Bar Lens Translucent E* 5 & 6 5 & 3 5 & 1 3 – D J P V Bar Lens Transparent *Jumper between terminals 2 & 5 for circuits H,G,M,R & S are specified in 4 – E K R W Oval Lens Transparent selection 4. External jumper between terminals 2 & 4 for circuit E are – A F L S Y Oval Lens Translucent provided by customer. Circuit E may be used for SP OFF-ON-ON circuit. Lens color for LEDs must be clear, white, or match color of LED. Green or blue lenses are not recommended with Neon lamps. 3 3 RATING 1 .4VA @ 28VDC Resistive B 15A 24V 12 ACTUATOR COLOR C 20A 18V C Black H Gray S Red Y White D 20A 12V E 20A 14V, 10A 14VT (circuit 1, 4 , A & D only) F 10A 14V, 6A 14VT (circuit G only) 13 INSERT COLOR N Bright Nickel Plated M .4VA/20A 12V B Black S Satin Chrome Plated N .4VA/15A 24V C Bright Chrome Plated T Satin Nickel Plated D Satin Chrome Painted W White 4 TERMINATION / BASE STYLE 8 term 10 Term Termination Jumper 2 1 2 .250 TAB (QC) no barriers No 14 ACTUATOR LENS OR BODY LEGENDS A B .250 TAB (QC) with barriers No 00 - No Legend this location/No actuator J K .250 TAB (QC) no barriers Yes T2 to 5 11 ON 12 OFF 13 I 14 O 3 5 Solder Lug no barriers No OFF ON O I C D Solder Lug No 5 6 Wire Leads no barriers No 15 O O 16 O O 17 O I 18 I O E F Wire Leads No F N N F Note: Codes J & K for circuits H, G & M. Do not use silicone based F F lubricants to reduce terminal insertion forces during connector assembly, For additional legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. as it is detrimental to function and performance. 15 LEGEND ORIENTATION 0 No legend (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) 5 ILLUMINATION & SWITCH SEALING Lamp #1:above terminals 1 & 4 end of switch.; Lamp #2 above terminals 1 Orientation 1 3 & 6 end of switch. Positive (+) and negative (-) symbols apply to LED 2 Orientation 2 lamps only 3 Orientation 3 Sealed Unsealed Lamps Illumination Type Lamp wired to Terminals 4 Orientation 4 S 0 NONE – – A 1 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) B 2 1 DOWN 3 (+) 7 (–) C 3 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) 1 2 3 4 D 4 1 DOWN 3 (+) 7 (–) 2 DOWN 1 (+) 7 (–) E 5 1 UP 1 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) 16 ACTUATOR LENS LEGEND F 6 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 00 No legend this location / no actuator 2 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) Selection 14 required when switch G 7 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) requires two legends. If the two legends consist of one lens and one 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) body legend, lens legend must be specified in selection 12; body legend H Z 2 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) specified in selection 14. U Y 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) For legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. 2 INDEPENDENT 10 (+) 9 (–) Notes: SINGLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY Consult factory to verify horsepower rating for your particular circuit choice. J 8 1 DOWN 3 (+) 8 (–) 1 Custom colors are available. Consult factory. 2 INDEPENDENT 6 (+) 7 (–) 2 White imprinting is standard on black actuators. Black imprinting is standard on white, K W 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) red and gray actuators. Custom colors are available, consult factory. 2 INDEPENDENT 6 (+) 7 (–) 3 Additional ratings available. See V-Series Switch Accessories page. DOUBLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY L 9 1 DOWN 3 (+) 6 (–) M R 1 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) N T 1 DOWN 3 (+) 6 (–) 2 DOWN 1 (+) 4 (–) P V 1 UP 1 (+) 4 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) 38 www.carlingtech.com V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Contura VII - Ordering Scheme V 1 D A B T 0 B Z R C 00 0 00 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Series Circuit Rating Termination Illumination Lamp Lamp Bracket Actuator Lens Color Legend Legend Actuator Orientation Lens Legend 6,7 LAMP (same coding for both selections) 1 SERIES Selection 6: above terminals 1 & 4; Selection 7: above terminals 3 & 6 V No lamp 0 Neon 1 125VAC 2 250VAC Incandescent 4 3V 5 6V 6 12V 7 18V 8 24V 2 CIRCUIT LED* superbright superbright Terminal Connections as viewed ( ) - momentary Red Amber Green Red from bottom of switch: SP - single pole - uses terminals 1, 2 & 3. 2VDC A L F R 8 terminal 10 terminal DP - double pole uses terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 & 6. 6VDC B M G S 8 - - 7 8 - - 7 Terminals 7, 8, 9 & 10 for lamp circuit only. 12VDC C N H T 1 - - 4 1 - - 4 24VDC D P J V * Consult factory for “daylight bright” LED options. Typical current draw for 2 - - 5 2 - - 5 LED is 20ma. 3 - - 6 3 - - 6 10 - - 9 Position: 1 2 3 1 8 FLUSH BRACKET COLOR , PANEL SEAL SP DP 2 & 3, 5 & 6 Connected Terminals 1 & 2, 4 & 5 Black White Gray 1 A ON NONE OFF No Seal B W G 2 B (ON) NONE OFF One Seal C Y H 3 C ON NONE (OFF) 4 D ON NONE ON 5 F ON NONE (ON) 9 ACTUATOR 6 J ON OFF ON 0 No Actuator 7 K ON OFF (ON) Z Contura VII 8 L (ON) OFF (ON) Actuator orientation over terminals: 3,6 1,4 SPECIAL CIRCUITS H* 2 & 3 2 & 3, 5 & 4 5 & 4 G* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 OFF S* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 1 & 2 10 LENS M* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 OFF Lens color for LEDs must be clear, white, or match color of LED. R* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 2 & 1 Green or blue lenses are not recommended with Neon lamps. E* 5 & 6 5 & 3 5 & 1 0 - No Actuator Z - No Lens *Jumper between terminals 2 & 5 for circuits H,G,M,R & S are specified in White Amber Green Red Blue Lens style & location selection 4. External jumper between terminals 2 & 4 for circuit E are 6 B G M T provided by customer. Circuit E may be used for SP OFF-ON-ON circuit. 7 C H N U 4 8 D J P V 3 RATING 1 .4VA @ 28VDC Resistive 9 E K R W B 15A 24V C 20A 18V A F L S Y D 20A 12V 1 2 3 4 5 E 20A 14V, 10A 14VT (circuit 1, 4 , A & D only) F 10A 14V, 6A 14VT (circuit G only) M .4VA/20A 12V N .4VA/15A 24V 1 11 ACTUATOR COLOR / THUMB PRINT COLOR O N/A - No Actuator C Black/Black H Grey/Black S Red/Black 4 TERMINATION / BASE STYLE Y White/Black 8 term 10 Term Termination Jumper 1 2 .250 TAB (QC) no barriers No A B .250 TAB (QC) with barriers No 2 12 ACTUATOR LENS OR BODY LEGENDS J K .250 TAB (QC) no barriers Yes T2 to 5 11 ON 12 OFF 13 I 14 O 3 5 Solder Lug no barriers No C D Solder Lug No OFF ON O I 5 6 Wire Leads no barriers No 15 O O 16 O O 17 O I 18 I O E F Wire Leads No F N N F Note: Codes J & K for circuits H, G & M. Do not use silicone based F F lubricants to reduce terminal insertion forces during connector assembly, For additional legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. as it is detrimental to function and performance. 13 LEGEND ORIENTATION 5 ILLUMINATION & SWITCH SEALING 0 No legend (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) Lamp #1:above terminals 1 & 4 end of switch.; Lamp #2 above terminals 1 Orientation 1 3 & 6 end of switch. Positive (+) and negative (-) symbols apply to LED 2 Orientation 2 lamps only 3 Orientation 3 Sealed Unsealed Lamps Illumination Type Lamp wired to Terminals 4 Orientation 4 0 NONE – – A 1 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) B 2 1 DOWN 3 (+) 7 (–) 1 2 3 4 C 3 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) D 4 1 DOWN 3 (+) 7 (–) 2 DOWN 1 (+) 7 (–) 14 ACTUATOR LENS LEGEND E 5 1 UP 1 (+) 7 (–) 00 No legend this location / no actuator 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) Selection 14 required when switch F 6 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) requires two legends. If the two legends consist of one lens and one 2 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) body legend, lens legend must be specified in selection 12; body legend G 7 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) specified in selection 14. 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) For legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. H Z 2 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) U Y 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) Notes: 2 INDEPENDENT 10 (+) 9 (–) Consult factory to verify horsepower rating for your particular circuit choice. SINGLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY 1 Custom colors are available. Consult factory. J 8 1 DOWN 3 (+) 8 (–) 2 White imprinting is standard on black actuators. Black imprinting is standard on white, 2 INDEPENDENT 6 (+) 7 (–) red and gray actuators. Custom colors are available, consult factory. K W 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 3 Additional ratings available. See V-Series Switch Accessories page. 4 Legends available for lighted oval lens version only 2 INDEPENDENT 6 (+) 7 (–) DOUBLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY L 9 1 DOWN 3 (+) 6 (–) M R 1 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) N T 1 DOWN 3 (+) 6 (–) 2 DOWN 1 (+) 4 (–) P V 1 UP 1 (+) 4 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) www.carlingtech.com 39 V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Contura X, XI & XII - Ordering Scheme V 1 D A B 6 0 1 6 P Z 00 0 00 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Series Circuit Rating Termination Illumination Lamp Lamp Bracket Actuator Lens Lens Legend Legend Actuator Orientation Lens Legend 1 SERIES 6,7 LAMP (same coding for both selections) V Selection 6: above terminals 1 & 4; Selection 7: above terminals 3 & 6 No lamp 0 Neon 1 125VAC 2 250VAC 2 CIRCUIT Incandescent 4 3V 5 6V 6 12V 7 18V 8 24V Terminal Connections as viewed ( ) - momentary LED* superbright superbright from bottom of switch: SP - single pole - uses terminals 1, 2 & 3. Red Amber Green Red 2VDC A L F R 8 terminal 10 terminal DP - double pole uses terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 & 6. 6VDC B M G S 8 - - 7 8 - - 7 Terminals 7, 8, 9 & 10 for lamp circuit only. 12VDC C N H T 1 - - 4 1 - - 4 24VDC D P J V 2 - - 5 2 - - 5 *Consult factory for “daylight bright” LED. Typical current draw for LED is 20ma 3 - - 6 3 - - 6 10 - - 9 Position: 1 2 3 1 ( SP DP 2 & 3, 5 & 6 Connected Terminals 1 & 2, 4 & 5 8 BRACKET COLOR , PANEL SEAL EXTERNAL FOAM GASKET) 1 A ON NONE OFF X & XI with Flush Bracket X, XI, XII with Raised Bracket 2 B (ON) NONE OFF # of gaskets 0 1 2 0 1 3 C ON NONE (OFF) Black B C D 1 4 4 D ON NONE ON 5 F ON NONE (ON) White W Y Z 2 5 6 J ON OFF ON Gray G H J 3 6 7 K ON OFF (ON) 8 L (ON) OFF (ON) SPECIAL CIRCUITS 9 ACTUATOR H* 2 & 3 2 & 3, 5 & 4 5 & 4 No Actuator 0 G* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 OFF Black Gray White Red S* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 1 & 2 Contura X 1 2 3 4 M* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 OFF Contura XI 6 7 8 9 R* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 2 & 1 E* 5 & 6 5 & 3 5 & 1 Contura XII J K N M Actuator orientation over terminals: 3,6 1,4 *Jumper between terminals 2 & 5 for circuits H,G,M,R & S are specified in selection 4. External jumper between terminals 2 & 4 for circuit E are provided by customer. Circuit E may be used for SP OFF-ON-ON circuit. 1,4 10 LENS - ABOVE LAMP #1 TERMINALS 3,6 11 LENS - ABOVE LAMP #2 TERMINALS 4 0 - No Actuator Z - No Lens 3 RATING Clear White Amber Green Red Blue Lens Style 1 .4VA @ 28VDC Resistive 3 8 D J P V Bar B 15A 24V 4 9 E K R W One piece Square C 20A 18V 5 A F L S Y Two piece Square* D 20A 12V (With clear top protective lens) E 20A 14V, 10A 14VT (circuit 1, 4 , A & D only) 2 7 C H N U Two piece Square* F 10A 14V, 6A 14VT (circuit G only) M .4VA/20A 12V (With smoke top protective lens) N .4VA/15A 24V 1 6 B G M T Two piece Square* (With white top protective lens) * All bottom lenses are molded of opaque material. Consult factory for 4 TERMINATION / BASE STYLE other lens colors. Lens color for LEDs must be clear, white, or match color 8 term 10 Term Termination Jumper of LED. Green or blue lenses are not recommended with Neon lamps. 1 2 .250 TAB (QC) no barriers No A B .250 TAB (QC) with barriers No 2 J K .250 TAB (QC) no barriers Yes T2 to 5 12 ACTUATOR LENS OR BODY LEGEND 3 5 Solder Lug no barriers No 00 - No Legend this location / No actuator C D Solder Lug No 11 ON 12 OFF 13 I 14 O 5 6 Wire Leads no barriers No OFF ON O I E F Wire Leads No 15 O O 16 O O 17 O I 18 I O Note: Codes J & K for circuits H, G & M. Do not use silicone based F N N F lubricants to reduce terminal insertion forces during connector assembly, F F as it is detrimental to function and performance. 21 22 23 24 OFF ON O I 5 ILLUMINATION & SWITCH SEALING 25 O 26 O 27 O 28 I Lamp #1:above terminals 1 & 4 end of switch.; Lamp #2 above terminals F N 3 & 6 end of switch. Positive (+) and negative (-) symbols apply to LED F lamps only For additional legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. Sealed Unsealed Lamps Illumination Type Lamp wired to Terminals S 0 NONE – – A 1 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 3 13 LEGEND ORIENTATION B 2 1 DOWN 3 (+) 7 (–) 0 No legend (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) C 3 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) 1 Orientation 1 D 4 1 DOWN 3 (+) 7 (–) 2 DOWN 1 (+) 7 (–) 2 Orientation 2 E 5 1 UP 1 (+) 7 (–) 3 Orientation 3 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) 4 Orientation 4 F 6 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) 1 2 3 4 G 7 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) H Z 2 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) U Y 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 10 (+) 9 (–) 14 ACTUATOR LENS LEGEND SINGLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY 00 No legend this location / no actuator (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) Selection 14 required when switch J 8 1 DOWN 3 (+) 8 (–) requires two legends. If the two legends consist of one lens and one 2 INDEPENDENT 6 (+) 7 (–) body legend, lens legend must be specified in selection 12; body legend K W 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) specified in selection 14. 2 INDEPENDENT 6 (+) 7 (–) For legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. DOUBLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY L 9 1 DOWN 3 (+) 6 (–) Notes: M R 1 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) Consult factory to verify horsepower rating for your particular circuit choice. N T 1 DOWN 3 (+) 6 (–) 1 Custom colors are available. Consult factory. 2 DOWN 1 (+) 4 (–) 2 White imprinting is standard on black actuators; Black imprinting is standard on white, P V 1 UP 1 (+) 4 (–) red & gray actuators. Custom colors are available, consult factory. 2 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) 3 With 2 square lenses, use selection 12 for lens above lamp 1, & selection 14 for lens above lamp 2. 4 Additional ratings available. See V-Series Switch Accessories page. 5 Not available with Contura XI rockers. 40 www.carlingtech.com V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Contura X Locking - Ordering Scheme V 1 D A S W 0 1 1 P B 00 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Series Circuit Rating Termination Illumination Lock Lamp Bracket Actuator Lens Function Legend Legend Orientation 1 SERIES 6,7 LAMP (same coding for both selections) Selection 6: above terminals 1 & 4; Selection 7: above terminals 3 & 6 V No lamp 0 Neon 1 125VAC 2 250VAC Incandescent 4 3V 5 6V 6 12V 7 18V 8 24V 2 CIRCUIT LED* superbright superbright Terminal Connections as viewed ( ) - momentary Red Amber Green Red from bottom of switch: SP - single pole - uses terminals 1, 2 & 3. 2VDC A L F R 8 terminal 10 terminal DP - double pole uses terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 & 6. 6VDC B M G S 8 - - 7 8 - - 7 Terminals 7, 8, 9 & 10 for lamp circuit only. 12VDC C N H T 1 - - 4 1 - - 4 24VDC D P J V * Consult factory for “daylight bright” LED options. Typical current draw for 2 - - 5 2 - - 5 LED is 20ma. 3 - - 6 3 - - 6 10 - - 9 Position: 1 2 3 1 8 FLUSH BRACKET COLOR , PANEL SEAL SP DP 2 & 3, 5 & 6 Connected Terminals 1 & 2, 4 & 5 Black White Gray 1 A ON NONE OFF No Gasket 1 2 3 4 D ON NONE ON One Gasket 4 5 6 6 J ON OFF ON 9 N OFF NONE ON SPECIAL CIRCUITS H* 2 & 3 2 & 3, 5 & 4 5 & 4 9 HARD SURFACE ACTUATOR G* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 OFF S* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 1 & 2 Contura X Black Gray Red White E* 5 & 6 5 & 3 5 & 1 1 2 3 4 *Jumper between terminals 2 & 5 for circuits H,G,M,R & S are specified in Actuator orientation over terminals: 3,6 1,4 selection 4. External jumper between terminals 2 & 4 for circuit E are provided by customer. Circuit E may be used for SP OFF-ON-ON circuit. 5 10 LENS - ABOVE LAMP #2 TERMINALS Z - No Lens 4 3 RATING Clear White Amber Green Red Blue Lens Style 1 .4VA @ 28VDC Resistive 3 8 D J P V Bar B 15A 24V 4 9 E K R W One piece Square C 20A 18V 5 A F L S Y Two piece Square* D 20A 12V E 20A 14V, 10A 14VT (circuit 1, 4 , A & D only) (with clear top protective lens) F 10A 14V, 6A 14VT (circuit G only) 2 7 C H N U Two piece Square* M .4VA/20A 12V (with smoke top protective lens) N .4VA/15A 24V 1 6 B G M T Two piece Square* (with white top protective lens) 4 TERMINATION / BASE STYLE * All bottom lenses are molded of opaque material. Consult factory for 8 term 10 Term Termination Jumper other lens colors. 1 2 .250 TAB (QC) no barriers No Lens color for LEDs must be clear, white, or match color of LED. A B .250 TAB (QC) with barriers No Green or blue lenses are not recommended with Neon lamps. J K .250 TAB (QC) no barriers Yes T2 to 5 3 5 Solder Lug no barriers No C D Solder Lug No 3 11 ACTUATOR LOCK FUNCTION AND COLOR 5 6 Wire Leads no barriers No Lock Color Up Down Up & Down E F Wire Leads No Match Actuator A H R Note: Codes J & K for circuits H, G & M. Do not use silicone based Black B J S lubricants to reduce terminal insertion forces during connector assembly, White C K T as it is detrimental to function and performance. Red D L V Gray E M W Safety Orange F N Y 5 ILLUMINATION & SWITCH SEALING Lamp #1:above terminals 1 & 4 end of switch.; Lamp #2 above terminals 2 3 & 6 end of switch. Positive (+) and negative (-) symbols apply to LED 12 ACTUATOR LENS OR BODY LEGEND lamps only 00 - No Legend Sealed Unsealed Lamps Illumination Type Lamp wired to Termi- 21 22 23 24 nals OFF ON O I S 0 NONE – – C 3 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) 25 O 26 O 27 O 28 I H Z 2 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) F N DOUBLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY F M R 1 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) For additional legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. 6 LOCK 3 13 LEGEND ORIENTATION Lock above terminals 1 & 4 end of switch. 0 No legend (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) W Lock 1 Orientation 1 2 Orientation 2 Notes: 3 Orientation 3 Consult factory to verify horsepower rating for your particular circuit choice. 4 Orientation 4 1 Custom colors are available. Consult factory. 2 White imprinting is standard on black actuators; Black imprinting is standard on white, red and gray actuators; Custom colors are available, consult factory. 3 Located over T1-4 end of switch. 1 2 3 4 4 Additional ratings available. See V-Series Switch Accessories page. 5 Located over T3-6 end of switch. www.carlingtech.com 41 V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Contura XIV - Ordering Scheme V 1 D B B C 0 B FA P C AB 1 00 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Bracket Actuator Lens Actuator Legend Legend Actuator, Series Circuit Rating Termination Illumination Lamp Lamp Color Orientation Lens Legends 1 SERIES 6 & 7 LAMP V No lamp 0 Neon 1 125VAC 2 250VAC Incandescent 4 3V 5 6V 6 12V 7 18V 8 24V LED* superbright superbright 2 CIRCUIT Red Amber Green Red Terminal Connections as viewed ( ) - momentary 2VDC A L F R from bottom of switch: SP - single pole - uses terminals 1, 2 & 3. 6VDC B M G S 8 terminal 10 terminal DP - double pole uses terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 & 6. 12VDC C N H T 8 - - 7 8 - - 7 Terminals 7, 8, 9 & 10 for lamp circuit only. 24VDC D P J V 1 - - 4 1 - - 4 * Consult factory for “daylight bright” LED options. Typical current draw for LED is 20ma. 2 - - 5 2 - - 5 3 - - 6 3 - - 6 10 - - 9 Position: 1 2 3 8 BRACKET COLOR & PANEL SEAL SP DP 2 & 3, 5 & 6 Connected Terminals 1 & 2, 4 & 5 Color No Gasket 1 Gasket 2 Gasket 1 A ON NONE OFF Black B C D 2 B (ON) NONE OFF Gray G H J 3 C ON NONE (OFF) White W Y Z 4 D ON NONE ON 5 F ON NONE (ON) 6 J ON OFF ON 9 ACTUATOR STYLE 7 K ON OFF (ON) 0 No Actuator - Furnished separately 8 L (ON) OFF (ON) FA Contura XIV SPECIAL CIRCUITS FB Contura XIV - Laser Etched H* 2 & 3 2 & 3, 5 & 4 5 & 4 G* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 OFF M* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 OFF R* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 2 & 1 10 LENS COLOR / STYLE E* 5 & 6 5 & 3 5 & 1 S* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 1 & 2 0 - No Actuator Z - No Lens Clear White Amber Green Red Blue *Jumper between terminals 2 & 5 for circuits H,G,M,R & S are specified in 1 6 B G M T selection 4. External jumper between terminals 2 & 4 for circuit E are provided by customer. Circuit E may be used for SP OFF-ON-ON circuit. 2 7 C H N U 3 8 D J P V 3 4 9 E K R W 3 RATING 5 A F L S Y 1 .4VA @ 28VDC Resistive B 15A 24V 5 A N/A N/A N/A N/A Laser-Etched Actuator Only C 20A 18V Lens color for LEDs must be clear, white, or match color of LED. D 20A 12V Green or blue lenses are not recommended with Neon lamps. E 20A 14V, 10A 14VT (circuit 1, 4 , A & D only) F 10A 14V, 6A 14VT (circuit G only) 1 11 ACTUATOR COLOR 4 TERMINATION / BASE STYLE O N/A - No Actuator C Black 8 Term 10 Term Termination Jumper S Red 1 2 .250 TAB (QC) no barriers No Y White A B .250 TAB (QC) with barriers No J K .250 TAB (QC) no barriers Yes T2 to 5 3 4 Solder Lug no barriers No 2 C D Solder Lug No 12 ACTUATOR LENS or BODY LEGEND 5 6 Wire Leads no barriers No 00 - No Legend this location / No actuator E F Wire Leads No 11 ON 12 OFF 13 I 14 O Note: Codes J & K for circuits H, G & M. Do not use silicone based OFF ON O I lubricants to reduce terminal insertion forces during connector assembly, 15 O O 16 O O 17 O I 18 I O as it is detrimental to function and performance. F N N F F F 5 ILLUMINATION Lamp #1:above terminals 1 & 4 end of switch.; Lamp #2 above terminals 13 LEGEND ORIENTATION 3 & 6 end of switch. Positive (+) and negative (-) symbols apply to LED 0 No legend lamps only 1 Orientation 1 Lamps Illumination Type Lamp wired to Terminals 2 Orientation 2 S NONE – – 3 Orientation 3 A 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 4 Orientation 4 B 1 DOWN 3 (+) 7 (–) C 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) 1 2 3 4 D 1 DOWN 3 (+) 7 (–) 2 DOWN 1 (+) 7 (–) E 1 UP 1 (+) 7 (–) 14 ACTUATOR / LENS LEGEND 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) 00 No legend this location / no actuator F 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) Selection 14 required when switch 2 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) requires two legends. If the two legends consist of one lens and one G 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) body legend, lens legend must be specified in selection 12; body legend 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) H 2 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) specified in selection 14. SINGLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY For legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. J 1 DOWN 3 (+) 8 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 6 (+) 7 (–) Notes: K 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) Consult factory to verify horsepower rating for your particular circuit choice. 2 INDEPENDENT 6 (+) 7 (–) 1 Custom colors are available. Consult factory. DOUBLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY 2 White imprinting is standard on black actuators; Black imprinting is L 1 DOWN 3 (+) 6 (–) standard on white, red and gray actuators. M 1 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) 3 Additional ratings available. See V-Series Switch Accessories page. N 1 DOWN 3 (+) 6 (–) 2 DOWN 1 (+) 4 (–) P 1 UP 1 (+) 4 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) U 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 10 (+) 9 (–) 42 www.carlingtech.com V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Contura XIV Locking - Ordering Scheme V 1 D A B W 0 B FC Z B 00 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Bracket Actuator Lens Actuator Legend Legend Series Circuit Rating Termination Illumination Lock Lamp Color Orientation 1 SERIES 7 LAMP V No lamp 0 Neon 1 125VAC 2 250VAC Incandescent 4 3V 5 6V 6 12V 7 18V 8 24V 2 CIRCUIT LED* superbright superbright Terminal Connections as viewed ( ) - momentary Red Amber Green Red from bottom of switch: SP - single pole - uses terminals 1, 2 & 3. 2VDC A L F R 8 terminal 10 terminal DP - double pole uses terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 & 6. 6VDC B M G S 8 - - 7 8 - - 7 Terminals 7, 8, 9 & 10 for lamp circuit only. 12VDC C N H T 1 - - 4 1 - - 4 24VDC D P J V 2 - - 5 2 - - 5 * Consult factory for “daylight bright” LED options. Typical current draw for 3 - - 6 3 - - 6 LED is 20ma. 10 - - 9 Position: 1 2 3 SP DP 2 & 3, 5 & 6 Connected Terminals 1 & 2, 4 & 5 8 BRACKET COLOR & PANEL SEAL 1 A ON NONE OFF Color No Gasket 1 Gasket 2 Gasket - B (ON) NONE OFF Black B C D 4 D ON NONE ON Gray G H J 6 J ON OFF ON White W Y Z 7 K ON OFF (ON) 8 L (ON) OFF (ON) 9 N OFF NONE ON 9 ACTUATOR COLOR / STYLE FC Black - Standard Rocker SPECIAL CIRCUITS FD Black - Laser Etched H* 2 & 3 2 & 3, 5 & 4 5 & 4 FS Red - Standard Rocker G* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 OFF FT Red - Laser Etched M* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 OFF R* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 2 & 1 E* 5 & 6 5 & 3 5 & 1 10 LENS COLOR / STYLE S* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 1 & 2 Z - No Lens *Jumper between terminals 2 & 5 for circuits H,G,M,R & S are specified in Clear White Amber Green Red Blue selection 4. External jumper between terminals 2 & 4 for circuit E are 1 6 B G M T provided by customer. Circuit E may be used for SP OFF-ON-ON circuit. 3 8 D J P V 5 A N/A N/A N/A N/A Laser-Etched Actuator Only 3 3 RATING Lens color for LEDs must be clear, white, or match color of LED. 1 .4VA @ 28VDC Resistive Green or blue lenses are not recommended with Neon lamps. B 15A 24V C 20A 18V D 20A 12V 1 11 ACTUATOR LOCK COLOR / FUNCTION E 20A 14V, 10A 14VT (circuit 1, 4 , A & D only) LOCK IN POSITION F 10A 14V, 6A 14VT (circuit G only) Lock Color UP DOWN UP & DOWN CENTER Match Actuator A H R 1 Black B J S 2 4 TERMINATION / BASE STYLE White C K T 3 8 Term 10 Term Termination Jumper Red D L V 4 1 2 .250 TAB (QC) no barriers No Orange E M W 5 A B .250 TAB (QC) with barriers No Gray F G N 6 J K .250 TAB (QC) no barriers Yes T2 to 5 Note: Codes J & K for circuits H, G & M. Do not use silicone based 2 lubricants to reduce terminal insertion forces during connector assembly, 12 ACTUATOR LENS or BODY LEGEND 00 - No Legend as it is detrimental to function and performance. 21 22 23 24 OFF ON O I 5 ILLUMINATION 25 O 26 O 27 O 28 I Lamp #1:above terminals 1 & 4 end of switch.; Lamp #2 above terminals F N 3 & 6 end of switch. Positive (+) and negative (-) symbols apply to LED F lamps only Lamps Illumination Type Lamp wired to Terminals S NONE – – C 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) 13 LEGEND ORIENTATION H 2 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 0 No legend 1 Orientation 1 DOUBLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY 2 Orientation 2 M 1 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) 3 Orientation 3 4 Orientation 4 1 2 3 4 6 LOCK OPTION W Low Profile Lock Notes: Consult factory to verify horsepower rating for your particular circuit choice. 1 Custom colors are available. Consult factory. 2 White imprinting is standard on black actuators; Black imprinting is standard on white, red and gray actuators. 3 Additional ratings available. See V-Series Switch Accessories page. www.carlingtech.com 43 V–Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Contura II, III, & IV - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] 44 www.carlingtech.com V–Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Contura V, VI & VII - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] CONTURA V CONTURA V CONTURA VI CONTURA VII SHOWN WITH SHOWN WITH OVAL SHOWN WITH LARGE LENS SHOWN WITH BAR LENS LENS AND BAR LENS LOW PROFILE LOCK 1.922 [48.56] 1.922 [48.82] 1.922 [48.56] .080[2.03] 1.950 [49.53] 1.079 1.126 [27.40] 1.479 [28.60] 1.550 [37.57] [39.37] 10 TERMINAL BASE 8 TERMINAL BASE 8 TERMINAL BASE W/BARRIER AND 10 TERMINAL BASE W/BARRIERS W/O BARRIERS LAMP TERMINAL W/O BARRIERS 1.020 1.020 0.985 1.000 [25.91] [25.91] [25.02] [25.40] .505 .505 [12.83] [12.83] .250 [6.35] .250 [6.35] .250 .250 X .031 [.78] [6.35] [6.35] .031 X X .031 [.78] .031 .820 [.78] .820 [.78] [20.83] [20.83] .820 .960 .390 [20.83] [24.38] .960 [9.90] [24.38] .960 .960 [24.38] [24.38] 8 TERMINAL BASE 8 TERMINAL BASE 10 TERMINAL BASE 10 TERMINAL BASE W/O BARRIERS W/BARRIERS W/O BARRIERS W/O BARRIERS 8 7 8 7 1 4 2.029 1 4 [51.53] 2 5 2 5 3 6 3 6 10 9 SWITCH SHOWN WITH BOTTOM VIEW BOTTOM VIEW VCH CONNECTOR 8 TERMINAL TERMINAL SWITCH SHOWN WITH TERMINAL ARRANGEMENT ARRANGEMENT VC1 CONNECTOR 10 SWITCH SHOWN 8 TERMINAL BASE 10 TERMINAL BASE TERMINAL WITH VC1 CONNECTOR 10 TERMINAL www.carlingtech.com 45 V–Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Contura X, XI, XII & XIV - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] CONTURA X CONTURA XI CONTURA XII CONTURA XIV SHOWN WITH RAISED BRACKET SHOWN WITH RAISED SHOWN WITH PADDLE SHOWN WITH LARGE LENS BRACKET AND TWO SQUARE ACTUATOR LENSES 1.928 [48.97] .667 [16.94] .350 1.910 [48.51] 1.910 [48.51] .426 [10.82] [8.89] .573 1.305 [33.15] [14.56] .350 1.506 [8.89] 1.586 [38.25] [40.28] 1.370 [34.79] 1.370 [34.79] 1.370 [34.79] 8 TERMINAL BASE 10 TERMINAL BASE 8 TERMINAL BASE 10 TERMINAL BASE W/BARRIERS W/O BARRIERS W/O BARRIERS W/O BARRIERS .960 [24.38] .970 [24.64] .960 [24.38] .960 [24.38] .780 [19.81] .780 [19.81] .780 [19.81] .250 [6.35] X .031[.78] .390 [9.90] .390 [9.90] .390 [9.90] .820 .820 [20.82] .820 [20.82] [20.83] .820 [20.82] .960 [24.38] 8 TERMINAL BASE 10 TERMINAL BASE 10 TERMINAL W/BARRIERS W/BARRIERS BASE W/O BARRIERS 8 7 8 7 1 4 1 4 2 5 2 5 3 6 3 6 10 9 SWITCH SHOWN WITH BOTTOM VIEW BOTTOM VIEW SWITCHES SHOWN WITH TERMINAL TERMINAL VCH CONNECTOR VC1 CONNECTOR ARRANGEMENT ARRANGEMENT 8 TERMINAL 10 TERMINAL 8 TERMINAL BASE 10 TERMINAL BASE 46 www.carlingtech.com V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - II to XIV - Circuit Diagrams Circuit Diagrams: CIRCUIT CIRCUIT CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DIAGRAM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM CODE CODE CODE 3 3 6 13 46 1 A J 2 25 25 3 3 6 1 3 4 6 2 B K 2 2 5 2 5 3 3 6 1 34 6 3 C L 2 2 5 2 5 1 3 1 3 4 6 3 6 4 D M 2 2 5 2 5 1 3 13 4 6 1 3 6 5 E R 2 25 2 5 13 1 3 4 6 13 6 6 F S 2 2 5 25 13 3 6 7 G SYMBOL LEGEND SYM. DEFINITION 2 2 5 DESIGNATES TERMINALS AND CONTACTS 1 3 3 4 DESIGNATES MAINTAINED CIRCUITS DESIGNATES OTHER POSITION DESIGNATES MOMENTARY CIRCUITS 8 H DESIGNATES TWO POSITION CONNECTION DESIGNATES EXTERNAL JUMPER PROVIDED 2 25 BY CUSTOMER www.carlingtech.com 47 V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - II to XIV - Lamp Circuit Diagrams, J-Series Circuit Diagrams Lamp Circuit Diagrams: LAMP CIRCUIT LAMP CIRCUIT LAMP CIRCUIT LAMP CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DIAGRAM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM CODE CODE CODE CODE +3 +6 +8 +8 +3 -6 +3 -6 SPECIAL A / 1 1 F / 6 1 2 L / 9 1 1 2 #1 -7 -7 -7 +3 +8 +3 +3 -6 +8 +6 SPECIAL 1 1 2 2 1 2 B / 2 G / 7 M / R #3 -7 -7 -7 +3 +8 +1 +3 -4 -6 +8 +3 SPECIAL 2 2 1 2 1 2 C / 3 H / Z N / T #4 -7 -7 -7 +1 -8 +3 +6 +1 +3 -4 -6 +3 D / 4 1 2 J / 8 1 2 P / V 1 2 -7 -7 +8 +10 +1 +3 +8 +6 1 2 2 U / Y E / 5 1 K / W 1 2 -7 -9 -7 (-)7 J-Series Hazard Warning Circuit Diagrams: CIRCUIT CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DIAGRAM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM CODE CODE 13 17 18 10(-) 10(-) 1 3 17 18 J1 1 J5 2 2 2 5 58 8 2 5 8 11 11 11 11 13 13 13 13 3 3 3 3 14 17 18 10(-) 11 13 3 14 6 J2 1 JA 58 5 13 17 18 10(-) 11 13 3 14 J3 1 JJ NOTE: 2 5 8 J circuits are available for all non-locking V-Series styles. Consult factory for partnumber details. 13 17 18 10(-) 11 13 3 3 3 3 14 15 12 616 SYMBOL LEGEND 1 J4 JK SYM. DEFINITION DESIGNATES TERMINALS AND CONTACTS 2 5 DESIGNATES LAMP LOCATION 48 www.carlingtech.com V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Stand-Alone Components Reduce inventory levels and cost by stocking actuators and base switches separately. Contura II, III, IV, V, VI, VII, X, XI, XII, XIV Base switches separately: specify V with code selections 2-8 in the ordering schemes. Contura II, III, IV, V Actuator only: VV with code A or C for selection 9, & with selections 10-14 in the ordering schemes. Contura VI Actuator with lenses and inserts only: VV with code selections 9-16 Contura II, III, IV, V, VII Actuator only: VV with code A, C, E, G, P or Z for selection 9 & with selections 10-14 in the ordering schemes. Contura X, XI, XII, XIV actuators with lenses separately: VV with code selections 9-14 in the ordering schemes. Panel Seal: VPS Contura X & XI actuators without lenses separately: Contura XII actuators without lenses separately: VVR 6 1 00 1 VVP J 1 Z 21 1 00 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Actuator Separately Actuator Lens Actuator Legend Actuator Style & Lens Lens Legend Legend Legend Style/Color Opening Legend Orientation Color Opening Opening Orientation 1 CONTURA X & XI ACTUATOR SEPARATELY 1 CONTURA XII ACTUATOR SEPARATELY VVR VVP 2 ACTUATOR STYLE & COLOR 2 ACTUATOR STYLE & COLOR Black Gray White Red J Black K Gray N White M Red Contura X 1 2 3 4 Contura XI 6 7 8 9 3,4 LENS OPENING FOR Z No lens 1 Bar lens 2 Square lens 1 3 LENS OPENING FOR 1 One bar lens 5 square lens on top/ 2 One bar lenses bar lens on bottom 2 5, 7 LENS OR BODY LEGEND 3 One square lens (Contura X only) 00 - No Legend 21 22 23 24 4 two square lens OFF ON O I 25 O 26 O 27 O 28 I 4 ACTUATOR LENS OR BODY LEGEND F N 00 - No Legend this location F 11 ON 12 OFF 13 I 14 O For additional legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. OFF ON O I 15 O O 16 O O 17 O I 18 I O F N N F 3 6 LEGEND ORIENTATION F F 0 No legend For additional legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. 1 Orientation 1 2 Orientation 2 1 2 1 5 LEGEND ORIENTATION 0 No legend Contura X, XI & XII actuator lens assembly separately: 1 Orientation 1 2 Orientation 2 3 Orientation 3 4 Orientation 4 1 2 3 4 VVL 2 1 00 0 1 2 3 4 5 Lens Separately Lens Lens Legend Legend Contura X, XI & XII top piece of 2-piece lens separately: Style Color Orientation 1 CONTURA X, XI & XII LENS SEPARATELY 1 TOP OF LENS SEPARATELY VVL VVT VVT 1 1 2 2 COLOR 3 2 LENS STYLE Lens Separately Color 1 Clear 2 Smoke 3 White 1 Bar lens 2 One Piece Square lens 5 3 Bottom of Two-Piece Square lens Contura X, XI & XII actuator lens assembly: 3 TRANSLUCENT LENS COLOR 4 4 1 Clear 2 White 3 Amber 4 Green 5 Red 6 Blue top lens actuator stem 2 two piece 4 LENS OR BODY LEGEND } lens assembly posts mount toward actuator stem 00 - No Legend 21 22 23 24 bottom lens OFF ON O I 1 piece lens/bar lens are positioned the same as bottom lens for assembly, minus the top lens. Lenses snap in from bottom. 25 O 26 O 27 O 28 I F N Notes: F 1 If actuator lens opening for 2 bar or 2 square lenses, legend orientation 0,1, or 2 For additional legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. must be chosen. 2 Center of actuator marking not available for Contura XII. 3 Legend is not available for bar style lens. 3 5 LEGEND ORIENTATION 4 Not recommended with neon lamps. 0 No legend 5 Must also order top piece of 2 piece square lens separately. 1 Orientation 1 2 Orientation 2 3 Orientation 3 4 Orientation 4 1 2 3 4 www.carlingtech.com 49 V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Accessories Easily integrate Contura products into your system, with Contura Accessories Q.C. SELECTION GUIDE WIRE PART NO Contura Connectors RANGE COMPANY ORIEN- TIN 2 SERIES Q.C. SELECTION GUIDE PLAIN TATION AWG MM PLATED BRASS (REF) BRASS WIRE PART NO RANGE 02965580 12 3.0 COMPANY ORIEN- TIN 02965471 12010601 (2)16-14 (2)1.0-2.0 SERIES PLAIN 2 TATION Q.C. SELECTION GUIDE Q.C. SELECTION GUIDE Q.C. SELECTION GUIDE AWG MM PLATED PACKARD BRASS 02965470 16-14 1.0-2.0 B (REF) 58 SERIES BRASS WIRE WIRE WIRE PART NO PART NO PART NO RANGE RANGE RANGE 02965469 06288318 20-18 .5-.8 02965580 12 3.0 COMPANY COMPANY COMPANY ORIEN- ORIEN- ORIEN- TIN TIN TIN SERIES SERIES PLAIN SERIES PLAIN 12084590 PLAIN 102 TATION5.0 2 TATION 2 TATION 02965471 12010601 (2)16-14 (2)1.0-2.0 AWG MM AWG MM AWG MM PLATED PLATED PLATED BRASS BRASS BRASS TANG PACKARD BRASS 12052224 BRASS (REF) 1BRASS 2 (REF) 3.0 (REF) 02965470 16-14 1.0-2.0 B 58 SERIES 02965580 02965580 1202965580 3.012 3.012 3.0 12015870 16-14 1.0-2.0 02965469 06288318 20-18 .5-.8 PACKARD 02965471 12010601 02965471 (2)16-14 12010601 02965471 (2)1.0-2.0 (2)16-14 12010601 (2)1.0-2.0 (2)16-14 (2)1.0-2.0 METRI-PACK 12020035 (2)22-18 (2).5-.8 A PACKARD PACKARD PACKARD 12084590 10 5.0 Q.C. SELECTION GUIDE 02965470 02965470 16-14 02965470 1.0-2.0 16-14 B 1.0-2.0 16-14 B 1.0-2.0 B 58 SERIES 630 SERIES58 SERIES 58 SERIES TANG 1201583212052224 12015869 12 20-18 3.0 .5-.8 02965469 06288318 02965469 20-18 06288318 02965469 .5-.8 WIRE 20-18 06288318 .5-.8 20-18 .5-.8 PART NO RANGE 12015870 12052222 16-14 20-22 1.0-2.0 .35-.5 12084590 12084590 10 5.012084590 10 5.010 5.0 PACKARD COMPANY ORIEN- TANG SYMBOL = SHOWS ORIENTATION OF TANG IN SLOT TANG TANG TANG TIN 12052224 12052224 12 3.012052224 12 3.012 3.0 SERIES PLAIN 2 TATION METRI-PACK 12020035 (2)22-1816-12 (2).5-.8 1.3-3 A AWG MM Q.C. SELECTION GUIDE PLATED SYMBOL 60253-1 BRASS 60253-2 630 SERIES 12015870 16-14 12015870 1.0-2.0 16-14 12015870 1.0-2.0 16-14 1.0-2.0 AMP (REF) PACKARD PACKARD PACKARD BRASS 12015832 12015869 20-18 .5-.8 (2) 16 (2) 1.3 WIRE METRI- 250 SERIES PACK METRI-PACK 12020035 METRI-PACK (2)22-18 12020035 (2).5-.8 (2)22-18 12020035 A (2).5-.8 (2)22-18 A (2).5-.8 A PART NO 02965580 12 3.0 B RANGE 630 SERIES 630 SERIES 630 SERIES 12052222 20-22 .35-.5 FASTIN-FASTON 42100-1 42100-2 18-14 .8-2 12015832 12015869 12015832 20-18 12015869 12015832 .5-.8 20-18 12015869 .5-.8 20-18 .5-.8 COMPANY 02965471 12010601 (2)16-14 (2)1.0-2.0 ORIEN- TANG SYMBOL = SHOWS ORIENTATION OF TANG IN SLOT TIN PACKARD SERIES PLAIN 16-12 1.3-3 2 TATION 12052222 20-22 12052222 .35-.5 20-22 12052222 .35-.5 20-22 .35-.5 60295-1 02965470 60295-2 A 16-14 WG 22-18 1.0-2.0 MM .3-.9 B PLATED SYMBOL 58 SERIES 60253-1 60253-2 TANG SYMBOL =TANG SYMBO SHOWS ORIEN L =TANG SYMBO TA SHOWS ORIEN TION OF L = TANG IN SLOT TA SHOWS ORIEN TION OF TANG IN SLOT TATION OF TANG IN SLOT BRASS AMP (REF) 02965469 06288318 BRASS 16-12 20-181.3-3 16-12.5-.8 1.3-3 16-12 1.3-3 (2) 16 (2) 1.3 SYMBOL SYMBOL SYMBOL 250 SERIES 60253-1 60253-2 60253-1 60253-2 60253-1 60253-2 AMP AMP AMP NOTE: Consult Delphi Packard and/or Amp on actual part numbers and availabilit B y. 02965580 12084590 12 10 3.0 5.0 (2) 16 (2) 1.3 (2) 16 (2) 1.3 (2) 16 (2) 1.3 FASTIN- 250 SERIES FASTON 250 SERIES 42100-1 250 SERIES 42100-2 18-14 .8-2 AMP is a registered trademark of AMP Inc. Harrisburg, PA B B TANG B 02965471 12010601 12052224 (2)16-14 12 (2)1.0-2.0 3.0 FASTIN-FASTONFASTIN- 42100-1 FASTON FASTIN- 42100-2 42100-1 FASTON 18-14 42100-2 42100-1 .8-2 18-14 42100-2 .8-2 18-14 .8-2 Delphi Packard is a registered trademark of Delphi-Packard Electrical Systems PACKARD 60295-1 60295-2 22-18 .3-.9 Warren, Ohio 02965470 12015870 16-14 16-14 1.0-2.0 1.0-2.0 B 58 SERIES PACKARD 60295-1 60295-2 60295-1 22-18 60295-2 60295-1 .3-.9 22-18 60295-2 .3-.9 22-18 .3-.9 METRI-PACK 02965469 06288318 12020035 (2)22-18 20-18 (2).5-.8 .5-.8 A NOTE: Consult Delphi Packard and/or Amp on actual part numbers and availability. NOTE: Consult Delphi Packard and/or 630 SERIES NOTE: Consult Delphi Packard and/or NOTE: Amp on actual part numbers and availabilit Consult Delphi Packard and/or Amp on actual part numbers and availabilit Amp on actual part numbers and availabilit y. y. .820[20.83] y. 12015832 12015869 20-18 .5-.8 12084590 10 5.0 AMP is a registered trademark of .820[20.83] AMP Inc. Harrisburg, PA AMP is a registered trademark of AMP is a registered trademark of AM AM P Inc. Harrisburg, P is a registered trademark of AMP P Inc. Harrisburg, A AMP PA Inc. Harrisburg, PA TANG 12052224 12052222 20-22 12 .35-.5 3.0 Delphi Packard is a registered trademark of Delphi-Packard Electrical Systems Delphi Packard is a registered trademark of Delphi-Packard Electrical Systems Delphi Packard is a registered trademark of Delphi-Packard Electrical Systems Delphi Packard is a registered trademark of Delphi-Packard Electrical Systems Warren, Ohio Warren, Ohio Warren, Ohio Warren, Ohio TANG SYMBOL = SHOWS ORIENTATION OF TANG IN SLOT 12015870 16-14 16-12 1.0-2.0 1.3-3 PACKARD SYMBOL 60253-1 60253-2 AMP .820[20.83] .820[20.83] .820[20.83] METRI-PACK 12020035 (2)22-18 (2).5-.8 A (2) 16 (2) 1.3 .820[20.83] .820[20.83] .820[20.83] .820[20.83] 250 SERIES B 630 SERIES .820[20.83] FASTIN-FASTON 12015832 42100-1 12015869 42100-2 20-18 18-14 .8-2 .5-.8 .770[19.56] 60295-1 12052222 60295-2 20-22 22-18 .35-.5 .3-.9 TANG SYMBOL = SHOWS ORIENTATION OF TANG IN SLOT 16-12 1.3-3 NOTE: Consult Delphi Packard and/or Amp on actual part numbers and availability. SYMBOL 60253-1 60253-2 .770[19.56] .770[19.56] .770[19.56] AMP AMP is a registered trademark of AMP Inc. Harrisburg, (2) 16 PA (2) 1.3 250 SERIES B Delphi Packard is a registered trademark of Delphi-Packard Electrical Systems Warren, Ohio .770[19.56] FASTIN-FASTON 42100-1 42100-2 18-14 .8-2 .920[23.37] .920[23.37] 1.170[29.72] 60295-1 60295-2 22-18 .3-.9 .820[20.83] .820[20.83] .920[23.37] .920[23.37] .920[23.37] .920[23.37] .920[23.37] .920[23.37] 1.170[29.72] 1.170[29.72] 1.170[29.72] NOTE: Consult Delphi Packard and/or Amp on actual part numbers and availability. A A A A AMP is a registered trademark of AMP Inc. Harrisburg, PA PACKARD 630 PACKARD 630 A .920[23.37] A A A A A .920[23.37] VC2 A A A A 1.170[29.72] A A PACKARD 630 Delphi Packard is a registered trademark of Delphi-Packard Electrical Systems PACKARD 630 Warren, Ohio VC1 VC1 PACKARD 630 VC2 PACKARD 630 PACKARD 630 PACKARD 630 PACKARD 630 PACKARD 630 VC2 VC2 VC2 PACKARD 630 PACKARD 630 PACKARD 630 PACKARD 630 PACKARD 630 PACKARD 630 VC1 VC1 VC1 VC1 VC1 VC1 VC2 VC2 VC2 .770[19.56] .950[24.13] B B .950[24.13] .950[24.13] .950[24.13] B B B B B B .820[20.83] A .820[20.83] A A B A B AMP, PACKARD 58 AMP, PACKARD 58 AMP AMP B B B B B B AMP, PACKARD 58 AMP, PACKARD 58 AMP, PACKARD 58 AMP, PACKARD 58 AMP, PACKARD 58 AMP AMP, PACKARD 58 AMP AMP AMP AMP AMP AMP, PACKARD 58 AMP, PACKARD 58 PACKARD 630 AMP AM , PACKARD 58 P, PAM ACKARD 58 P, PACKARD 58 AMP, PACKARD 58 PACKARD 630 AMP, PACKARD 58 AMP, PACKARD 58 VC2 PACKARD 630 10 3 2 1 8 10 3 2 1784P1 ACKARD 630 053 62 9 1784 5 6 9 107 3 4 2 51 6 89 10 3 2 1 8 710 4 3 5 2 61 9 8 7 4 5 6 9 7 4 5 6 9 10 3 2 1 8 7 4 5 6 9 10 3 2 1 8 7 4 5 6 9 VC1 VC1 VC23 2 1 8 3 2 1 8 7 34 2 5 16 8 7 4 5 6 7 4 5 6 3 2 1 8 7 4 5 6 .920[23.37] .920[23.37] 1.170[29.72] .950[24.13] B B 1.266[32.16] 1.266[32.16] 1.466[37.24] 1.266[32.16] 1.466[37.24] 1.266[32.16] 1.466[37.24] 1.266[32.16] 1.466[37.24] 1.266[32.16] 1.466[37.24] 1.466[37.24] 1.250[31.75] 1.250[31.75] 1.250[31.75] B B AMP, PACKARD 58 AMP, PACKARD 58 AMP AMP .770[19.56] 1.266[32.16] 1.466[37.24] 1.266[32.16] 1.466[37.24] 1.250[31.75] AMP, PACKARD 58 AMP, PACKARD 58 A A A A 10 3 2 1 8 7 4 5 6 9 10 3 2 1 8 7 4 5 6 9 PACKARD 630 PACKARD 630 PACKARD 630 PACKARD 630 VC2 3 2 1 8 7 4 5 6 MARKING DETAIL MARKING DETMARKING DE AIL MARKING DE TAIL T MARKING DE AIL TAIL MARKING DE MARKING DE TAIL TAILMARKING DETAIL MARKING DE MARKING DET TAIL AIL MARKING DETAIL MARKING DE MARKING DE TAILTAIL MARKING DETAIL MARKING DE MARKING DE TAIL TAILMARKING DETAIL MARKING DETAIL VC1 VC1 VC2 FRONT VIEW B FRONT VIEW REAR VIEW FRONT VIEW REAR VIEW B FRON REAR VIEW T VIEW FRONT VIEW REAR VIEW FRONT VIEW REAR VIEW FRON REAR VIEW T VIEW .950[24.13] FRONT VIEW REAR VIEW FRONT VIEW REAR VIEW REAR VIEW MARKING DETAIL MARKING DETAIL MARKING DETAIL MARKING DETAIL MARKING DETAIL MARKING DETAIL 1.266[32.16] AMP, PACKARD 58 1.466[37.24] AMP, PACKARD 58 AMP 1.266[32.16] AMP 1.466[37.24] B B 1.250[31.75] .920[23.37] .920[23.37] 1.170[29.72] FRONT VIEW REAR VIEW FRONT VIEW REAR VIEW FRONT VIEW REAR VIEW AMP, PACKARD 58 AMP, PACKARD 58 10 3 2 1 8 7 4 5 6 9 10 3 2 1 8 7 4 5 6 9 VC1 VC1 VC1 VC2 VC2 VC2 3 VCH 2 1 8 VCH 7 4 5 VCH 6 CONNECTOR HOUSING CONNECTOR HOUSING CONNECTOR HOUSING CONNECTOR HOUSING CONNECTOR HOUSING CONNECTOR HOUSING CONNECTOR HOUSING CONNECTOR HOUSING CONNECTOR HOUSING A A A A MARKING DETAIL 1.266[32.16] MARKING DE 1.466[37.24] TAIL 1.266[32.16] MARKING DETAIL 1.466[37.24] MARKING DETAIL 1.250[31.75] MARKING DETAIL MARKING DETAIL (For AMP terminals only) (For AMP terminals only) (For AMP terminals only) PACKARD 630 PACKARD 630 VC1 PACKARD 630 PACKARD 630 VC2 VC2 VCH VC1 VC1 VC2 FRONT VIEW REAR VIEW FRONT VIEW REAR VIEW FRONT VIEW REAR VIEW .950[24.13] B B CONNECTOR HOUSING CONNECTOR HOUSING CONNECTOR HOUSING MARKING DETAIL MARKING DETAIL MARKING DETAIL MARKING DETAIL MARKING DETAIL MARKING DETAIL B B AMP, PACKARD 58 AMP, PACKARD 58 AMP AMP FRONT VIEW REAR VIEW FRON (For T VIEW AMP terminals only) REAR VIEW FRONT VIEW REAR VIEW AMP, PACKARD 58 AMP, PACKARD 58 10 3 2 1 8 7 4 5 6 9 10 3 2 1 8 7 4 5 6 9 VC1 VC2 3 2 1 8 VCH 7 4 5 6 VC1 CONNEC VC2TOR HOUSING VCH CONNECTOR HOUSING CONNECTOR HOUSING 1.266[32.16] 1.466[37.24] 1.266[32.16] 1.466[37.24] 1.250[31.75] CONNECTOR HOUSING CONNEC (For AM TOR HOUSING P terminals only) CONNECTOR HOUSING (For AMP terminals only) MARKING DETAIL MARKING DETAIL MARKING DETAIL MARKING DETAIL MARKING DETAIL MARKING DETAIL FRONT VIEW REAR VIEW FRONT VIEW REAR VIEW FRONT VIEW REAR VIEW 1.050[26.67] 1.050[26.67] 1.050[26.67] Contura X Boot (P/N VB1-01) Additional V-Series Ratings VC1 VC2 VCH CONNECTOR HOUSING CONNECTOR HOUSING CONNECTOR HOUSING 1 .4VA @ 28VDC Resistive (For AMP terminals only) VB1-01 VB1-01 VB1-01 4 10A 250VAC 1/2 HP, 15A 125 VAC 1/2 HP, No Agency Listings 2.000[50.80] 2.000[50.80] 2.000[50.80] CONTURA X BOOT CONTURA X BOOT CONTURA X BOOT 1.050[26.67] 1 1.050[26.67] 5 10A 250VAC 1/2 HP, 15A 125 VAC 1/2 HP, UL Recognized, CSA Certified 1.050[26.67] B 15A 24V C 20A 18V VB1-01 VB1-01 2.000[50.80] CONTURA X BOOT .757[19.23] .757[19.23] .757[19.23] D 20A 12V 2.000[50.80]1.050[26.67] CONTURA X BOOT VB1-01 E 20A 14V, 10A 14VT (circuits 1, 4, A, & D only) 2.000[50.80] CONTURA X BOOT F 10A 14V, 6A, 14VT (circuit G only) VB1-01 2.000[50.80] CONTURA X BOOT .757[19.23] G 20A 6V H 20A 3V .757[19.23] 2 L 15A 125 VAC, 10A 250VAC, 1/2 HP 125-250 VAC; 6A 125 VAC L 3.99 [101.35] 3.99 [101.35] 3.99 [101.35] .757[19.23] M .4VA/20A 12V (combi-contact) .757[19.23] (combination gold/silver contacts for borderline dry circuit applications) VRT VRT VRT ACTUATOR REMO ACTU VALA TOR REMO ACTU VAL ATOR REMOVAL INSERT POINTS UNDER INSERT POINTS UNDER INSERT POINTS UNDER N .4VA/15A 24V (combi-contact) Contura II, III, IV, V, VI & VII Actuator 3.99 [101.35] .900 [22.86] .900 [22.86] .900 [22.86] ACTUATOR ACTUATOR ACTUATOR TOOL TOOL TOOL HOLD FLUSH ON BRACKET AND PUSH HOLD FLUSH ON BRACKET AND PUSH HOLD FLUSH ON BRACKET AND PUSH IN IN IN (For flush bracket) (combination gold/silver contacts for borderline dry circuit applications) (For flush bracket) (For flush bracket) TOP TOP TOP VRT Removal Tool (P/N VRT) ACTUATOR REMOVAL INSERT POINTS UNDER ACTUATOR .900 [22.86] TOOL HOLD FLUSH ON BRACKET AND PUSH NOTES IN (For flush bracket) 3.99 [101.35] TOP 3.99 [101.35] Consult factory to determine availability for individual circuits and their HP rating. 3.99 [101.35] VRT 1. Not available with Contura 7 or 14 rocker styles. ACTUATOR REMOVAL INSERT POINTS UNDER VRT ACTUATOR .900 [22.86] 2. TOOL Rating L available with circuits 1, 4, A & D only. HOLD FLUSH ON BRACKET AND PUSH IN (For flush bracket) ACTUATOR REMOVAL VRT INSERT POINTS UNDER TOP ACTUATOR .900 [22.86] ACTUATOR REMO T V OOL AL INSERT POINTS UNDER HOLD FLUSH ON BRACKET AND PUSH ACTUATIN OR .900 [22.86] TOOL (For flush bracket) HOLD FLUSH ON BRACKET AND PUSH IN TOP (For flush bracket) TOP 50 www.carlingtech.com TOP TOP TOP TOP TOP TOP TOP V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Accessories Contura Mounting Panels Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] Contura Hole Plug Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] 1.450 [36.83] TEST CUT VHP HOLE IN .830 [21.08] ACTUAL CONTURA II,III HOLE PLUG MATERIAL 1.240 [31.50] 1.820 [46.23] VHP .430 [10.92] CONTURA II,III HOLE PLUG VH2 STANDARD HOLE PLUG (With wing serrations) VH1 STANDARD HOLE PLUG (No wing serrations) 2.000 [50.80] (With VC1 connector attached) 1.067 [27.10] DETAIL VIEW VH3 VH4 VH1,VH3 & VH5 CONTURA IV HOLE PLUG CONTURA IV HOLE PLUG HOLE PLUGS (No wing serrations) (With wing serrations) (No wing serrations 1.928 [48.97] for ease of removal) 1.020 [25.91] DETAIL VIEW VH2,VH4 & VH6 VH5 VH6 HOLE PLUGS CONTURA V HOLE PLUG CONTURA V HOLE PLUG (With wing serrations) (No wing serrations) (With wing serrations) www.carlingtech.com 51 VP-Series Contura Illuminated Indicator - Introduction VP-Series VP-Series CONTURA ILLUMINATED INDICATORS The Illuminated Indicator is offered with removable/replaceable lamps, Contura styling, and LED illumination. As a critical safety feature, it’s illumination alerts the operator of essential system functions or malfunctions like: oil pressure, high temperature, transmission or other fluid levels, parking brake, or general system malfunction. Three different style housings (flush, raised panel, oval) assure seamless integration with Contura switches and into most any dashboard panel. Product Highlights: Typical Applications: • 3 Styles to choose from • Transportation • Single or double window Illumination • 25 lens colors and configurations • Available connector for easily installation 52 www.carlingtech.com VP-Series Contura Illuminated Indicator - Flush Housing - Ordering Scheme Flush Housing: VP 1 6 6 B 1 1 6 6 00 0 00 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Lens Legend Lens Series Termination Lamp Lamp Housing Lens Style Lens Style Lens Lens Legend Orientation Legend Color Color Color 6, 11 8, 9 LENS COLOR 1 SERIES Z No Lens VP Illuminated plug for V and J Mounting Hole Clear White Amber Green Red Blue Lens Style H2 Housing only 4 9 E K R W One piece lens H3 Lamp module only 5 A F L S Y Two piece lens* (with clear top protective lens) 2 TERMINATION 2 7 C H N U Two piece lens* 1 .250 TAB (QC) (with smoke top protective lens) 1 6 B G M T Two piece lens* (with white top protective lens) 4 3, 4 LAMP *All bottom lenses are molded of opaque material. Consult factory for other lens colors. No lamp 0 Neon 1 125VAC 2 250VAC Incandescent 4 3V 5 6V 6 12V 7 18V 8 24V 7 10 LENS LEGEND OVER LAMP 1 LED* Amber Green Red 00 No legend 2VDC L F R For legend options, visit us at carlingtech.com 6VDC M G S 12VDC N H T 24VDC P J V 11 LEGEND ORIENTATION *Typical current draw for LED is 20ma. 0 No legend 1 Orientation 1 2 Orientation 2 5 FLUSH HOUSING COLOR / STYLE 3 Orientation 3 B Black / Rectangular 4 Orientation 4 1 2 3 4 W White / Rectangular R Red / Rectangular G Gray / Rectangular 7 12 LENS LEGEND OVER LAMP 2 1 Black / Oval (Contura V) 00 No legend For legend options, visit us at carlingtech.com 5 6, 7 LENS STLYE Notes: Z No Lens 1 To order housing only, specify H2 followed by fields 5-11. 1 Transparent Diamond Square 2 To order lamp module only, specify H3 followed by fields 2-3. 9 2 Translucent Square 3 To order connector housing specify HP1-01 (black). 10 3 Laser Etched 4 Field 3 specifies lamp 1 is located over terminals 1A & 1B. 4 Transparent Oval Field 4 specifies lamp 2 is located over terminals 2A & 2B. 5 Field 6 specifies lens 1 is located over terminals 1A & 1B. 5 Translucent Oval Field 7 specifies lens 2 is located over terminals 2A & 2B. 10 6 Laser Etched Oval 6 Field 8 specifies lens 1 is located over terminals 1A & 1B. Field 9 specifies lens 2 is located over terminals 2A & 2B. 7 Field 10 specifies legend is over lens 1. Field 12 specifies legend is over lens 2. 8 If only one lens is chosen, it will be located over terminals 1A & 1B. 9 Translucent lens is available with two piece lens option only. 10 Laser etched option is available with one piece lens. 11 Oval lens option is available as one piece lens. *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 53 VP-Series Contura Illuminated Indicator - Raised Bracket - Ordering Scheme Raised Bracket: VP 1 6 6 6 1 1 6 6 00 0 00 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Lens Legend Lens Series Termination Lamp Lamp Bracket Lens Style Lens Style Lens Lens Color Color Color Legend Orientation Legend 3 8, 9 LENS COLOR 1 SERIES Z No Lens VP Illuminated plug for V and J Mounting Hole Clear White Amber Green Red Blue Lens Style 4 9 E K R W One piece lens 5 A F L S Y Two piece lens* 2 TERMINATION (with clear top protective lens) 1 .250 TAB (QC) 2 7 C H N U Two piece lens* 2 Solder Lug (with smoke top protective lens) 1 6 B G M T Two piece lens* 1 3, 4 LAMP (with white top protective lens) No lamp 0 *All bottom lenses are molded of opaque material. Consult factory for other lens colors. Neon 1 125VAC 2 250VAC Incandescent 4 3V 5 6V 6 12V 7 18V 8 24V 4 10 LENS LEGEND OVER LAMP 1 LED* Amber Green Red 00 No legend 2VDC L F R For legend options, visit us at carlingtech.com 6VDC M G S 12VDC N H T 24VDC P J V 11 LEGEND ORIENTATION *Typical current draw for LED is 20ma. 0 No legend 1 Orientation 1 2 Orientation 2 5 RAISED BRACKET / INSERT COLOR 3 Orientation 3 5 White / White 4 Orientation 4 6 Black / Black 1 2 3 4 7 White / Black 8 Black / White 4 12 LENS LEGEND OVER LAMP 2 00 No legend 2 6, 7 LENS STLYE For legend options, visit us at carlingtech.com Z No Lens 1 Transparent Diamond Square Notes: 6 2 Translucent Square 1 Field 3 specifies lamp 1 is located over terminals 8 (+) & 7 (–). 7 3 Laser Etched Field 4 specifies lamp 2 is located over terminals 10 (+) & 9 (–). 2 Field 6 specifies lens 1 is located over terminals 8 (+) & 7 (–). Field 7 specifies lens 2 is located over terminals 10 (+) & 9 (–). 3 Field 8 specifies lens 1 is located over terminals 8 (+) & 7 (–). Field 9 specifies lens 2 is located over terminals 10 (+) & 9 (–). 4 Field 10 specifies legend is over lens 1. Field 12 specifies legend is over lens 2. 5 If only one lens is chosen, it will be located over terminals 8 (+) & 7 (–). 6 Translucent lens is available with two piece lens option only. 7 Laser etched option is available with one piece lens. *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. 54 www.carlingtech.com VP-Series Contura Illuminated Indicator - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] 1.910 1.910 [48.51] [48.51] .960 [24.38] .960 .960 [24.38] .780 [24.38] .416 [19.81] [10.57] .350 [8.89] .820 .100[2.54] 1.440[36.58] [20.83] 1.506 .900 [38.25] .40[11.4] [22.86] .390 1.370 [ 9.90] [34.79] .820 .250 X .032 Q.C. [20.82] (6.35 X 0.81) 1.015 [25.78] 2.086 [52.98] .820 .120 [3.05] 1.928 [48.97] [20.83] .900 .40[11.4] [22.86] PLUG SHOWN WITH VC1 CONNECTOR .250 X .032 Q.C. .820 (6.35 X 0.81) [20.83] 1.440 [36.58] .830 .820 [21.08] [20.83] A PACKARD 630 VC1 B .920[23.37] AMP, PACKARD 58 .920 TEST CUT 1.450 10 3 2 1 8 [23.37] HOLE IN [36.83] ACTUAL 1.266[32.16] MATERIAL HP1-01 MARKING DETAIL ILLUMINATED PLUG CONNECTOR FRONT VIEW VC1 CONNECTOR HOUSING ILLUMINATED PLUG MOUNTING HOLE (OVAL, FLUSH AND RAISED BEZELS) LAMP #1 (+)8,1A (-)7,1B (OVAL, FLUSH AND RAISED BEZELS) MOUNTING PANEL THICKNESSES: LAMP #2 .062[1.57] .250[6.35] (+)10,2A (-)9,2B .093[2.36] .375[9.52] .125[3.17] .500[12.70] CIRCUIT .187[4.75] DIAGRAM Notes: Oval and flush bezel styles use terminals 1A, 1B, 2A, 2B. Raised bezel style uses terminals 7, 8, 9, 10. www.carlingtech.com 55 W–Series Fully Sealed Rocker Switches - Introduction W-Series W-Series SEALED ROCKER SWITCHES Carling Technologies set the standard for performance and aesthetics with the widely successful, often imitated, but never duplicated, V-Series rocker switches. Building further upon that platform, Carling has once again raised the bar with the fully sealed W-Series. The W-Series’ traditional appearance features complete IP68 protection, including below the panel, where the critical connection is made from the wiring harness. When used in conjunction with the integrated connector, the totally submersible W-Series provides a seal for up to ten individual wires, assuring compatibility with even the most complex circuitry. The W-Series also offers a wide variety of accoutrements, including endless illumination options featuring dual level and multicolor LEDs, progressive and hazard warning circuits, ratings up to 10A 24V, choice of paddle, rocker, locking or laser etched actuators, hundreds of standard legend choices and the electrical performance and reliability that is the hallmark of Carling Technologies products. Product Highlights: Typical Applications: Š Fully sealed and submersible Š Marine equipment Š IP68 protection, including below the panel Š ON/OFF Highway equipment Š Tri-seal design Š Connector with twin locking tabs 56 www.carlingtech.com W–Series Fully Sealed Rocker Switches - Design Features W-Series Switch DESIGN FEATURES ILLUMINATION TRI-SEAL DESIGN Choice of highly reliable SMT LED or Sealing at actuator, an insert molded neoprene incandescent lighting with 21 dependent base seal, along with wire lead seals, assures or independent circuit options. water tight, fully submersible protection. BODY ROLLER PIN INTEGRATED CONNECTOR One piece polyester 94V0 Proven reliable mechanism is Accommodates Tyco/Amp .110 seamless body acts as an lubricant free and allows for 100k junior power timer contacts with umbrella to protect critical electrical and 250k mechanical twin locking tabs to provide a internal components. cycles, and withstands extreme safe, secure, sealed connection. temperatures from -40˚C to +85˚C. www.carlingtech.com 57 W–Series Fully Sealed Rocker Switches - General Specifications Electrical Environmental Contact Rating .4VA @ 24VDC Environmental IP68, Fully sealed Corrosion/ Flowing Mixed Gas (FMG) 10 amps, 3-24VDC Chemical Splash Class III 3 year accelerated Dielectric Strength 1500 Volts RMS exposure per ASTM B-827, B-845 Insulation Resistance 50 Megaohms Operating Temperature -40°C to +85°C, 22 cycles, 300 Initial Contact Resistance 10 milliohms max. @ 4 VDC hours Life 100,000 cycles Vibration 1 Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 204D Contacts Silver tin-oxide, 88/12 Test Condition A 0.06 DA or 10G’s Terminals Copper with silver or gold plating 10-500 Hz. Quick Connect terminations. Vibration 2 Resonance search Voltage 3-24 VDC 24-50 Hz 0.40 DA Overcurrent 15A for 50 cycles 50-2000 ±10 G’s peak Results Horizontal Axis 3-5 G’s max. Mechanical Random Endurance 250,000 cycles minimum 24 Hz 0.06 PSD-Gsq/Hz 60 Hz 0.50 100 Hz 0.50 200 Hz 0.025 Physical 2000 Hz 0.025 Lighted LED - rated 100,000 hours 1/2 life Handling/Drop One meter onto concrete floor (LED is internally ballasted for Salt Spray Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 101D, voltages to 24 VDC) Test Condition A, 48 Hrs. Seals Neoprene Dust IP6X Thermal Shock Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 107F, Base Polyester blend rated to 125C Test Condition A, -55°C to 85°C with a UL flammability rating of Test criteria - pre and post test 94V0. contact resistance Actuator Basic actuator structure molded Moisture Resistance/ of thermoplastic polycarbonate Humidity Per Mil-Std 202F, with a hard Nylon 66 Method 106F, Test Criteria - pre thermoplastic surface overlay. and post test contact resistance Lens Polycarbonate rated at 100°C Function 2 & 3 Position Rocker Style Mounting Specifications Operation Maintained & Momentary Panel Thickness Range .032 to .125 Base PA 6/6 30GF (glass filled) Actuator PA 6/6 13GF For optimum panel fit, the following panel thicknesses are Bracket PBT 10GF suggested: .032, .062, .093, .125 Connector PBT 10GF, polarized .830[21.08] Actuator Travel (Angular Displacement) 24° full throw TEST CUT HOLE IN 1.450[36.83] ACTUAL MATERIAL SWITCH MOUNTING HOLE *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. 58 www.carlingtech.com W-Series Fully Sealed Rocker Switches - Ordering Scheme W 11 D 2 B C 0 1 A 7 Z 00 0 00 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Bracket Actuator Lens Lens Legend Legend Actuator Series Circuit Rating Termination Illumination Lamp Lamp Orientation Lens Legend 1 SERIES 6,7 LAMP (SAME CODING FOR BOTH SELECTIONS) W Selection 6: above terminals 1 & 4; Selection 7: above terminals 3 & 6 No lamp 0 LED* Red Amber Green White 2 CIRCUIT ( ) - momentary 2VDC A L F 4 For terminal arrangement, see dimensional specifications 6VDC B M G 5 Position: 1 2 3 12VDC C N H 6 SP DP 2 & 3, 5 & 6 Connected Terminals 1 & 2, 4 & 5 24VDC D P J 8 11 21 ON NONE OFF 12 22 (ON) NONE OFF * Consult factory for “daylight bright”, blue/green and white LED options. 13 23 ON NONE (OFF) Typical current draw for LED is 20ma. 14 24 ON NONE ON 15 25 ON NONE (ON) 16 26 ON OFF ON 1 8 BRACKET COLOR 17 27 ON OFF (ON) 1 Black 18 28 (ON) OFF (ON) - 42 2 & 3, 5 & 6 NONE 1 & 8 - 43 2 & 3 2 & 3, 4 & 5 4 & 5 1 9 ACTUATOR - 44 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 OFF - 45 (2 & 3), (5 & 6) 2 & 3 OFF 3 Black with Laser Etched - 46 (2 & 3), (5 & 6) 2 & 3 2 & 1 A Black - 47 2 & 3 & 4, 5 & 6 2 & 3, 4 & 5 2 & 1, 4 & 5 - 48 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 2 & 1 - 49 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3, 4 & 5 2 & 1, 4 & 5 10 LENS COLOR / STYLE - ABOVE LAMP #1 TERMINALS 1 AND 4 51 - 3 & 10 2 & 3 OFF 11 LENS COLOR / STYLE - ABOVE LAMP #2 TERMINALS 3 AND 6 52 - 3 & 10 2 & 3 2 & 1 53 - (3 & 10) 2 & 3 OFF Z - No Lens 54 - 3 & 10 2 & 3 (OFF) Clear White Amber Green Red Blue 55 - (3 & 10) 2 & 3 2 & 1 1 - B G M T Large Transparent 56 - (3 & 10) 2 & 3 (OFF) - 7 C H N U Large Translucent 57 - (3 & 10) 2 & 3 (2 & 1) 3 - D J P V Bar Transparent 58 - OFF 2 & 3 2 & 1 - 9 E K R W Bar Translucent - 61 3 & 10, 6 & 9 2 & 3, 5 & 6 OFF, OFF - 62 3 & 10, 6 & 9 2 & 3, 4 & 5 2 & 1, 5 & 4 5 A - - - - Laser-Etched - 63 (3 & 10, 6 & 9) 2 & 3, 4 & 5 OFF, OFF Lens color for LEDs must be clear, white, or match color of LED. - 64 3 & 10, 6 & 9 2 & 3, 4 & 5 (OFF, OFF) - 65 (3 & 10, 6 & 9) 2 & 3, 4 & 5 2 & 1, 5 & 4 - 66 (3 & 10, 6 & 9) 2 & 3, 4 & 5 (OFF, OFF) 2 12 ACTUATOR LENS OR BODY LEGEND - 67 (3 & 10, 6 & 9) 2 & 3, 4 & 5 (2 & 1, 5 & 4) 00 - No Legend this location/No actuator - 68 OFF, OFF 2 & 3, 4 & 5 2 & 1, 5 & 4 11 ON 12 OFF 13 I 14 O OFF ON O I 3 RATING 15 O O 16 O O 17 O I 18 I O B 10A 24V D 10A 12V G 10A 6V H 10A 3V F N N F F F 4 TERMINATION / BASE STYLE 21 22 23 24 2 .110 TAB (QC) OFF ON O I 25 O 26 O 27 O 28 I F N 5 ILLUMINATION F Lamp #1:above terminals 1&4 end of switch.; Lamp #2 above terminals 3&6 end of switch. Positive (+) and negative (-) symbols apply to LED lamps only For additional legend options & codes, visit us at carlingtech.com Actuator Lens Position Lamps Illumination Type Lamp Wired to Terminals O NONE 13 LEGEND ORIENTATION A # 1 Independent 8+ 7- 0 No legend (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) B # 1 Down 3+ 7- 1 Orientation 1 C # 2 Up 3+ 7- P 2 Orientation 2 D # 1 Down 3+ 7- P P 3 Orientation 3 & # 2 Down 1+ 7- P E # 1 Up 1+ 7- 4 Orientation 4 & # 2 Up 3+ 7- 12 34 F # 1 Independent 8+ 7- & # 2 Up 3+ 6- G # 1 Independent 8+ 7- 2 & # 2 Up 3+ 7- 14 ACTUATOR LENS LEGEND H # 2 Independent 8+ 7- 00 No legend this location/no actuator (used with codes 11-18 in Selections for Single Pole Switches Only: selection 12) Selection 14 required when switch requires two legends. If J # 1 Down 3+ 8- the two legends consist of one lens & one body legend, lens legend must & # 2 Independent 6+ 7- be specified in selection 12; body legend specified in selection 14. For K # 1 Independent 8+ 7- legend options & codes, visit us at carlingtech.com & # 2 Independent 6+ 7- Selections for Double Pole Switches Only: Notes: L # 1 Down 3+ 6- 1 Custom colors are available. Consult factory. M # 2 Up 3+ 6- 2 White imprinting is standard on black actuators; Black imprinting is standard on white, N # 1 Down 3+ 6- red & gray actuators; Custom colors are available, consult factory. & # 2 Down 1+ 4- P # 1 Up 1+ 4- & # 2 Up 3+ 6- R # 1 Down 3+ 7- & # 2 Up 6+ 7- S # 1 Down 6+ 7- & # 2 Independent 8+ 7- U # 1 Independent 8+ 7- & # 2 Independent 10+ 9- V # 2 Independent 10+ 9- W # 1 Independent 8+ 7- & # 2 Independent 10+ 7- Y # 1 & # 2 Independent in Series 8+ 7- Z # 1 & # 2 Independent in Parallel 8+ 7- www.carlingtech.com 59 W-Series Fully Sealed Rocker Switches - Locking - Ordering Scheme W 11 D 2 0 W 0 J P 7 B 00 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Bracket Actuator Lens Lock Legend Legend Series Circuit Rating Termination Illumination Lock Lamp Function Orientation 1 1 SERIES 8 BRACKET COLOR W J Black 1 2 CIRCUIT ( ) - momentary 9 ACTUATOR For terminal arrangement, see dimensional specifications P Black R Red Position: 1 2 3 SP DP 2 & 3, 5 & 6 Connected Terminals 1 & 2, 4 & 5 10 LENS 11 21 ON NONE OFF Z - No Lens 14 24 ON NONE ON Clear White Amber Green Red Blue 1 - B G M T Large Transparent 3 RATING - 7 C H N U Large Translucent 1 0.4VA 28V DC Resistive 3 - D J P V Bar Transparent B 10A 24V - 9 E K R W Bar Translucent D 10A 12V Lens color for LEDs must be clear, white, or match color of LED. 4 TERMINATION / BASE STYLE 2 .110 TAB (QC) 11 LOCK FUNCTION Up Down Lock Color B J Black 5 ILLUMINATION C K White Lamp #1:above terminals 1&4 end of switch.; Lamp #2 above terminals 3&6 D L Red end of switch. Positive (+) and negative (-) symbols apply to LED lamps only E M Safety Orange Actuator Lens Position Lamps Illumination Type Lamp Wired to Terminals O NONE 1 12 LASER ETCHED, LENS OR BODY LEGEND C # 2 Up 3+ 7- 00 No legend this location / no actuator H # 2 Independent 8+ 7- For legend options & codes, visit us at carlingtech.com 6 LOCK 13 LEGEND ORIENTATION W Lock Option 0 No legend 1 Orientation 1 7 LAMP #2 2 Orientation 2 3 Orientation 3 No lamp 0 LED* Red Amber Green White 4 Orientation 4 12 34 2VDC A L F 4 6VDC B M G 5 Notes: 12VDC C N H 6 1 White imprinting is standard on black actuators; Black imprinting is standard on white, 24VDC D P J 8 red & gray actuators; Custom colors are available, consult factory. * Consult factory for “daylight bright”, blue/green and white LED options. Typical current draw for LED is 20ma. 60 www.carlingtech.com W-Series Fully Sealed Rocker Switches - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] 1.000 [25.40] 1.724 [43.78] 12° .418 1.707 1.962 [10.62] [43.36] [49.83] 2.162 [54.91] .031 .465 [.79] [11.81] 1.664 .110 SWITCH SHOWN WITH [42.27] [2.79] CONNECTOR INSTALLED KEYING FEATURE TERMINAL ARRANGMENT 1.178 [29.93] 87 .714 14 [18.14] 1.080 25 [27.43] 36 10 9 WCH CONNECTOR (190-31214-001) 1.200 [30.48] Notes: WCH connector is intended for use with Tyco/Amp .110 Junior Power Timer, female contacts, and wire seals. For 14-16 awg wire, specify Tyco/Amp P/N 927766-3 For 16-20 awg wire, specify Tyco/Amp P/N 927770-3 Tyco/Amp cable seal P/N 828904-1 (20-18 awg wire) or P/N 828905-1 (16-14 awg wire) is required for each individual wire lead, and Tyco/Amp cable plug, P/N 828922-1, is required to seal each unused connector opening. Consult Tyco/Amp for the cable seal recommended for your specific wire gauge and thickness. www.carlingtech.com 61 W-Series Fully Sealed Rocker Switches - Circuit Diagrams Circuit Diagrams: CIRCUIT CIRCUIT CIRCUIT CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DIAGRAM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM CODE CODE CODE CODE 3 6 1 10 3 1 3 6 11 23 46 57 2 5 2 2 5 2 3 1 1 3 4 6 1 3 4 6 3 47 58 12 24 2 5 2 3 2 2 5 3 1 3 6 1 3 4 6 10 9 48 13 25 61 2 2 5 2 5 2 3 5 6 1 10 4 9 1 3 4 6 1 3 4 6 1 3 26 49 62 14 2 5 2 5 2 3 5 6 2 10 9 1 3 4 6 10 1 3 15 27 51 63 2 5 2 3 5 6 2 2 3 1 3 4 6 1 10 10 9 1 3 16 28 52 64 2 2 5 2 3 2 3 5 6 1 10 4 9 1 3 8 1 2 3 6 10 17 42 53 65 5 2 2 3 2 3 5 6 3 4 10 9 10 1 3 18 43 66 54 2 5 2 3 2 3 5 6 2 3 6 1 10 4 9 3 6 1 10 67 21 44 55 2 5 2 5 2 3 2 3 5 6 1 4 3 6 3 6 10 22 45 56 68 2 5 2 3 2 3 5 6 2 5 62 www.carlingtech.com W-Series Fully Sealed Rocker Switches - Lamp Circuit Diagrams Lamp Circuit Diagrams: LAMP CIRCUIT LAMP CIRCUIT LAMP CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DIAGRAM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM CODE CODE CODE A J U B K V C L W D M Y E N Z F P G R H S www.carlingtech.com 63 L–Series Sealed Rocker Switches - Introduction L-Series L-Series SEALED ROCKER SWITCHES The L-Series rocker switch is an innovative product offering total design flexibility, while at the same time setting new standards for performance and reliability. Its versatile design features include a neatly proportioned size that fits into an industry standard mounting hole of 1.734 x .867 (44.0mm x 22.0mm), countless unique choices for ratings, circuits, colors, illuminations and laser etched legends. These single or double pole switches also feature a broad choice of actuator styles, colors, and lenses with up to twelve terminals offering an extensive range of switch and lamp circuit options, including LED or incandescent illumination. Additionally, an optional plug-in terminal connector enables pre-wiring of wire harness. Resources: Download 3D CAD Files IGS STP Watch Product Video Product Highlights: Typical Applications: Š IP67 certified sealed front panel components Š Construction machinery Š Withstands temperatures from -40°C to +85°C Š Agricultural equipment Š Vibration, shock, thermoshock, moisture and salt Š On-highway transportation equipment spray resistant 64 www.carlingtech.com L–Series Sealed Rocker Switches - Design Features L-Series Switch DESIGN FEATURES LED LIGHTING SEAL PROTECTION TERMINALS Utilize less current and are not Locks out elements such as Available with 2 industry affected by vibration, providing water, dust & debris. Certified standard termination options: long lasting illumination. to IP67 for front panel .250 or .187 tabs with up to 12 Available in 3 standard colors. components. terminal options. LENS & LEGENDS ACTUATOR ROLLER PIN BASE Lens available in 2 sizes and 6 Available in rocker or Eliminates need for Fits into industry standard colors in either translucent paddle styles. Several lubricants, increasing the standard mounting or transparent materials. Numerous standard color options temperature range of the hole of 1.734 x .867 in symbols and text available for also available. switch from -40˚ C to +85˚C [44.0mm x 22.0mm]. imprinting or laser etching. [-40˚ F to 185˚ F]. www.carlingtech.com 65 L–Series Sealed Rocker Switches - General Specifications Electrical Environmental Contact Rating .4VA @ 24VDC (MAX) resistive Environmental IP67 for above panel components of the actual switch, representing 15 amps, 125VAC an index of protection as applied 10 amps, 250VAC to electrical equipment in 20 amps, 4-14VDC accordance with IEC 529, BS 15 amps, 15-28VDC 5490, DIN 400 50 & NFC 20 010. Dielectric Strength 1250 Volts RMS between pole to Corrosion Mixed Flowing Gas MFG Class III pole per ASTM B-827 & B-845, Method 3750 Volts RMS between live H, with 3 years exposure. parts and accessible surfaces Operating Temperature -40°C to + 85°C Insulation Resistance 50 Megaohms Vibration 1 Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 204D Initial Contact Resistance 10 milliohms max. @ 4 VDC Test Condition A 0.06 DA or 10G’s 10-500 Hz. Tested with Life 100,000 cycles maintained, VCH connector. Test criteria - No 50,000 cycles momentary at rated loss of circuit during test and pre voltage and current and post test contact resistance. Contacts 90/10 silver-nickel, silver Vibration 2 Resonance search tin-oxide, gold 24-50 Hz 0.40 DA Terminals Brass or copper/silver plate 50-2000 ±10 G’s peak 3/16” (4.76mm) & 1/4” (6.3mm) Results Horizontal Axis 3-5 G’s Quick Connect terminations max. standard. Random 24 Hz 0.06 PSD-Gsq/Hz 60 Hz 0.50 Mechanical 100 Hz 0.50 200 Hz 0.025 Endurance 250,000 cycles minimum 2000 Hz 0.025 No loss of circuit during test; <10µ chatter. Physical Shock Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 213B, Test Condition K @ 30G’s. Tested Lighted Incandescent - rated 10,000 with VCH connector. Test criteria hours - No loss of circuit during test, LED - rated 100,000 hours 1/2 life pre, and post test contact (LED is internally ballasted for resistance. voltages to 24 VDC) Salt Spray Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 101D, Seals Rocker, base & bracket are Test Condition A, 48 Hrs. sealed. Thermal Shock Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 107F, Base Nylon 66 GF rated to 85°C with a Test Condition A, -55°C to 85°C. flammability rating of 94V0. Test criteria - pre and post test Actuator Basic actuator structure molded contact resistance. Moisture Resistance Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 106F, of thermoplastic polycarbonate Test Criteria - pre and post test with a hard Nylon 66 contact resistance. thermoplastic surface overlay. Lock Acetal Lens Polycarbonate rated at 100°C Mounting Specifications Function 2 & 3 Position Rocker Style Bracket Nylon Zytel .867 [22.02] 1.970 Connector Nylon 66 rated at 85°C. Polarized. TEST CUT HOLE IN 1.734 [44.04] ACTUAL Actuator Travel (Angular Displacement) .260 [6.60] MATERIAL .390 [9.91] 1.020 [25.91] 2 position 26° 3 positions 13° from center MOUNTING HOLE Panel Thickness Range .100 [2.54] Acceptable Panel Thickness .030 to .156 (.76mm to 3.96mm) 2.265 [57.53] Recommended: .030, .062, .093, .125 and .156 3.055 [77.60] .230 X .031 T1 [5.84 X .79] BAT T2 OUTPUT T3 (LOAD) GROUND PADDLE STYLE ACTUATOR *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. Q.C. SELECTION GUIDE 66 www.carlingtech.com 1.300 [33.02] WIRE GAGE COMPANY PACKARD .344 [8.74] 2 SERIES PART NO. AWG MM 12084590 12 3.0 1.570 [39.88] PACKARD 12052224 12 3.0 METRI-PACK 12015870 16-14 2.0-1.0 630 SERIES 12015869 20-18 1.0-.80 TIN PLATED 1.340 [34.04] 1.060 [26.92] BRASS 12020035 22-18 (2 REQ'D) .80.-.50 (2 REQ'D) 12052222 20-22 .50-.35 L-Series Sealed Rocker Switches – Ordering Scheme L 11 E 3 C H N 1 3 A A 45 1 48 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Bracket Actuator Lens Style Lens Style Legend Legend Actuator Series Circuit Rating Termination Illumination Lamp Lamp & Color & Color Orientation Lens Legend 1 SERIES 5 ILLUMINATION Lamp #1:above terminals 9 & 10 end of switch.; Lamp #2 above terminals 11 & 12 end L of switch. Positive (+) and negative (-) symbols apply to LED lamps only. Lamps Illumination Type Lamp Wired to Terminals 2 S None 2 CIRCUIT A # 1 Independent 10+ 9- Terminal Orientation ( ) - momentary B # 2 Independent 12+ 11- SP - single pole - uses terminals 1, 2 & 4. C # 1 Independent 10+ 9- DP - double pole uses terminals 5, 6 & 8. & # 2 Independent 12+ 9- Terminals 9, 10 & 11 for lamp circuit only. D # 1 Dependent 4+ 9- E # 1 Independent 10+ 9- & # 2 Dependent 4+ 9- 4 F # 1 Independent 10+ 9- Position: 1 2 3 & # 2 Dependent 8+ 9- SP DP 2 & 4, 6 & 8 Connected Terminals 1 & 2, 5 & 6 G # 1 Dependent 4+ 9- 11 21 ON NONE OFF & # 2 Independent 10+ 9- 12 22 (ON) NONE OFF H # 1 Both Independent 10+ 9- 13 23 ON NONE (OFF) & # 2 (in series) 14 24 ON NONE ON J # 1 Dependent 4+ 9- 15 25 ON NONE (ON) & # 2 Dependent 1+ 9- 16 26 ON OFF ON 1 # 2 Hazard 6+ 10- 12- 17 27 ON OFF (ON) 2 # 1 Hazard 6+ 10- 12- 18 28 (ON) OFF (ON) CIRCUITS WITH JUMPER TERMINALS 30* (2,4&5), (1,6&8) OFF, OFF (1,2&8), (4,5&6) 6,7 LAMP (SAME CODING FOR BOTH SELECTIONS) 31 1, 2 & 5 2, 3 & 7 2, 4 & 8 Selection 6: above terminals 10 & 9; Selection 7: above terminals 12 & 11 PROGRESSIVE CIRCUITS No lamp 0 51 3 & 4 2, 3 1 & 2 Incandescent 4 3V 5 6V 6 12V 7 18V 8 24V 52 3 & 4 2, 3 OFF LED* Red Amber Green 53 (3 & 4) 2, 3 1 & 2 2VDC A L F 54 (3 & 4) 2, 3 (OFF) 6VDC B M G 55 (3 & 4) 2, 3 (1 & 2) 12VDC C N H 56 (3 & 4) 2, 3 (OFF) 24VDC D P J 57 3 & 4 2, 3 (OFF) * Consult factory for “daylight bright”, blue/green and white LED options. 58* 2 & 4 2, 3 1 & 2 Typical current draw for LED is 20ma. 61 3 & 4, 7 & 8 2 & 3, 6 & 7 1 & 2, 5 & 6 62 3 & 4, 7 & 8 2 & 3, 6 & 7 OFF, OFF 63 (3 & 4), (7 & 8) 2 & 3, 6 & 7 1 & 2, 5 & 6 1 8 BRACKET COLOR Black White Gray Red 64 (3 & 4), (7 & 8) 2 & 3, 6 & 7 OFF, OFF Standard Bracket 1 2 3 4 65 (3 & 4), (7 & 8) 2 & 3, 6 & 7 (1 & 2), (5 & 6) Rockerguard at Lamp 1 A B C D 66 (3 & 4), (7 & 8) 2 & 3, 6 & 7 (OFF, OFF) Rockerguard at Lamp 2 E F G H 67 3 & 4, 7 & 8 2 & 3, 6 & 7 (OFF, OFF) 68 2 & 4, 7 & 8 2 & 4, OFF OFF, OFF 69* 2 & 4, 1, 7 & 8 2 & 4, OFF OFF, OFF 1 9 ACTUATOR STYLE AND COLOR 70 (2 & 4), (7 & 8) 2 & 4, 5 & 7 (1 & 2), (5 & 7) Black White Gray Red Laser Etched 71 (2&4), (7 & 8) 2 & 4, 5 & 7 1 & 2, 5 & 7 Rocker A B C D 3 72 2 & 4, 7 & 8 2 & 4, 5 & 7 1 & 2, 5 & 7 Paddle J N K M 4 73 (2 & 4), (7 & 8) 2 & 4, OFF OFF, OFF 80 2 & 4, 6 & 8 2 & 4, OFF OFF, 5 & 6 HAZARD WARNING CIRCUITS 10 & 11 LENS STYLE AND COLOR A2 6,7 & 8, 3 & 4 NONE OFF, 1 & 2 Lens color for LEDs must be clear, white, or match color of LED. A3 6,7 & 8, 2 & 4 NONE OFF, 1 & 2 0 - No Actuator Z - No Lens * Available with ratings 1, 4, & E only. Clear White Amber Green Red Blue 1 - B G M T Large Transparent - 7 C H N U Large Translucent 2 3 - D J P V Bar Transparent 3 RATING - 9 E K R W Bar Translucent 1 .4VA @ 28VDC Resistive 5 A - - - - Laser Etched background color 4 10A 250VAC 1/2 HP, 15A 125VAC 1/2 HP, No Listings B 15A 24V C 20A 18V 12 LASER ETCHED, LENS OR BODY LEGEND D 20A 12V 00 No legend this location / no actuator E 15A 12V For legend options & codes, visit us at carlingtech.com G 20A 6V H 20A 3V 13 LEGEND ORIENTATION 0 No legend (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) 2,3 4 TERMINATION 1 Orientation 1 - vertical, lamp 1 on top 1 .250 (6.4mm) TAB (QC) 2 Orientation 2 - horizontal, lamp 1 on right 3 .187 (4.7mm) TAB (QC) 3 Orientation 3 - vertical, lamp 1 on bottom 4 Orientation 4 - vertical, lamp 1 on left Do not use silicone based lubricants to reduce terminal insertion forces during connector assembly, as it is detrimental to function and performance. Notes: Consult factory to verify horsepower rating for your particular circuit choice. 1 Custom colors are available. Consult factory. 2 Circuits 30, 31, 58, 69 are not available with rating codes 4, C, D, G or H. 3 Termination 3 only available with rating codes 1, B, and E. 1 2 3 4 3AA-146 3AA-246 4 Not available with circuits 11-18, 51-57 and 69. 14 ACTUATOR LENS LEGEND 00 No legend this location / no actuator For legend options & codes, visit us at carlingtech.com www.carlingtech.com 67 L-Series Sealed Rocker Switches - Locking - Ordering Scheme L 11 D 1 S W C J P M H 00 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Series Circuit Rating Termination Illumination Lock Lamp Bracket Actuator Lens Lock Legend Legend Orientation 1 SERIES 6 LOCK L W Lock above terminals 10 & 9. 5 2 CIRCUIT 7 LAMP Terminal Orientation ( ) - momentary Above terminals 12 & 11 SP - single pole - uses terminals 1, 2 & 4. No lamp 0 DP - double pole uses terminals 5, 6 & 8. Incandescent 4 3V 5 6V 6 12V 7 18V 8 24V Terminals 9, 10 & 11 for lamp circuit only. LED* Red Amber Green 2VDC A L F 6VDC B M G 12VDC C N H Position: 1 2 3 24VDC D P J SP DP 2 & 4, 6 & 8 Connected Terminals 1 & 2, 5 & 6 * Consult factory for “daylight bright”, blue/green and white LED options. 11 21 ON NONE OFF Typical current draw for LED is 20ma. 14 24 ON NONE ON 16 26 ON OFF ON 17 27 ON OFF (ON) 1 8 BRACKET COLOR 18 28 (ON) OFF (ON) J Black CIRCUITS WITH JUMPER TERMINALS 2 30 (2,4&5), (1,6&8) OFF, OFF (1,2&8), (4,5&6) 2 31 1, 2 & 5 2, 3 & 7 2, 4 & 8 1 PROGRESSIVE CIRCUITS 9 ACTUATOR STYLE AND COLOR 51 3 & 4 2, 3 1 & 2 Black Red 52 3 & 4 2, 3 OFF Locking Rocker P R 53 (3 & 4) 2, 3 1 & 2 54 (3 & 4) 2, 3 (OFF) 55 (3 & 4) 2, 3 (1 & 2) 10 & 11 LENS STYLE AND COLOR 56 (3 & 4) 2, 3 (OFF) Lens color for LEDs must be clear, white, or match color of LED. 57 3 & 4 2, 3 (OFF) 0 - No Actuator Z - No Lens 58 2 & 4 2, 3 1 & 2 Clear White Amber Green Red Blue 61 3 & 4, 7 & 8 2 & 3, 6 & 7 1 & 2, 5 & 6 1 - B G M T Large Transparent 62 3 & 4, 7 & 8 2 & 3, 6 & 7 OFF, OFF - 7 C H N U Large Translucent 63 (3 & 4), (7 & 8) 2 & 3, 6 & 7 1 & 2, 5 & 6 3 - D J P V Bar Transparent 64 (3 & 4), (7 & 8) 2 & 3, 6 & 7 OFF, OFF - 9 E K R W Bar Translucent 65 (3 & 4), (7 & 8) 2 & 3, 6 & 7 (1 & 2), (5 & 6) 66 (3 & 4), (7 & 8) 2 & 3, 6 & 7 (OFF, OFF) 67 3 & 4, 7 & 8 2 & 3, 6 & 7 (OFF, OFF) 68 2 & 4, 7 & 8 2 & 4, OFF OFF, OFF 11 LOCK FUNCTION AND COLOR 69 2 & 4, 1, 7 & 8 2 & 4, OFF OFF, OFF Locking Position 3 70 (2 & 4), (7 & 8) 2 & 4, 5 & 7 (1 & 2), (5 & 7) Up Down Up & Down Center Lock Color 71 (2&4), (7 & 8) 2 & 4, 5 & 7 1 & 2, 5 & 7 A H R 1 Match Actuator 72 2 & 4, 7 & 8 2 & 4, 5 & 7 1 & 2, 5 & 7 B J S 2 Black 73 (2 & 4), (7 & 8) 2 & 4, OFF OFF, OFF C K T 3 White 80 2 & 4, 6 & 8 2 & 4, OFF OFF, 5 & 6 D L V 4 Red E M W 5 Safety Orange 2 3 RATING 1 .4VA @ 28VDC Resistive 12 LASER ETCHED, LENS OR BODY LEGEND 4 10A 250VAC 1/2 HP, 15A 125VAC 1/2 HP, No Listings 00 No legend this location / no actuator B 15A 24V For legend options & codes, visit us at carlingtech.com C 20A 18V D 20A 12V E 15A 12V 13 LEGEND ORIENTATION G 20A 6V 0 No legend (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) H 20A 3V 1 Orientation 1 - vertical, lamp 1 on top 2 Orientation 2 - horizontal, lamp 1 on right 3 Orientation 3 - vertical, lamp 1 on bottom 4 4 Orientation 4 - vertical, lamp 1 on left 4 TERMINATION 1 .250 (6.4mm) TAB (QC) P 3 .187 (4.7mm) TAB (QC) P P Do not use silicone based lubricants to reduce terminal insertion forces during connector assembly, as it is detrimental to function and performance. P 1 2 3 4 5 ILLUMINATION PZAY2-1 PZAY2-2 Lamp #1:above terminals 9 & 10 end of switch.; Lamp #2 above terminals 11 & 12 end of switch. Positive (+) and negative (-) symbols apply to LED lamps only. Lamps Illumination Type Lamp Wired to Terminals S None B # 2 Independent 12+ 11- Notes: Consult factory to verify horsepower rating for your particular circuit choice. 1 Custom colors are available. Consult factory. 2 Additional lamp circuits available. Consult factory. 3 Available only with 3 position circuits. 4 Termination 3 only available with ratings 1, B and E. 5 Circuits 30, 31, 58 and 69, are not available with rating codes 4, C, D, G or H. 68 www.carlingtech.com L-Series Sealed Rocker Switches - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] L-SERIES L-SERIES SHOWN WITH LASER ETCHED SHOWN WITH ROCKER GUARD ACTUATOR 1.970 [50.04] 1.020 [25.91] .435 [10.16] .400 [10.16] 1.450 [36.83] .855 [21.72] L-SERIES L-SERIES SHOWN WITH LARGE LENS SHOWN WITH BAR LENS, LOCK AND PADDLE ACTUATOR AND CONNECTOR 1.970 [50.04] 1.020 [25.91] .453 [11.51] .400 [10.16] 12 4 3 2 1 10 2.380 [60.45] 12 4 3 2 1 10 Connector Hole Plug L-SERIES L-SERIES CONNECTOR HOLE PLUG LH1 REMOVABLE HOLE PLUG LC1-01 BLACK .250 TAB CONNECTOR (PACKARD 630 SERIES) WITH NON-SERRATED WINGS LC2-01 BLACK .187 TAB CONNECTOR (PACKARD 480 SERIES) 1.970 [50.04] LH2 HOLE PLUG WITH LC3-01 BLACK .250 TAB CONNECTOR (AMP ONLY) SERRATED WINGS 1.020 [25.91] .500 [12.70] 1.325 [33.66] .300 [7.62] .920 [23.37] .855 [21.72] 1.710 [43.43] .790 [20.07] www.carlingtech.com 69 L-Series Sealed Rocker Switches - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] +.008 +.008 -.000 -.000 .984 [25.00] 2.020 [51.31] R .093 MAX TYP R .093 MAX TYP MOUNTING PANEL TEST TEST +.008 +.008 FOR ADDITIONAL UNITS, ADD 1.03 [26.2] PER UNIT. CUT CUT -.000 -.000 FOR MORE THAN 2 L-SERIES SWITCHES, ADD MIDDLE HOLE IN HOLE IN SECTION. AVAILABLE IN PANEL THICKNESSES LISTED 1.900 [48.26] 1.900 [48.26] ACTUAL ACTUAL BELOW. CONSULT FACTORY MATERIAL MATERIAL DIMENSIONS: LME 2.02 [51.3mm] PLUS NUMBER OF CENTER BEZELS (LMM) X 1.034 [26.26mm] MOUNTING PANEL THICKNESS .062 [1.57] LMS MOUNTING PANEL .093 [2.36] MOUNTING PANEL OPENING HOLE (2) UNITS .125 [3.17] .156 [3.96] 2.300 [58.42] 2.300 [58.42] 1.990 [50.55] 2.300 [58.42] 1.187 [30.15] 1.030 [26.16] 1.340 [34.04] LME MOUNTING PANEL LMM MOUNTING PANEL LMS END MIDDLE MOUNTING PANEL 1.700 [43.18] 1.030 [26.16] 1.030 [26.16] .670 [17.02] 2.300 [58.42] 2.300 [58.42] 3.400 [86.36] 4.430 [112.52] LM3 MOUNTING PANEL LM4 MOUNTING PANEL PANEL OPENING SIZE: 1.90 X 3.06 [48.3mm X 77.7mm] PANEL OPENING SIZE: 1.90 X 4.09 [48.3mm X 103.9mm] 1.030 [26.16] .670 [17.02] 2.300 [58.42] 6.490 [164.85] LM6 MOUNTING PANEL PANEL OPENING SIZE: 1.90 X 6.15 [48.3mm X 156.2mm] 70 www.carlingtech.com L-Series Sealed Rocker Switches - Circuit Diagrams Circuit Diagrams: CIRCUIT CIRCUIT CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DIAGRAM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM CODE CODE CODE 5 4 4 1 3 11 22 51 2 2 6 2 4 3 4 4 5 12 23 52 2 2 6 4 2 1 3 4 1 4 5 8 13 24 53 2 2 2 4 6 1 4 3 1 4 5 8 14 25 54 2 2 2 6 4 1 4 1 3 1 4 5 8 15 26 55 2 2 2 4 6 3 1 4 1 4 5 8 16 27 56 2 2 4 2 6 1 4 3 1 4 5 8 17 28 57 2 6 2 2 4 1 4 1 4 5 8 1 3 4 18 30 58 2 6 2 2 1 5 4 8 3 7 1 3 4 5 7 8 21 31 61 6 2 2 4 6 8 2 www.carlingtech.com 71 L-Series Sealed Rocker Switches - Circuit Diagrams Circuit Diagrams: CIRCUIT CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DIAGRAM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM CODE CODE 3 7 1 4 5 8 62 71 2 4 6 8 7 2 1 3 5 7 1 4 5 8 63 72 7 2 2 4 6 8 3 7 4 8 64 73 7 2 4 6 8 2 1 3 5 7 4 5 8 65 80 6 2 2 4 6 8 3 7 4 5 8 1 81 66 2 4 6 8 2 6 1 5 3 7 4 8 67 82 6 3 2 4 6 8 8 4 1 2 3 4 7 8 68 A2 INTERNAL CONNECTION 7 2 6 4 8 1 1 4 7 8 69 A3 INTERNAL CONNECTION 7 2 6 2 1 4 5 8 70 7 2 72 www.carlingtech.com L-Series Sealed Rocker Switches - Lamp Circuit Diagrams Lamp Circuit Diagrams: LAMP CIRCUIT LAMP CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DIAGRAM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM CODE CODE -9 -9 +1 +4 A J 1 1 2 +10 -12 -11 INTERNAL 1 B CONNECTION 2 2 +10 +12 -12 -9 INTERNAL 2 C 1 CONNECTION 1 2 +10 +10 +12 (–)9 -9 +4 D K 1 1 (+)10 -9 +4 E 1 2 LEGEND SYMBOL DEFINITION +10 TERMINAL LOCATION -9 +8 LAMP LOCATION F MAINTAINED CIRCUIT 1 2 MOMENTARY CIRCUIT +10 INTERNAL CONNECTION -9 +4 (JUMPER TERMINAL) 2 POSITION CONNECTION G 1 2 P3 P1 2 POSITION +10 -9 P2 P1 P3 3 POSITION H 2 1 +10 www.carlingtech.com 73 LP-Series Illuminated Indicators - Introduction LP-Series LP-Series ILLUMINATED INDICATORS The LP-Series Illuminated Indicators are the perfect complement to the aesthetics, reliability and performance of our L-Series rocker switches. As a critical safety feature, the illumination alerts the operator of essential system functions or malfunctions, such as: Oil Pressure, High Temperature, Transmission or other fluid levels, Parking Brake or General System confirmations. The L-Series styling assures seamless integration into most any dashboard panel. Product Highlights: Typical Applications: Š Vibration, Shock, and Thermoshock Resistant Š On/Off-Highway Equipment Š 12 or 24 Volts Š Agricultural Equipment Š Laser Etched or Lens Illumination Š Construction Equipment Š IP67 Sealing 74 www.carlingtech.com LP-Series Illuminated Indicators - General Specifications Electrical Environmental Terminals Brass or copper/silver plate Environmental IP67, representing an index of 3/16” (4.76mm) & 1/4” (6.3mm) protection as applied to electrical Quick Connect terminations equipment in accordance with IEC standard. 529, BS 5490, DIN 400 50 & Lighted Incandescent - rated 10,000 hours NFC 20 010. LED - rated 100,000 hours 1/2 life Corrosion Resistance Mixed Flowing Gas MFG Class III (LED is internally ballasted for per ASTM B-827 & B-845, Method voltages to 24VDC) H, with 3 years exposure. Operating Temperature -40°C to +85°C Vibration 1 Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 204D Test Physical Condition A 0.06 DA or 10G’s 10- Seals Insert, base & bracket are sealed. 500 Hz. Tested with VCH connector. Base Nylon 66 GF rated to 85°C with a Test criteria - No loss of circuit flammability rating of 94VO. during test and pre and post test Insert Polycarbonate rated at 100°C. contact resistance. Connector Nylon 66 rated at 85°C. Polarized Vibration 2 Resonance search Markings Over 1000 pad printed or laser 24-50 Hz 0.40 DA etched legends available 50-2000 ±10 G’s peak Bracket Nylon 66 GF rated to 85°C Results Horizontal Axis 3-5 G’s max. Random 24 Hz 0.06 PSD-Gsq/Hz Mounting Specifications 60 Hz 0.50 .867 [22.02] 100 Hz 0.50 1.970 200 Hz 0.025 2000 Hz 0.025 TEST CUT HOLE IN No loss of circuit during test; <10µ 1.734 [44.04] ACTUAL .260 [6.60] MATERIAL .390 [9.91] 1.020 [25.91] chatter. Shock Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 213B, Test Condition K @ 30G’s. Tested with MOUNTING HOLE Panel Thickness Range VCH connector. Test criteria - .100 [2.54] Acceptable Panel Thickness No loss of circuit during test, pre, .030 to .156 (.76mm to 3.96mm) 2.265 [57.53] Recommended: and post test contact resistance. .030, .062, .093, .125 and .156 3.055 [77.60] Salt Spray Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 101D, Test Condition A, 48 Hrs. Thermal Shock Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 107F, Test .230 X .031 T1 [5.84 X .79] Condition A, -55°C to 85°C. Test BAT T2 criteria - pre and post test contact OUTPUT T3 (LOAD) GROUND PADDLE STYLE ACTUATOR resistance. Moisture Resistance Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 106F, Test Criteria - pre and post test contact Q.C. SELECTION GUIDE 1.300 [33.02] WIRE GAGE resistance. COMPANY PACKARD .344 [8.74] 2 SERIES PART NO. AWG MM 12084590 12 3.0 1.570 [39.88] PACKARD 12052224 12 3.0 METRI-PACK 12015870 16-14 2.0-1.0 630 SERIES 12015869 20-18 1.0-.80 TIN PLATED 1.340 [34.04] 1.060 [26.92] BRASS 12020035 22-18 (2 REQ'D) .80.-.50 (2 REQ'D) 12052222 20-22 .50-.35 *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 75 LP-Series Illuminated Indicators - Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications LP 1 H R R 5 9 A A Y2 1 DU 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Legend 1 Legend Legend 2 Series Termination Illumination Lamp Lamp Bracket Insert Style Style Color Color Orientation 1, 2 7 INSERT COLOR 1 SERIES LP L-Series Illumination Plug 9 Painted Black - Laser Etch A Clear (Transparent) B White (Translucent) 3 2 TERMINATION C Red (Translucent) 1 .250 (8.35) x .032 (0.51) Quick Connect D Amber (Translucent) 3 .187 (4.75) x .032 (0.51) Quick Connect E Green (Translucent) F Blue (Translucent) 3 ILLUMINATION LAMPS ILLUMINATION LAMP WIRED TO TERMINALS 8, 9 STYLE (same coding for both selections) A 1 – 10 (+) 9 (–) Z Not Painted (used with Insert Colors A-F) B 1 – 10 (+) 9 (–) 5 Clear Laser Etch Background Color (used with Insert Color 9) 2 – 12 (+) 11 (–) A White Laser Etch Background Color (used with Insert Color 9) C 1 – 10 (+) 9 (–) 2 – 12 (+) 9 (–) E 1 & 2 Parallel 10 (+) 9 (–) 1 10 LEGEND OVER LAMP H 1 & 2 Series 10 (+) 9 (–) 00 No legend __ Laser Etched or Body Legends LAMP 1 LOCATED ABOVE TERMINALS 9 & 10 END OF BRACKET. For legend options, visit us at carlingtech.com LAMP 2 LOCATED ABOVE TERMINALS 11 & 12 END OF BRACKET. POSITIVE (+) AND NEGATIVE (–) SYMBOLS APPLY TO LED LAMPS ONLY. 11 LEGEND ORIENTATION 0 No legend 2 4,5 LAMP (same coding for both selections) 1 Orientation 1 2 Orientation 2 Selection 4: specifies lamp 1 located above terminals 10 (+) & 9 (-). 3 Orientation 3 Selection 5: specifies lamp 2 located above terminals 12 (+) & 11 (-). 4 Orientation 4 No lamp 0 (position 5 only) 4F Incandescent 4 3V 5 6V 6 12V 7 18V 8 24V MC MA LED Amber Green Red MA 2VDC L F R MC 4F100 6VDC M G S MA3MC MA1MC 12VDC N H T 24VDC P J V 2 12 LEGEND OVER LAMP 00 No legend 6 BRACKET COLOR __ Laser Etched or Body Legends 5 Black For legend options, visit us at carlingtech.com Notes: 1 To order separately, specify LPC and selection 7 code. Ex LPC-9 2 For LEDs, insert color must be clear, white or match color of LED. 3 For connector, specify part number LC2-01 (.187 tabs), LC3-01 (.250 tabs). 1.970 [50.04] [ ] 1.020 25.91 POS 3 POS 2 POS 1 1.450 [36.83] .250 x .032 [ ] .280 7.11 [6.35] [.81] [ ] .855 21.72 76 www.carlingtech.com FULL-SIZED ROCKERS Carling’s Full-sized Rocker Switches range from 3 to 20 amp illuminated and non-illuminated, one to four pole, with many styles of solid colored, translucent rockers. Illumination options include LED, neon, and incandescent lamps. SELECTOR GUIDE TIG / LTIG / TIH / LTIH / TIL S-Series / LTIL / TII / LS 1, 2, 3, 4 1, 2 Poles up to up to 15A 125VAC Ratings 10A 28VDC 10A 250VAC rocker, paddle bezel-less rocker Actuator .830” x 1.450” [21.08mm x 36.83mm] Mounting Hole .787” x 1.575” snap-in, keyed snap-in mount Specifications screw mount .187 tab solder lug .250 tabs .110 Tabs Termination screw terms wire leads incandescent, neon LED Illumination UL, CSA, VDE n/a Approvals *Options and approvals shown may apply to specific construction combinations only, consult factory for clarification. Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specifications without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 77 Tippette Switches (TIG,TIH,TII & LTIL,LTIG) - Introduction Tippette Tippette FULL SIZED ROCKER SWITCHES The Tippette Series is a traditionally styled rocker switch, available in sealed or unsealed versions. These switches are appropriate for use in general purpose applications which may or may not require a modicum of environmental protection. The Tippette Series is available in both illuminated and non-illuminated versions and features a wide variety of circuits, actuator styles and bracket options. This versatile offering includes international agency certifications and ratings to 26 amps for select circuits. Product Highlights: • Ratings Up to 26 Amps 250 VAC • Illuminated or Non-Illuminated • Multiple Termination, Mounting and Rocker Options Typical Applications: • General Purpose Applications • Commercial Food Equipment • Recreational Vehicles Electrical Physical Contact Rating 15 amps, 125 VAC Lighted Incandescent - rated 10,000 hours 10 amps, 250 VAC Neon - rated 25,000 hours 3/4 HP 125-250 VAC Seals Bracket - Actuator WBL/MBL 15 amps, 12-30 VDC optional external gasket panel seal Life 25,000 cycles circuit dependent Base Phenolic (150°C) 50,000 cycles circuit dependent Rocker/Bracket Nylon 66 (105°C) consult factory for applicable circuits. Contacts Fine silver, silver cad-oxide Mechanical Terminals Brass or copper/silver plate Endurance 100,000 cycles minimum 1/4” (6.3mm) Quick Connect terminations standard. Solder lug - Brass Tin Plated Wire Lead 16 gauge standard 105°C Mounting 600VAC 1.190 [30.22] Screw Terminals - Brass .680 [17.27] MOUNTING HOLE Agency Certifications (Nylon Snap-in Brackets) .830 [21.08] Panel Thickness: .040 min. - .250 max. 55˚ - 4 places Select circuits and constructions with VDE/IEC approvals 1.450 [36.83] are available. Consult factory *Angled corners are suggested for optimum fit. Standard rectangular cutout is acceptable. *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. 78 www.carlingtech.com TIG/TIH/TII & LTIL/LTIG-Series Rocker & Paddle Switches - Ordering Schemes TIGA51 6M BL MBL 1 2 3 4 Base Part Number Actuator Style Actuator Color Bracket 8,11 7 10 9 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES/POLES / CIRCUITRY / RATING / TERMINATION 3 ACTUATOR COLOR 10A 250VAC, 15A 125VAC, 3/4 HP 125-250VAC, 15A 6-28VDC BL Black WH White RD Red 2 Single Pole in Double Pole base Double Pole solder .250 screw wire solder .250 screw wire 9 lug tab term. leads lug tab term. leads 4 BRACKET STYLE 5 TIGA50 TIGA51 TIGA54 TIGA55 On-None-Off TIGK50 TIGK51 TIGK54 TIGK55 A Screw Mount 5,12 TIGA5A TIGA5B TIGA5E TIGA5F (On)-None-Off TIGK5A TIGK5B TIGK5E TIGK5F B Screw Mount 5 TIGA5L TIGA5M TIGA5S TIGA5T On-None-(Off) TIGK5L TIGK5M TIGK5S TIGK5T C Screw Mount 5 TIGB50 TIGB51 TIGB54 TIGB55 On-None-On TIGL50 TIGL51 TIGL54 TIGL55 H Screw Mount TIGB5A TIGB5B TIGB5E TIGB5F On-None-(On) TIGL5A TIGL5B TIGL5E TIGL5F NBL Nylon Black 4 TIGC50 TIGC51 TIGC54 TIGC55 On-Off-On TIGM50 TIGM51 TIGM54 TIGM55 WBL Water shedding Black 4,6 TIGC5A TIGC5B TIGC5E TIGC5F On-Off-(On) TIGM5A TIGM5B TIGM5E TIGM5F MBL Marine Style Black 5 TIGC5L TIGC5M TIGC5S TIGC5T (On)-Off-(On) TIGM5L TIGM5M TIGM5S TIGM5T FN Metal Snap-In 5 Three Pole Four Pole FN BLK Black Metal Snap-In 5 solder .250 screw wire solder .250 screw wire FN SS Stainless Steel Snap-In 5 lug tab term. leads lug tab term. leads FW Wide Stainless Steel Snap-In TIHK50 TIHK51 TIHK54 TIHK55 On-None-Off TIIK50 TIIK51 TIIK54 TIIK55 TIHK5A TIHK5B TIHK5E TIHK5F (On)-None-Off TIIK5A TIIK5B TIIK5E TIIK5F Notes: TIHK5L TIHK5M TIHK5S TIHK5T On-None-(Off) TIIK5L TIIK5M TIIK5S TIIK5T 1 NBL, FN, & FW brackets only. TIHL50 TIHL51 TIHL54 TIHL55 On-None-On TIIL50 TIIL51 TIIL54 TIIL55 2 For single pole switch in a single pole base, specify TIL TIHL5A TIHL5B TIHL5E TIHL5F On-None-(On) TIIL5A TIIL5B TIIL5E TIIL5F with single pole circuitry/rating/termination. TIHM50 TIHM51 TIHM54 TIHM55 On-Off-On TIIM50 TIIM51 TIIM54 TIIM55 3 NBL, WBL, & MBL brackets only. With 6M actuator, TIHM5A TIHM5B TIHM5E TIHM5F On-Off-(On) TIIM5A TIIM5B TIIM5E TIIM5F brackets also will be matte finish. TIHM5L TIHM5M TIHM5S TIHM5T (On)-Off-(On) TIIM5L TIIM5M TIIM5S TIIM5T 4 6M & 6S actuators only VDE APPROVED 5 Not available with 6M & 6S actuators. 10A 250VAC, 15A 125VAC, 12(6)A 250VAC T85 6 Consists of WBL bracket, neoprene seal, and dummy 2 rivets at open holes. Consult factory for agency approval Single Pole in Double Pole base Double Pole status. solder .250 wire solder .250 wire 7 All ratings are appropriate for usage in low voltage lug tab lead lug tab lead applications. TIGA90 TIGA91 TIGA95 On-None-Off TIGK90 TIGK91 TIGK95 8 For additional special circuits, see catalog. TIGB90 TIGB91 TIGB95 On-None-On TIGL90 TIGL91 TIGL95 9 Custom colors are available, consult factory. TIGC90 TIGC91 TIGC95 On-Off-On TIGM90 TIGM91 TIGM95 10 .187 tab and PC terminations are also available. Consult factory for catalog number callout. Additional ratings up to 20A 125-277VAC, 1 1/2HP 125 VAC, 2HP 250VAC are available. 11 ( ) momentary Consult factory for specifics. 12 Not available with WBL or MBL style brackets. 13 Available with bracket A, C or H only. 14 Not available with MBL, WBL or H brackets. Can be supplied as a double rocker to control separate poles of 2 ACTUATOR STYLE a TIG,TIH or TII switch. Consult factory for details. 12 3 1S Angular/Smooth Face Gloss 6M Curved/Smooth Face Matte 12 3 1C Angular/Cross Serrations Gloss 6S Curved/Smooth Face Gloss 12 1 1F Flatted/Smooth Face Gloss 7S Rounded Paddle/Smooth Face Gloss 1,12 14 1L Angular/Longline Serrations Gloss 7N Witch’s Hat/Narrow 14 14 2L Long Smooth/Narrow 7P Witch’s Hat/Wide LTILA51 6M BL RC MBL 12V 2 3 4 5 6 1 Base Part Number Actuator Style Actuator Color Lens Color Bracket Lamp Voltage 4 12 10 2 ACTUATOR STYLE 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / POLES / ILLUMINATION / CIRCUITRY / RATING / 1 14 1S Angular/Smooth Face Gloss TERMINATION 1 1C Angular/Cross Serrations Gloss 10A 250VAC, 15A 125VAC, 3/4 HP 125-250VAC, 15A 15-28VDC 1 1L Angular/Longline Serrations Gloss illuminated Single Pole in Double Pole base illuminated Double Pole 3 6M Curved/Smooth Face Matte solder .250 screw wire solder .250 screw wire 3 6S Curved/Smooth Face Gloss lug tab term. leads lug tab term leads 2 7S Rounded Paddle/Smooth Face Gloss LTILA50 LTILA51 LTILA54 LTILA55 On-None-Off LTIGK50 LTIGK51 LTIGK54 LTIGK55 LTILA5A LTILA5B LTILA5E LTILA5F (On)-None-Off LTIGK5A LTIGK5B LTIGK5E LTIGK5F LTILA5L LTILA5M LTILA5S LTILA5T On-None-(Off) LTIGK5L LTIGK5M LTIGK5S LTIGK5T 11 3 ACTUATOR COLOR LTILB50 LTILB51 LTILB54 LTILB55 On-None-On LTIGL50 LTIGL51 LTIGL54 LTIGL55 BL Black WH White RD Red LTILB5A LTILB5B LTILB5E LTILB5F On-None-(On) LTIGL5A LTIGL5B LTIGL5E LTIGL5F LTILC50 LTILC51 LTILC54 LTILC55 On-Off-On LTIGM50 LTIGM51 LTIGM54 LTIGM55 LTILC5A LTILC5B LTILC5E LTILC5F On-Off-(On) LTIGM5A LTIGM5B LTIGM5E LTIGM5F 13 4 LENS COLOR LTILC5L LTILC5M LTILC5S LTILC5T (On)-Off-(On) LTIGM5L LTIGM5M LTIGM5S LTIGM5T 7 AM Amber RC Red GN Green Additional ratings up to 12A 250VAC, 17A 125 VAC, 3/4 HP 125 VAC, 1HP 250VAC are available. 7 LU Blue CL Clear WH White Consult factory for specifics. Three pole switch is also available: Substitute H for fourth digit of part number. ex. LTIHK51 11 5 BRACKET STYLE Notes: NBL Nylon Black 1 NBL, FN, & FW brackets only. Double pole circuits provided with 3 pole base. 5 WBL Water shedding Black 2 LTIL-Series with NBL, FN, & FW brackets only. 5,8 MBL Marine Style Black 3 NBL, WBL, & MBL brackets only. With 6M actuator, bracket will also be matte finish. 4,6 FN Metal Snap-In 4 1S, 1C, 1L & 7S with NBL bracket only available with LTIL-Series. 4,6 FN BLK Black Metal Snap-In 5 6M, 6S actuators only. 4,6 FN SS Stainless Steel Snap-In 6 Not available with 6M and 6S actuators. 7 Not recommended with neon lamps. 8 Consists of WBL bracket, neoprene seal, dummy rivets at open holes. Consult factory for agency approval status. 9 Not recommended with blue or green lenses. 6 LAMP VOLTAGE 9 10 All ratings are appropriate for usage in low voltage applications. neon 11 Custom colors and additional bracket styles are available, consult factory. 125N 125 volt 250N 250 volt 12 ( ) - momentary incandescent 13 All double throw circuits supplied with two lenses. To specify two different lens colors, specify second color, after first color. 6V 6 volt 12V 12 volt 18V 18 volt (ex. LTIGM51-6S-BL-RC/GN-WBL-12V) 24V 24 volt 28V 28 volt 14 .187 tab and PC terminations are also available. Consult factory for catalog number callout. www.carlingtech.com 79 Tippette Rocker & Bracket Styles - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] 1C 1L 1S CROSS-LINE W/ONE LENS LONG-LINE W/ONE LENS SMOOTH W/ONE LENS 1.700[43.18] 1.700[43.18] 1.700[43.18] .960[24.38] .650[16.51] .960[24.38] .418[10.62] 1.069[27.15] 1.069[27.15] ±.020 1.440[36.58] .422[10.72] ±.020 1.440[36.58] .312[7.92] .422[10.72] WITH.250 TAB WITH SOLDER LUG WITH.250 TAB TERMINALS TERMINAL TERMINALS AND NBL BRACKET AND NBL BRACKET AND NBL BRACKET 1F 7S 6M, 6S FLATTED STYLE NO LENS TOGGLE-STYLE W/ONE LENS CURVED W/ONE LENS 1.700[43.18] .960[24.38] .900[22.86] .650[16.51] .900[22.86] 1.570[39.88] .418[10.62] .356[9.04] 1.570[39.88] .060[1.52] .828[21.03] .060[1.52] 1.080[27.43] 1.080[27.43] 1.069[27.15] ±.020 ±.020 1.440[36.58] .422[10.72] .422[10.72] .312[7.92] WITH.250 TAB WITH SOLDER LUG WITH.250 TAB TERMINALS TERMINALS TERMINALS AND FN BRACKET AND NBL BRACKET AND FN BRACKET 80 www.carlingtech.com Tippette Actuator Styles & Special Circuits - Dimensional Specifications .075[1.91] DIA .055[1.40] DIA .650[16.51] .125[3.18] DIA .394[10.00] .437[11.09] .330[8.38] 1.069[27.15] .372[9.45] .187[4.74] .187[4.74] .250[6.35] .392[9.95] SOLDER LUG .250 TAB (Q.C.) .187 TAB (Q.C.) TERMINAL TYPE .820[20.82] #6-32NC-2 .187[4.75] 6.000[152.40] THREAD .141[3.58] .370[9.39] .187[4.75] .500[12.70] 1.069[27.15] .286[7.26] .350[8.89] SCREW PRINTED 1.190[30.22] WIRE LEAD .680[17.27] (ASSEMBLED) CIRCUIT MOUNTING HOLE .490[22.86] .075[1.905] (Nylon Snap-in Brackets) * Angled corners are .830[21.08] IEC APPROVED CONSTRUCTION Panel Thickness: suggested for optimum fit. .030 min. - .250 max. (TIG ONLY) Standard rectangular Switch should be mounted at 90˚ cutout is acceptable. 55˚ for maximum water shedding 4 plcs* 1.450[36.83] (45˚ to 90˚ acceptable) .650[16.51] .650[16.51] .650[16.51] 1.224[31.08] .957[24.30] 1.224[31.08] .957[24.30] 1.224[31.08] .957[24.30] 1L 1C 1S TIL,TIG,TIH,TII TIL,TIG,TIH,TII TIL,TIG,TIH,TII .312[7.92] .650[16.51] .957[24.30] 1.224[31.08] 1.224[31.08] .957[24.30] 1.024[26.00] .300[7.62] 6S 1.224[31.08] 1F 2L TIG TIG, TII TIL,TIG,TIH,TII .630[16.00] .430[10.90] .650[16.51] .250[6.35] 1.035[26.28] .996[25.30] 1.224[31.08] .880[22.40] .880[22.4] 7S 7N 7P TIG TIG TIG SPECIAL CIRCUITS FOR TIPPETTE ROCKER SWITCHES Circuit Position 1 Position 2 Position 3 Progressive Two Circuit GG BOTH CIRCUITS ON ONE CIRCUIT ON OFF GG BOTH CIRCUITS (ON) ONE CIRCUIT ON OFF Single Pole Triple Throw GE ON ON ON Two Circuit GH CIRCUIT 1 ON BOTH CIRCUITS ON CIRCUIT 2 ON GP CIRCUIT 2 ON CIRCUIT 1 ON OFF Reversing Double Pole Double Throw GO ON OFF ON GX ON NONE ON ( ) Indicates momentary function. www.carlingtech.com 81 Tippette Mounting Bracket Styles - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] 1.190[30.22] # 6-32NC-2 TAP .680[17.27] .156[3.96] DIA .156[3.96] DIA .070[1.77] .830[21.08] 55˚ 4 plcs* .158[4.01] DIA 1.450[36.83] TAPPED HOLE CLEARANCE HOLE MOUNTING HOLE Standard with Standard with (Nylon Snap-in Brackets) C Bracket A & B Brackets Panel Thickness: .030 min. - .250 max. * Angled corners are suggested for optimum fit. Standard rectangular cutout is acceptable. TIL TIG TII TIH 1.940[49.27] 1.940[49.27] 1.892[48.06] 1.960[49.78] .078[1.98] .078[1.98] .078[1.98] .078[1.98] 1.625[41.27] 1.625[41.27] 1.625[41.27] 1.625[41.27] A A A A TIG TII TIL TIH 2.093[53.16] 2.090[53.08] .156[3.96] .156[3.96] 1.625[41.27] 1.625[41.27] B B TIL TII, TIG 1.875[47.62] 1.940[49.27] 2.062[52.37] .426[10.82] .426[10.82] .437[11.09] 1.625[41.27] 1.625[41.27] 1.625[41.27] CX C C TIL TIG TIH, TII 1.950[49.53] 1.700[43.18] GCP GMP 1.350[34.29] GLOSS FINISH MATTE FINISH .960[24.38] HOLE PLUG FOR TIL, TIG, TIH & TII 1.625[41.27] 1.570[39.88] .430[10.92] H TIG NARROW WIDE MARINE / STD / WATERSHEDDING 1.750[44.45] 1.570[39.87] 1.700[43.18] 1.126[28.60] .900[22.86] .960[24.38] MBL, NBL, WBL FN FW TIG TIL, TIG, TIH, TII TIL, TIG, TIH, TII BLACK NYLON, SNAP-IN METAL, SNAP-IN METAL, SNAP-IN 82 www.carlingtech.com LS-Series Rocker Switches - Introduction LS-Series LS-Series ROCKER SWITCHES The LS-Series Softspot illuminated rocker switches feature a three-color high brightness light sequence, from a single lamp. These switches are designed with a standard nylon snap-in bracket and “Drip-Dry” construction that protects the front panel from dust and moisture. Product Highlights: Typical Applications: • Water Resistant Construction • Marine • Independent or Dependent Illumination• • Transportation • Up to 3 Different Colors Under a Single Lens • Multiple Termination Options www.carlingtech.com 83 LS-Series Rocker Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength Mechanical Life 1000V - live to dead metal parts 100,000 cycles Electrical Life Operating Temperature 50,000 cycles - maintained 0°F to 150°F (-17.8°C to +65.6°C) 25,000 cycles - momentary LS1511 13 BL BL 012 1 2 3 4 5 Base Part Number Lighting Actuator Base Color Lamp Voltage Sequence Color 1,2 4 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / POLES / ILLUMINATION / 2 LIGHTING SEQUENCE 3 ACTUATOR COLOR 3 CIRCUITRY / RATING / TERMINATION position 1 position 2 position 3 BL Black 10A 250VAC, 15A 125VAC, 3/4 HP 125-250VAC, 15A 15-28VDC 01 red red red WH White Single Pole Solder Lug .250 Tab QC Screw Terms Wire Leads 02 amber amber amber On-None-Off LS1510 LS1511 LS1514 LS1515 03 green green green 4 On-None-(Off) LS1520 LS1521 LS1524 LS1525 10 red --- none 4 BASE COLOR (On)-None-Off LS1530 LS1531 LS1534 LS1535 11 red clear red BL Black On-None-On LS1540 LS1541 LS1544 LS1545 12 red clear amber WH White On-None-(On) LS1550 LS1551 LS1554 LS1555 13 red clear green On-Off-On LS1560 LS1561 LS1564 LS1565 14 red clear blue On--Off-(On) LS1570 LS1571 LS1574 LS1575 15 red clear clear 2 5 LAMP VOLTAGE (On)-Off-(On) LS1580 LS1581 LS1584 LS1585 20 amber --- none incandescent 21 amber clear red 6V 6 volt 22 amber clear amber 12V 12 volt 23 amber clear green 18V 18 volt 24 amber clear blue 24V 24 volt 25 amber clear clear 28V 28 volt 30 green --- none 31 green clear red neon 32 green clear amber 125N 125 volt neon 33 green clear green 250N 250 volt neon 34 green clear blue 35 green clear clear 40 blue --- none 41 blue clear red 42 blue clear amber 43 blue clear green 44 blue clear blue Notes: 45 blue clear clear 1 Independent lamp is standard. Dependent lamp with ON-OFF function 50 clear --- none (including momentary) is available with Lighting Sequences 10, 20, 30, 40 and 50. 51 clear clear red (No light in OFF position.) 52 clear clear amber 2 Green and blue not recommended with 125 volt or 250 volt neon lamps. 53 clear clear green 3 Additional terminations available. Consult factory. 54 clear clear blue 4 Custom colors available. Consult factory. 55 clear clear clear ( ) Indicates momentary function. .075[1.91] DIA .055[1.40] DIA .125[3.18] DIA 1.700[43.18] 1.190[30.22] .394[10.00] .437[11.09] .330[8.38] .680[17.27] .187[4.74] .187[4.74] .960[24.38] .250[6.35] .830[21.08] SOLDER LUG .250 TAB (Q.C.) .187 TAB (Q.C.) 55˚ 4 plcs* TERMINAL TYPE .150[3.81] DIA 1.450[36.83] #6-32NC-2 .187[4.75] 6.000[152.40] THREAD MOUNTING HOLE .141[3.58] (Nylon Snap-in Brackets) Panel Thickness: .370[9.39] .040 min. - .250 max. .187[4.75] .372[9.45] .500[12.70] Switch should be mounted at 90˚ for 1.084[27.53] maximum water shedding .350[8.89] (45˚ to 90˚ acceptable) .286[7.26] SCREW PRINTED WIRE LEAD .422[10.72] (ASSEMBLED) CIRCUIT * Angled corners are suggested for optimum fit. Standard rectangular cutout is acceptable. *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. 84 www.carlingtech.com S-Series Rocker Switches - Introduction S-Series S-Series ROCKER SWITCHES S-Series rocker switches are designed for use in the enclosed cabs of today’s trucks, with special focus afforded to the vehicle operator. With features including abbreviated travel ½ throw actuation, ergonomic rockers, illumination in up to three detent switch positions, and a non-teasable snap action circuit, these switches provide the driver with easily recognizable and simple to operate controls. Designers will appreciate the 10A, 28VDC rating, space saving compact envelope, clean bezel-less design, integrated low insertion force connector and polarized switch base for quick installation. Most any illumination and switch circuitry is easily accommodated with the S-Series 10 terminal base. Product Highlights: Typical Applications: • Abbreviated travel ½ throw actuation • On-Highway Transportation Equipment • Ergonomic rockers • Agricultural Equipment • Recognizable and simple to operate controls • Construction Equipment • Compact Design www.carlingtech.com 85 S-Series Rocker Switches - General Specifications Electrical Environmental Contact Rating 10A@ 28VDC Operating Temperature -40°C to +85°C Dielectric Strength 1500 Volts RMS between pole to Vibration Per IEC 68-2.6 test Fc and pole 68-2.47 Test Criteria - no noise Insulation Resistance 50 Megaohms or contact chatter below 10ms. Contact Resistance 10 milliohms max. @ 4VDC Cold Test Per IEC 68-2-1 -40°C for 72 hours Contact Bounce <20 milliseconds Test Criteria - pre & post test Life 100,000 cycles maintained contact resistance. circuit,50,000 cycles momentary Dry Heat Test Criteria Per IEC 68-2-2 + 85°C for 72 hours circuit at rated voltage and Test Criteria - no loss of circuit current gold plated during test, pre & post test contact Circuitry SP, DP 2 & 3 position, resistance. 1/2 or full throw Handling Shock Drop from height of 1 meter, 3 times, Terminals .110 Tabs, Silver Plated Brass 4 sides. Test criteria - No loss of circuit during test, pre & post test contact resistance. Mechanical Thermal Shock Per IEC 68-2-14, -40°C to +85°C. Endurance 250,000 cycles minimum Test criteria - pre & post test contact resistance. Physical Mounting Specifications Lighted LED - rated 100,000 hours 1/2 Snap in Mount 40mm x 20mm keyed hole (see life (LED is internally ballasted dimensional specifications for for voltages to 24VDC.) details.) Bracket Acetal Base Nylon 66 GF Rocker Polycarbonate Weight 25 gms max. Connector Amp/Tyco MCP 2.8 receptacle housing P/N 1418994-1 mates with Amp/Tyco MCP 2.8 flat type receptacle. Based on wire size, choose P/N below: 1-968880-1 20-24 awg wire 1-968849-1 17-20 awg wire 1-968851-1 13.5-17 awg wire Actuator Travel (Angular Displacement) 2 position (1/2 throw) 12° 3 position (full throw) 12° from center *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. 86 www.carlingtech.com S-Series Rocker Switches - Ordering Scheme S 18 A A R F 0 4 M Z Z Z 00 1 00 00 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Legend 2 Legend 3 Series Circuit Rating Illumination Lamp 1 Lamp 2 Lamp 3 Bracket Actuator Legend Legend Legend Legend 1 Legend Color Color Color 1 Color 2 Color 3 Orientation 1 SERIES 5,6,7 LAMP (SAME CODING FOR ALL 3 SELECTIONS) S Selection 5: specifies lamp 1 located above terminals 1 (+) & 2 (-). Selection 6: specifies lamp 2 located in center of rocker. Selection 7: specifies lamp 3 located above terminals 9 (+) & 10 (-). 2 CIRCUIT Terminal Connections as viewed ( ) - momentary No lamp 0 from bottom of switch: LED Red Orange Yellow Green 1 - - 2 SP - single pole uses terminals 12VDC A C E H 3, 5 & 7. 24VDC B D F J 3 - - 4 DP - double pole uses terminals 3, 5, 7 & 4, 6, 8. 5 - - 6 8 BRACKET COLOR 7 - - 8 1 Black 9 - - 10 4 Dark Carbon Position: 1 2 3 SP DP 5 & 7, 6 & 8 Connected Terminals 3 & 5, 4 & 6 16 26 ON OFF ON 9 ACTUATOR 18 28 (ON) OFF (ON) Black Titan Gray Dark Carbon SPECIAL CIRCUITS Standard Rocker, Laser Etched M N R 31 (6 & 8) 4, 5, 6, 7 OFF 1 41 51 ON OFF NONE 1 42 52 (ON) OFF NONE 1 43 53 (ON) 3 & 5 NONE 10, 11, 12 LEGEND COLOR 1 44 54 ON 3 & 5 NONE Z No Legend 45 55 (ON) OFF ON 1 Clear 46 56 NONE 5 & 7 ON 47 57 NONE 5 & 7 (ON) 75 (5 & 7, 3 & 6) 5 & 7, 4 & 6 (3 & 5, 4 & 6) 2 5 98 (5 & 7, 2 & 6) 5 & 7, 4 & 6 (5 & 9, 4 & 6) 13 LEGEND 1 00 No Legend 3 RATING ORIENTATION 1 1 0.4VA 28VDC Resistive 14 LEGEND ORIENTATION 3 A 10.5mA 1.5A 28VDC, 0 No legend 5A 28V 50A Inrush Lamp Load 1 Orientation 1 4 B 3.5A 28VDC, 18A Inrush 2 Orientation 2 3 C 10mA 10A 28VDC 3 Orientation 3 3 D 20mA 10A 14VDC 4 Orientation 4 M22ZA8-13H-10000 ORIENTATION ORIENTATION 4 2 M22ZA8-23H-10000 4 ILLUMINATION Lamps Illumination Type Lamp wired to Terminals S NONE INDEPENDENT – A 1 INDEPENDENT 1 (+) 2 (–) ORIENTATION 3 C 1 INDEPENDENT 1 (+) 2 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 9 (+) 2 (–) D 1 INDEPENDENT 1 (+) 2 (–) 6 2 INDEPENDENT 9 (+) 10 (–) 15,16 LEGEND 2,3 E 1 & 3 INDEPENDENT 1 (+) 2 (–) 00 No legend PARALLEL F 1 INDEPENDENT 1 (+) 10 (–) Notes: SNAP 1 Indicates 1/2 travel for actuator. G 1 & 2 INDEPENDENT 1 (+) 10 (–) 2 Snap-Action Contact Mechanism DEPENDENT 9 (+) 2 (–) 3 Not available with circuit 98. H 1 & 2 INDEPENDENT 1 (+) 2 (–) 4 Available with circuit 98 only. DEPENDENT 9 (+) 10 (–) 5 Located over T1-2. 6 Legend 2 located in center of rocker, Legend 3 located over T9-10. J 1, 2 & 3 INDEPENDENT 1 (+) 2 (–) Legend 2 options are limited due to a very small marking area. DEPENDENT 5 (+) 10 (–) Consult factory for specifics. INDEPENDENT 1 (+) 2 (–) K 1 & 2 INDEPENDENT 1 (+) 2 (–) INDEPENDENT 9 (+) 10 (–) 3.3K RESISTOR IN PARALLEL www.carlingtech.com 87 S-Series Rocker Switches - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] MATES WITH TYCO/AMP MCP CONNECTOR 1418994-1 1.529 [38.84] .787 [19.99] .100 .83 [2.54] [21.1] PANEL KEY .048 R.016 .220 [1.22] [.41] [5.59] (8 PLACES) .032 [.81] R.079 1.575 [2.01] [40.01] (4 PLACES) PANEL THICKNESS: 2.5±0.1mm PANEL OPENING CLEARANCE: ±5° SCALE 2.000 POS 0 POS 2 POS 1 R.833±.015 [21.15±0.38] 12° 12° SWING RADIUS .82 [20.8] .790 [20.07] 1.23 [31.2] 1.60 .79 [40.6] [20.1] 88 www.carlingtech.com MID-SIZED ROCKERS Carling’s Mid-sized Rocker Switches range from 5 to 20 amp illuminated and non-illuminated, one and two poles, with many styles of solid colored, translucent rockers. Illumination options include LED, neon, and incandescent lamps. SELECTOR GUIDE T / LTA / TG / LTG / TLG / TTG RR / LRR R / LRA / RSC / RG / LRG 1, 2 1 1, 2 Poles up to up to up to 20A 125VAC 12A 125VAC 20A 125VAC Ratings 10A 250VAC 10A 250VAC 15A 250VAC rocker, lever, paddle, plunger, rocker rocker, paddle Actuator toggle (bat) .550” x 1.125” .480” x 1.072” ” [13.97mm x 28.57mm] .795 [12.19mm x 27.23mm] Mounting Hole 1.00” x 1.125” [20.2mm] .866” x 1.182” Specifications [25.4mm x 28.57mm] round snap-in mount [22mm x 30mm] snap-in mount snap-in mount .187 tab solder lug solder lug .250 tabs .187 tab Termination .250 tabs wire leads wire leads PC terms incandescent, neon incandescent, neon incandescent, neon Illumination UL, CSA UL, cUL UL, CSA, VDE Approvals *Options and approvals shown may apply to specific construction combinations only, consult factory for clarification. Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specifications without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 89 T-Series Rocker & Paddle Switches - Introduction T T-Series -Series SINGLE POLE ROCKER & PADDLE SWITCHES The predecessor to the Curvette series whose versatility has allowed it to stand the test of time. Traditional styling coupled with self cleaning contacts, integrated wire leads, a multitude of circuits, ratings, and actuator choices has made the TA/LTA-Series appeal to a wide range of markets. Product Highlights: Typical Applications: • Ratings Up To 20A • Appliance • Rocker, Paddle, Plunger or Door Interlock Actuators • HVAC • Integrated Wire Lead Construction • Food Service • Self-Cleaning Wiping Style Contacts • Transportation 90 www.carlingtech.com T-Series Rocker & Paddle Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength Mechanical Life UL/CSA: 100,000 cycles 1000V - live to dead metal parts Operating Temperature Electrical Life 32°F to 185°F (0°C to 85°C) 100,000 cycles TA201 T B B 1 2 3 4 Base Part Number Actuator Actuator Bezel Style Color Color/Style 4 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / CIRCUITRY / RATING / 2 ACTUATOR STYLE TERMINATION T Rocker PS Short Paddle 10A 250 VAC, 15A 125 VAC, 3/4 HP 125-250 VAC P Paddle Solder Lugs .250 Tabs Wire Leads Standard Base 5 ON-NONE-OFF TA200 TA201 TA205 3 ACTUATOR COLOR ON-NONE-ON TB200 TB201 TB205 B Black W White ON-OFF-ON TC200 TC201 TC205 5A 250 VAC, 10A 125 VAC, 1/2 HP 125-250 VAC 5 (ON)-NONE-OFF TA10A TA10B TA10F 4 BEZEL COLOR ON-NONE-(OFF) TA10L TA10M TA10T B Black W White ON-NONE-(ON) TB10A TB10B TB10F 1,2 T-SERIES WITH PLUNGER ACTUATOR Notes: 10A 250 VAC, 16A 125 VAC, 1/2 HP 125-250 VAC Imprinting is available. Consult factory. OFF-NONE-(ON) - TA25B-PLB-B TA25F-PLB-B 1 Optional plunger support option is available for applications requiring extensive lateral travel, consult factory for details. ON-NONE-(OFF) - - TA25T-PLB-B 2 Maintained circuit not available with TA22 and TA25 Series. T SERIES WITH MOMENTARY ROCKER ACTUATOR 3 .187 tab terminals also available. Consult factory for catalog number callout. 10A 250 VAC, 15A 125 VAC, 20A 125-250 VAC “H”, 3/4 HP 125-250 VAC 4 Additional ratings are available. Consult factory. (ON)-NONE-OFF - TA22B-TLB-B - 5 Additional colors are available. Consult factory. ON-NONE-(OFF) - TA22M-TLB-B - ( ) Indicates momentary function. .156[3.96] .055[1.40] DIA DIA .069[1.75] DIA 6.000[152.40] .220[5.59] .375[9.52] .390[9.77] .250[6.35] .050[1.27] .250[6.35] .250[6.35] .500[12.70] .187[4.74] SOLDER INTEGRATED WIRE LEAD .250 TAB (Q.C.) .187 TAB (Q.C.) LUG (no exposed conductors) .860[21.84] TERMINAL TYPE .550[13.97] .375[9.52] .250[6.35] 1.120[28.44] .544[13.81] .275[6.98] SHORT PADDLE 1.125[28.57] 1.156[29.36] .520[13.20] .047[1.19] .500[12.70] .453[11.50] MOUNTING HOLE Panel Thickness: .430[10.92] .020[.508] min. to OPERATING MOMENTARY PADDLE PLUNGER .250[6.35] max. POINT ROCKER *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 91 LTA-Series Single Pole Lighted Rocker Switches - Introduction LTA-Series LTA-Series SINGLE POLE LIGHTED ROCKER SWITCHES The illuminated predecessor to the Curvette series whose versatility has allowed it to stand the test of time. Traditional styling coupled with self cleaning contacts, integrated wire leads, and various actuator choices has made the LTA-Series appeal to a wide range of markets. Product Highlights: Typical Applications: • Neon or Incandescent Illumination • Appliance • Long Paddle, Short Paddle or Rocker Actuators • HVAC • Good for 125/250VAC or Low Voltage DC • Food Service Applications • Transportation • Integrated Wire Lead Construction 92 www.carlingtech.com LTA-Series Single Pole Lighted Rocker Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength Mechanical Life UL/CSA: 100,000 cycles 1000V - live to dead metal parts Operating Temperature 750V - across open contacts 32°F to 185°F (0°C to 85°C) Electrical Life 100,000 cycles LTA201 P R B -A / 125N 1 2 3 4 5 6 Base Part Number Actuator Actuator Bezel Lens Lamp Voltage Style Color Color/Style Color 1 1 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / CIRCUITRY / RATING / 4 BEZEL COLOR TERMINATION B Black W White 10A 250VAC; 15A 125VAC; 3/4 HP 125-250VAC Solder Lugs .250 Tabs .187 Tabs Wire Leads OFF-NONE-ON LTA200 LTA201 LTA203 LTA205 2,3 5 LENS COLOR Blank No Lens -G Green -A Amber -R Red 3 2 ACTUATOR STYLE -C Clear -LU Blue T Rocker PS Short Paddle P Paddle 2 6 LAMP VOLTAGE 006V 6V incandescent 024V 24V incandescent 1 3 ACTUATOR COLOR 012V 12V incandescent 125N 125V neon 4 A Amber B Black 018V 18V incandescent 250N 250V neon 4 C Clear W White R Red Notes: 2 G Green 1 Additional ratings and colors are available. Consult factory for details. 2 Neon lamps not recommended with green or blue rocker/lenses. 3 Lens color is specified only if actuator style is P or PS. If style is T (rocker), then leave position 5 blank. 4 Available with paddle (“P & PS”) style actuators only. .055[1.40] .156[3.96] DIA .069[1.75] DIA 6.000[152.40] DIA .375[9.52] .250[6.35] .500[12.70] .250[6.35] .250[6.35] .250[6.35] .187[4.74] .390[9.77] .050[1.27] INTEGRATED WIRE LEAD .250 TAB (Q.C.) SOLDER LUG .187 TAB (Q.C.) (no exposed conductors) TERMINAL TYPE .550[13.97] .860[21.84] .375[9.52] .520 [13.20] 1.125[28.57] .275[6.98] .890[22.60] .544[13.81] 1.120[28.44] PADDLE SHORT PADDLE MOUNTING HOLE Panel Thickness: .020[.508] min. to .250[6.35] max. *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 93 TG/LTG-Series Rocker Switches - Introduction TG/LTG-Series TG/LTG ROCKER SWITCHES The TG-Series Mid-Sized Tippette rocker switches are single or double pole and feature an all nylon double- insulated construction. These switches are designed with snap-in mounting for fast, low cost assembly. The illuminated version (LTG) is available with either a paddle or rocker actuator. These AC rated switches are also suitable for low-voltage DC applications assuring compatibility for a wide range of markets. Product Highlights: Typical Applications: • Single or Double Pole • Appliance • Gloss Finish Surfaces • HVAC • Illuminated or Non-Illuminated • Food Service • 20 Available Circuit Options • Transportation 94 www.carlingtech.com TG/LTG-Series Rocker Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength Mechanical Life UL/CSA: 100,000 cycles 1000V - live to dead metal parts Operating Temperature Electrical Life 32°F to 185°F (0°C to 85°C) 50,000 cycles - maintained 25,000 cycles - momentary LTG G O 50 1 T B B R / 125 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Base Part Number Circuit Center Rating Termination Actuator Actuator Base Color Lens Color Lamp Voltage Position Style Color 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES 6 ACTUATOR STYLE TG Double Pole, Non-Lighted P Paddle T Rocker LTG Double Pole with Indicator Lights 2 7 ACTUATOR COLOR 1 2 CIRCUIT B Black W White See Circuit Designation Chart 2 8 BASE COLOR B Black W White 3 CENTER POSITION C Center OFF, Three position O No Center OFF, Two position 3 9 LENS COLOR A Amber C Clear R Red 4 RATING 40 5A 250VAC, 10A 125VAC, 1/2HP 125-250VAC 41 5A 250VAC, 10A 125VAC 10 LAMP VOLTAGE 50 10A 250VAC, 15A 125VAC, 3/4HP 125-250VAC incandescent neon 51 10A 250VAC, 15A 125VAC 6V 6 volt 125N 125 volt neon 12V 12 volt 250N 250 volt neon 18V 18 volt 5 TERMINATION / FUNCTION 24V 24 volt Solder Lug .250 Tab QC .187 Tab QC Wire Leads 28V 28 volt On-None-Off 0 1 3 5 (On)-None-Off A B D F Notes: On-None-(Off) L M R T Imprinting is available. Consult factory. On-None-On 0 1 3 5 Panel Cut-Out Recommendations: For sheet metal panels, switch must enter panel in same On-None-(On) A B D F direction as the punch. (Burr on bottom.) Test cut hole in actual material. On-Off-On 0 1 3 5 1 TG available with circuits A, B, C, D, E, F ; LTG available with circuits G, H, I, J, M, N, P, Q, R, T, U, V, Y, Z. 2 Custom colors are available. Consult factory. 3 Specify lens color for LTG-Series only. ( ) Indicates momentary function. .055[1.40] DIA .156[3.96] DIA .069[1.75] DIA 6.000[152.40] .375[9.52] .250[6.35] .500[12.70] .250[6.35] .250[6.35] 1.155[29.33] .187[4.74] .865[21.97] INTEGRATED WIRE LEAD .250 TAB (Q.C.) SOLDER LUG .187 TAB (Q.C.) 1.240[31.50] .050[1.27] (no exposed conductors) TERMINAL TYPE .210[5.33] 1.125[28.57] .812[20.62] .520[13.20] 1.000[25.40] .375[9.52] 1.120[28.45] .994[25.24] PADDLE MOUNTING HOLE Panel Thickness: .030[.762] min. to .250[6.35] max. *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 95 TTG-Series Rocker Switches - Introduction TTG-Series TTG-Series ROCKER SWITCHES The TTG-Series Mid-Sized Tippette snap-in rocker switches consist of two single pole illuminated or non- illuminated switches in a common base. Each pole can have the same or different switch function. These switches are AC rated up to 20 amps and are also suitable for low-voltage DC applications, in a wide range of markets. Product Highlights: Typical Applications: • Independent or Dependent Illumination • Appliance • Ratings up to 20 Amps • HVAC • Diamond or Long Line Lens Options • Food Service • Self-Cleaning Wiping Style Contacts • Transportation 96 www.carlingtech.com TTG-Series Rocker Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength Mechanical Life UL/CSA: 100,000 cycles 1000V - live to dead metal parts Operating Temperature Electrical Life 32°F to 185°F (0°C to 85°C) 50,000 cycles - maintained 25,000 cycles - momentary TTG T TA 20 1 T B B 1 2 Base Part Number Circuit P B B R / 125N LTA 20 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Center Rating Termination Actuator Actuator Base Color Lens Color Lamp Voltage Position Style Color 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES 6 ACTUATOR STYLE PS Short Paddle TTG Two Single Pole switches in one base P Paddle T Rocker 1 3 2 CIRCUIT 7 ACTUATOR COLOR lighted 2 See Circuit Designation Chart unlighted A Amber B Black C Clear W White G Green 3 BASIC SWITCH NUMBER LU Blue TA On-None-Off TC On-Off-On R Red TB On-None-On LTA On-None-Off, Lighted 2 8 BASE COLOR B Black W White 4 RATING 10 5A 250VAC, 10A 125VAC, 1/2HP 125-250VAC 11 5A 250VAC, 10A 125VAC, 5A 125VAC L 4 9 LENS COLOR 20 10A 250VAC, 15A 125VAC, 3/4HP 125-250VAC A Amber G Green R Red 21 10A 250VAC, 15A 125VAC C Clear LU Blue W White 22 10A 250VAC, 15A 125VAC, 20A 125-250VAC H, 3/4HP 125-250VAC 10 LAMP VOLTAGE 5 TERMINATION / FUNCTION incandescent neon Solder Lug .250 Tab QC .187 Tab QC Wire Leads 6V 6 volt 125N 125 volt neon On-None-Off 0 1 3 5 12V 12 volt 250N 250 volt neon (On)-None-Off A B D F 18V 18 volt On-None-(Off) L M R T 24V 24 volt On-None-On 0 1 3 5 28V 28 volt On-None-(On) A B D F On-Off-On 0 1 3 5 Notes: Imprinting is available. Consult factory. Panel Cut-Out Recommendations: For sheet metal panels, switch must enter panel in same direction as the punch. (Burr on bottom.) Test cut hole in actual material. 1 TG available with circuits A, B, C, D, E, F, L, T, U G, H, I, J, M, N, P, Q, R, T, U, V, Y, Z. 2 Custom colors are available. Consult factory. 3 Specify lens color for LTA with rocker only. 4 Specify lens color for LTA with paddle actuators only. ( ) Indicates momentary function. .156[3.96] DIA .055[1.40] DIA .069[1.75] DIA 6.000[152.40] .375[9.52] .250[6.35] .500[12.70] .250[6.35] .250[6.35] 1.155[29.33] .187[4.74] 1.240[31.49] .860[21.84] INTEGRATED WIRE LEAD .250 TAB (Q.C.) SOLDER LUG .187 TAB (Q.C.) .050[1.27] (no exposed conductors) .220[5.59] TERMINAL TYPE .520[13.20] 1.125[28.57] .812[20.62] .275[6.98] 1.000[25.40] .375[9.52] 1.120[28.44] .994[25.24] SHORT PADDLE PADDLE MOUNTING HOLE Panel Thickness: .020[.508] min. to .250[6.35] max. *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 97 TLG-Series Rocker Switches - Introduction TLG-Series TLG-Series ROCKER SWITCHES The TLG-Series Mid-Sized Tippette snap-in rocker switches are single pole, rocker or paddle actuated with an adjacent indicator light. These single-actuator-switches are AC rated to 20 amps and are also suitable for low voltage DC applications. Product Highlights: Typical Applications: • Maintained or Momentary Circuitry • Appliance • Rocker Paddle or mixed Rocker/Paddle actuators • HVAC • Illuminated or Non-Illuminated • Food Service • Integrated wire lead construction • Transportation 98 www.carlingtech.com TLG-Series Rocker Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength Mechanical Life UL/CSA: 100,000 cycles 1000V - live to dead metal parts Operating Temperature Electrical Life 32°F to 185°F (0°C to 85°C) 50,000 cycles - maintained 25,000 cycles - momentary T B B / 125N TLG G D R TA 20 1 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 Center Rating Termination Actuator Actuator Base Color Lens Color Lamp Voltage Base Part Number Circuit Lens Lens Color Position Style Color Design 2 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES 8 ACTUATOR STYLE PS Short Paddle TLG Single Pole with adjacent Indicator Light P Paddle T Rocker 4 2 CIRCUIT 9 ACTUATOR COLOR lighted 2 See Circuit Designation Chart. unlighted A Amber B Black C Clear W White G Green 3 LENS DESIGN LU Blue D Diamond R Red L Long Line 2 10 BASE COLOR B Black W White 4 LENS COLOR A Amber G Green W White C Clear R Red 1,3 9 LENS COLOR A Amber G Green R Red C Clear LU Blue W White 5 BASIC SWITCH NUMBER TA On-None-Off TC On-Off-On TB On-None-On LTA On-None-Off, Lighted 1 10 LAMP VOLTAGE incandescent neon 6V 6 volt 125N 125 volt neon 12V 12 volt 250N 250 volt neon 6 RATING 18V 18 volt 10 5A 250VAC, 10A 125VAC, 1/2HP 125-250VAC 24V 24 volt 11 5A 250VAC, 10A 125VAC, 5A 125VAC L 28V 28 volt 20 10A 250VAC, 15A 125VAC, 3/4HP 125-250VAC 21 10A 250VAC, 15A 125VAC 22 10A 250VAC, 15A 125VAC, 20A 125-250VAC H, 3/4HP 125-250VAC Notes: Imprinting is available. Consult factory. Panel Cut-Out Recommendations: For sheet metal panels, switch must enter panel in same 7 TERMINATION / FUNCTION direction as the punch. (Burr on bottom.) Test cut hole in actual material. 1 Neon Lamps not recommended with green or blue actuators and lenses. Solder Lug .250 Tab QC .187 Tab QC Wire Leads 2 Custom colors are available. Consult factory. On-None-Off 0 1 3 5 3 Specify lens color only if actuator is lighted paddle. (On)-None-Off A B D F 4 Available with circuits G, H, I, J, K only. On-None-(Off) L M R T ( ) Indicates momentary function. On-None-On 0 1 3 5 On-None-(On) A B D F On-Off-On 0 1 3 5 .069[1.75] DIA .156[1.75] DIA .055[1.75] DIA 6.000[152.40] .375[9.52] .250[6.35] .250[6.35] .250[6.35] .500[12.70] 1.155[29.33] .187[4.74] .390[9.90] 1.240[31.49] INTEGRATED WIRE LEAD .050[1.27] .250 TAB (Q.C.) SOLDER LUG .187 TAB (Q.C.) (no exposed conductors) TERMINAL TYPE .520[13.20] .220[5.59] 1.125[28.57] .812[20.62] .275[6.98] .375[9.52] 1.000[25.40] .994[25.24] 1.120[28.44] PADDLE SHORT PADDLE MOUNTING HOLE Panel Thickness: .020[.508] min. to .250[6.35] max. *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 99 TG/LTG, TTG, TLG-Series - Circuit Designation Chart Circuit Designation Chart: 1 1 4 1 2 2 2 5 2 5 2 5 3 3 3 6 3 6 3 6 A B C D E 4 4 4 1 4 1 4 2 5 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 6 3 6 3 F G H I J 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 2 5 2 5 2 5 2 5 2 5 3 6 3 6 3 6 3 6 3 6 K L M N O 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 2 5 2 5 5 2 2 5 3 6 3 6 3 6 3 6 3 P Q R S T 1 4 1 4 1 1 2 5 2 5 2 5 2 5 2 5 3 6 3 6 3 6 3 6 3 6 U V W Y Z CONTACT TERMINAL CONTACT TERMINAL AND SWITCH LEVER Will make contact with switching lever ISOLATED TERMINAL BULB Does not make contact with switching lever 100 www.carlingtech.com RR/LRR-Series Rounded Rocker Switches - Introduction RR/LRR RR/LRR-Series ROUNDED ROCKER SWITCHES Carling Technologies’ RR and LRR-Series round rocker switches feature a uniquely sculpted rocker design with electrical ratings of up to 12A 125VAC, 10A 250VAC and fit an industry standard cutout, making installation a snap. The lighted LRR-Series can be wired to accommodate dependent or independent, illumination, neon or incandescent lamps with red, green, amber or white translucent rockers. Standard or custom actuator legends are available. Product Highlights: Typical Applications: • 125/250VAC or low voltage 12/24VDC • Appliance • Neon or Incandescent Illumination • Vacuum Cleaners • Industry Std. 20.2mm mounting hole • Office Automation • Maintained or momentary circuitry • Food Service • Audio Visual • Test & Measurement www.carlingtech.com 101 RR/LRR-Series Rounded Rocker Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength Mechanical Life UL/CUL: 100,000 cycles 1000V-live to dead metal parts & opposite polarity Operating Temperature 32°F to 185°F (0°C to 85°C) Electrical Life 50,000 cycles RR 1 1 2 B B N N 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Series Circuit Rating Termination Actuator Base Color Lamp Legend Color Voltage 1 SERIES 5 ACTUATOR COLOR RR Rocker LRR Lighted Rocker RR-Series (Non-Illuminated) Solid Color B Black W White R Red 2 CIRCUIT LRR-Series (Illuminated) Transparent Color 1 On-None-Off 1 Amber 2 (On)-None-Off 2 Red 3 On-None-(Off) 3 Blue 4 On-None-On 4 Green 5 On-None-(On) 5 Clear 6 On-Off-On 6 BASE COLOR 3 RATING B Black 1 1 10A, 125-250VAC; 12A 125 VAC W White 1/4 HP 125-250 VAC R Red 3 6A, 28 VDC 4 12A, 12 VDC 5 12A, 6 VDC 2 7 LAMP VOLTAGE J 125V Neon 2 N None K 250V Neon 3 A 6V Incandescent 1 6V LED 4 TERMINATION 3 B 12V Incandescent 2 12V LED 2 .187 Tab 3 C 28V Incandescent 3 24V LED Notes: 1 Rating Code “1” has UL and cUL approval. 8 ROCKER FACE LEGEND 2 Neon Lamps (125 or 250 Volts) not recommended with green or blue actuators. N No imprinting F O (on rocker end) 3 LED illumination (6V, 12V or 24V) not recommended with blue or clear actuators. A On-Off (vertical) G II-O-I (vertical) B On-Off (horizontal) H II-O-I (horizontal) D I-O (horizontal) J Off-On (vertical) E I-O (vertical) K Off-On (horizontal) .187[4.74] X .032[.812] .780[19.8] DIA .421[10.7] .187 TAB (Q.C) .906[23.0] DIA TERMINAL TYPE .079[2.0] .433[11.0] .087[11.0] .158[4.0] .079[2.0] RECOMMENDED PANEL .591[15.0] OPENING .795[20.2] PANEL THICKNESS: .118[3.0] MAX. *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. 102 www.carlingtech.com Curvette R/RSC-Series Rocker & Paddle Switches - Introduction CURVETTE R/RSC-Series SINGLE POLE ROCKER & PADDLE SWITCHES Since its introduction, the Curvette switch has become the barometer for versatility and performance in the switch market. Self cleaning contacts, international approvals, along with a wide variety of circuits, ratings, and actuator options make the Curvette the switch of choice for many markets. Product Highlights: Typical Applications: • Two color visi rocker to indicate “on” function • Appliance • Ratings to 20A • HVAC • Oval or rectangular bezels • Food Service • Patented mounting wings accommodate a • On Highway wide range of panel openings www.carlingtech.com 103 Curvette R/RSC-Series Rocker & Paddle Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength Mechanical Life UL/CSA: 100,000 cycles 1000V - live to dead metal parts VDE: Operating Temperature 4000V - live to dead metal parts; 32°F to 185°F (0°C to 85°C) 750V - across open contacts Electrical Life 100,000 cycles RA901 V B B 9 V 1 2 3 4 5 6 Base Part Number Actuator Actuator Bezel Rocker Visi-Rocker Style Color Color/Style Legend End/Legend Color 1 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / CIRCUITRY / RATING / 4 BEZEL COLOR / STYLE TERMINATION STANDARD OVAL 10A 250 VAC; 16A 125 VAC; 3/4 HP 125-250 VAC; 10(4) A 250 VACu B Black (matte) 1 Black (gloss) T85 W White (matte) 2 White (gloss) Solder Lugs .250 Tabs Wire Leads OFF-NONE-ON RA900 RA901 RA905 ON-NONE-ON RB900 RB901 RB905 5 ROCKER LEGEND 3 ON-OFF-ON RC910 RC911 RC915 molded in hot stamp 2 OFF-NONE-(ON) RD220 RD221 RD225 NO LEGEND 0 0 Off-On vertical 1 A 15A 250 VAC; 20A 125 VAC; 3/4 HP 125-250 VAC Off-On horizontal 2 B Solder Lugs .250 Tabs O-I horizontal 8 D OFF-NONE-ON RSCA200 RSCA201 O-I vertical 9 E ON-NONE-ON RSCB200 RSCB201 dual OFF-ON/O-I n/a H 2 ACTUATOR STYLE 6 VISI-ROCKER END / LEGEND COLOR M Momentary Rocker R Rocker N N/A P Paddle V Visi-rocker (2 color) B Black V Visi-red W White 3 ACTUATOR COLOR 1 Black (gloss) B Black (matte) 2 White (gloss) W White (matte) Notes: PC Terminals also available, consult factory for details. 1 For additional ratings, consult factory. 2 Rating is 8A 250 VAC, 12A 125 VAC, 1/2 HP 125-250 VAC, and must specify M actuator style. 3 Not rated at 3/4 HP 125-250 VAC ( ) indicates momentary function. .125[3.18] DIA 6.000[152.40] .500[12.70] .250[6.35] .187[4.75] .250[6.35] .250 TAB (Q.C.) SOLDER LUG WIRE LEAD .375[9.52] .080[2.03] TERMINAL TYPE 1.125[28.58] .187[4.75] .725[18.41] TEST CUT HOLE MOMENTARY IN ACTUAL .480[12.19] .550[13.97] MATERIAL .350[8.89] .375[9.53] 1.072[27.23] .710[18.03] .620[15.75] 1.070[27.17] MOUNTING HOLE Panel Thickness: .025 min - .187 max. Specific cutout dimension range PADDLE dependent on panel thickness and material. *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. Consult factory. 104 www.carlingtech.com Curvette LRA-Series Lighted Rocker and Paddle Switches - Introduction CURVETTE LRA-Series SINGLE POLE LIGHTED ROCKER & PADDLE SWITCHES Since its introduction, the Curvette switch has become the barometer for versatility and performance in the miniature switch market. This lighted version features the very same self cleaning contacts, international approvals, along with a wide variety of circuits, ratings, and actuator options that make the Curvette the switch of choice for various applications. Product Highlights: Typical Applications: • Clear or translucent style rockers • HVAC • Neon or Incandescent illumination • Office Lighting • Self-cleaning wiping style contacts • Transportation • UL, CSA and VDE approved • Commercial Food • Lawn & Garden • Power Strip www.carlingtech.com 105 Curvette LRA-Series Lighted Rocker & Paddle Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength Mechanical Life UL/CSA: 100,000 cycles 1000V-live to dead metal parts VDE: Operating Temperature 4000V - live to dead metal parts; 32°F to 185°F (0°C to 85°C) 750V - across open contacts Electrical Life 100,000 cycles / LRA911 R S B 250N 1 2 3 4 5 Base Part Number Actuator Actuator Bezel Lamp Voltage Style Color Color/Style 2 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / CIRCUITRY / RATING / 3 ACTUATOR COLOR TERMINATION translucent clear 125 neon lamp (use 125N in Selection 5 Lamp Voltage) A Amber A Amber 10A 250VAC; 16A 125VAC; 10(4)A 125VACu C White C Clear 1 Solder Lugs .250 Tabs Wire Leads P Yellow G Green 1 OFF-NONE-ON LRA210 LRA211 LRA215 S Red B Blue W Pale Red R Red 250 neon lamp (select 250N in selection 5 Lamp Voltage) 15A 250 VAC; 10A 250VAC; 16A 125VAC; 10(4)A 250 T85 Solder Lugs .250 Tabs 4 BEZEL COLOR/STYLE OFF-NONE-ON LRA910 LRA911 LRA915 STANDARD OVAL B Black (matte) 1 Black (gloss) Incandescent lamp (select 006V-024V in selection 5 Lamp Voltage) W White (matte) 2 White (gloss) 10A 30V Solder Lugs .250 Tabs Wire Leads OFF-NONE-ON LRA510 LRA511 LRA515 5 LAMP VOLTAGE 006V 6 volts incandescent 012V 12 volts incandescent 2 ACTUATOR STYLE 018V 18 volts incandescent P Paddle 024V 24 volts incandescent R Rocker translucent 1 125N 125 volts neon C Rocker Clear 1 250N 250 volts neon Notes: LED illumination, PC terminals, independent lamps, and additional color options are available. Consult factory. 1 Neon lamps not available with blue or green actuators. 2 Consult factory for additional ratings. .125[3.18] DIA 6.000[152.40] .500[12.70] .250[6.35] .250[6.35] .187[4.75] .080[2.03] .375[9.52] .250 TAB (Q.C.) SOLDER LUG WIRE LEAD TERMINAL TYPE 1.125[28.58] .187[4.75] TEST CUT HOLE .710[18.03] IN ACTUAL .480[12.19] .550[13.97] MATERIAL .725[18.41] PADDLE .375[9.53] .620[15.75] 1.070[27.17] 1.072[27.23] MOUNTING HOLE Panel Thickness: .025 min. - .187 max. Specific cutout dimension range dependent on panel thickness and material. Consult factory. *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. 106 www.carlingtech.com RG-Series Rocker & Paddle Switches - Introduction RG-Series RG-Series SINGLE/DOUBLE POLE ROCKER & PADDLE SWITCHES The double pole version of the R-Series incorporates the same sleek lines as the original Curvette, in a double pole envelope. Features include silver-plated butt-action contacts which afford ratings to 20A/125, 15A 250VAC and withstand peak inrush currents up to 100 amps. Paddle or rocker actuators and a choice of solder lug, .250 Tab and wire lead terminations enable this switch to adapt to high current applications. Product Highlights: Typical Applications: Š Ratings to 20A Š Power Supply Š UL, CSA and VDE approved Š Appliance Š Rocker or Paddle actuators Š Exercise Equipment Š Fits Euro or American standard mounting holes Š Music Equipment www.carlingtech.com 107 RG-Series Rocker & Paddle Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength Electrical Life UL/CSA: 50,000 cycles 1000V - live to dead metal parts & Mechanical Life opposite polarity VDE: 100,000 cycles 4000V - live to dead metal parts; 1250V - opposite polarity & Operating Temperature across open contacts -40°F to 185°F (-40°C to 85°C) RGSCA901 R B B A 1 2 3 4 5 Base Part Number Actuator Actuator Bezel Color Rocker Style Color Legend 1 1 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / CIRCUITRY / RATING / 3 ACTUATOR COLOR TERMINATION B Black W White 15A 250 VAC, 20A 125 VAC, 3/4 HP 125-250 VAC, 14(6)A 250 VAC Solder Lugs .250 Tabs Wire Leads 1 Standard Base 4 BEZEL COLOR OFF-NONE-ON (Single Pole) RGSCA900 RGSCA901 RGSCA905 B Black W White ON-NONE-ON (Single Pole) RGSCB900 RGSCB901 RGSCB905 OFF-NONE-ON (Double Pole) RGSCC900 RGSCC901 RGSCC905 ON-NONE-ON (Double Pole) RGSCD900 RGSCD901 RGSCD905 5 ROCKER LEGEND hot stamp European Base (22 x 30 mm cutout) NO LEGEND 0 OFF-NONE-ON (Single Pole) RGSEA900 RGSEA901 RGSEA905 OFF-ON vertical A ON-NONE-ON (Single Pole) RGSEB900 RGSEB901 RGSEB905 OFF-ON horizontal B OFF-NONE-ON (Double Pole) RGSEC900 RGSEC901 RGSEC905 O-I horizontal D ON-NONE-ON (Double Pole) RGSED900 RGSED901 RGSED905 O-I vertical E Dual OFF-ON, O-I vertical H Dual OFF-ON, O-I horizontal J 2 ACTUATOR STYLE P Paddle R Rocker Notes: 1 Additional ratings, colors and clear style actuators are available. Consult factory. .125[3.18] X 6.000[152.40] .150[3.81] 19 .275[6.99] .500[12.70] .250[6.35] .187[4.75] 1.012[25.70] PADDLE .250 TAB (Q.C.) SOLDER LUG WIRE LEAD 1.145[29.08] TERMINAL TYPE .784[19.91] .215[5.46] 1.181[30.00] 1.240[31.50] 1.125[28.58] .080[2.03] +.000[.00] -.004[.10] +.004[.10] TEST CUT -.000[.00] TEST CUT HOLE IN .872[22.15] 1.000[25.4] HOLE IN .866[22.00] ACTUAL ACTUAL MATERIAL MATERIAL 1.180[29.97] 1.072[27.23] .375[9.53] .725[18.42] RGSE RGSC MOUNTING HOLE Panel Thickness: .025 min - .187 max. 1.086[27.58] 1.070[27.17] RGSC Specific cutout dimension range dependent on panel thickness and material. 1.176[29.87] RGSE *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. 108 www.carlingtech.com LRG-Series Rocker & Paddle Switches - Introduction LRG-Series LRG-Series ILLUMINATED DOUBLE POLE ROCKER & PADDLE SWITCHES The double pole lighted version of the R-Series incorporates the same sleek lines as the original Curvette, in a double pole envelope. This illuminated version features silver-plated butt-action contacts with ratings to 20A/125, 15A 250VAC and withstand peak inrush currents up to 100 amps. Clear or translucent style rocker actuators and a choice of solder lug, .250 Tab and wire lead terminations enable this switch to adapt to high current applications. Product Highlights: Typical Applications: • Ratings to 20A • Power Supply • Neon or Incandescent Illumination • Appliance • Silver Plated Butt-contact mechanism • Exercise Equipment • Clear or translucent style rockers • Music Equipment www.carlingtech.com 109 LRG-Series Rocker & Paddle Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength Mechanical Life UL/CSA: 100,000 cycles 1000V - live to dead metal parts & opposite polarity Operating Temperature -40°F to 185°F (-40°C to 85°C) Electrical Life 50,000 cycles LRGSCK611 R S B B / 250N 1 2 3 4 5 6 Base Part Number Actuator Actuator Bezel Color Rocker Lamp Voltage Style Color Legend 1 1 4 BEZEL COLOR 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / CIRCUITRY / RATING / B Black W White TERMINATION 15A 250 VAC, 20A 125 VAC, 3/4 HP 125-250 VAC Solder Lugs .250 Tabs Wire Leads 5 ROCKER LEGEND Standard Base hot stamp OFF-NONE-ON LRGSCK610 LRGSCK611 LRGSCK615 NO LEGEND 0 European Base (22 x 30 mm cutout) OFF-ON vertical A OFF-NONE-ON (Single Pole) LRGSEK610 LRGSEK611 LRGSEK615 OFF-ON horizontal B 3 15A 6-24 V O-I horizontal D Standard Base O-I vertical E OFF-NONE-ON LRGSCK510 LRGSCK511 LRGSCK515 Dual OFF-ON, O-I vertical H European Base (22 x 30 mm cutout) Dual OFF-ON, O-I horizontal J OFF-NONE-ON (Single Pole) LRGSEK510 LRGSEK511 LRGSEK515 2 6 LAMP VOLTAGE 2 ACTUATOR STYLE 006V 6V incandescent 024V 24V incandescent R Rocker (translucent) C Rocker (clear) 012V 12V incandescent 125N 125V neon 018V 18V incandescent 250N 250V neon 3 3 ACTUATOR COLOR L Lime Green Notes: 1 Additional ratings, colors and clear style actuators are available. Consult factory. A Amber P Yellow 3,5 2 Incandescent lamps must specify 15A 24V rating only. B Blue R Red (clear) 4 3 Available with incandescent lamps only. C White/Clear S Red 4 Clear color provided where specified with clear style rocker. 5 G Green W Pale Red 5 Available with clear style rocker only. .125[3.18] X 6.000[152.40] .150[3.81] .275[6.99] .500[12.70] .250[6.35] .187[4.75] .250 TAB (Q.C.) SOLDER LUG WIRE LEAD 1.145[29.08] TERMINAL TYPE .784[19.91] .215[5.46] 1.181[30.00] 1.240[31.50] 1.125[28.58] .080[2.03] +.000[.00] -.004[.10] +.004[.10] TEST CUT -.000[.00] TEST CUT HOLE IN .872[22.15] 1.000[25.4] HOLE IN .866[22.00] ACTUAL ACTUAL MATERIAL MATERIAL 1.180[29.97] 1.072[27.23] .375[9.53] .725[18.42] LRGSE LRGSC MOUNTING HOLE Panel Thickness: .025 min - .187 max. 1.086[27.58] 1.070[27.17] RGSC Specific cutout dimension range dependent on panel thickness and material. 1.176[29.87] RGSE *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. 110 www.carlingtech.com SMALL-SIZED ROCKERS Carling’s Small-Sized Rocker Switches range from .4VA to 12 amp illuminated and non-illuminated, single and double pole, with many styles of solid colored and two-color Visi-Rockers. Illumination options include LED, neon, and incandescent lamps. SELECTOR GUIDE 610 / 620 611 / 621 622 / 632 651 / 652 1, 2 1, 2 1, 2 1 Poles up to up to up to up to 12A 125VAC 10A 125VAC 8A 125VAC 8A 125VAC Ratings 8A 250VAC 10A 250VAC 4A 250VAC 4A 250VAC 1/2 HP 125-250VAC 1/4 HP 125-250VAC rocker, paddle rocker, paddle rocker rocker, paddle Actuator .508” x .756” .508” x .756” .508” x .756” .508” x .756” Mounting Hole [12.9mm x 19.2mm] [12.9mm x 19.2mm] [12.9mm x 19.2mm] [12.9mm x 19.2mm] Specifications snap-in mount snap-in mount snap-in mount snap-in mount .187 tab .187 tab solder lug solder lug .187 tab solder lug Termination PC terms wire leads solder lug wire leads PC terms PC terms n/a n/a incandescent, LED, neon n/a Illumination UL, CSA UL, CSA, VDE UL, CSA UL, CSA Approvals *Options and approvals shown may apply to specific construction combinations only, consult factory for clarification. Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specifications without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 111 610/620-Series Small-Sized Rocker Switches - Introduction 610/620 610/620-Series SMALL-SIZED ROCKER SWITCHES The 610/620-Series switches are double insulated and available in single or double pole configurations. These snap-in mounted switches are offered with either a paddle or rocker actuator and with ratings up to 8 amps. Product Highlights: Typical Applications: • Single or double pole • Handheld Appliance • Paddle rocker actuator options • Audio-Visual • Snap-In mounting method • Power Supplies • Computers 112 www.carlingtech.com 610/620-Series Small-Sized Rocker Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Electrical Life Dielectric Strength 50,000 cycles- single pole UL/CSA: 50,000 cycles- double pole 1000V - live to dead metal parts & opposite polarity Operating Temperature Mechanical Life 32°F to 185°F (0°C to 85°C) 100,000 cycles 62012421 0 0 1 2 3 Base Part Number Terminal Legend Sealing 1 2 TERMINAL SEALING 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / CIRCUITRY / RATING / 1 0 None TERMINATION E Epoxy sealed terminals 4A 250VAC; 8A 125VAC Single Pole Solder Lugs PC Term On-none-On 62011421 62011422 3 LEGEND On-none-(On) 62011431 62011432 hot stamp On-off-On 62011461 62011462 NO LEGEND 0 On-off-(On) 62011471 62011472 On-OFF vertical A (On)-off-(On) 62011481 62011482 On-OFF horizontal B Double Pole I-O horizontal D On-none-On 62012421 62012422 I-O vertical G On-none-(On) 62012431 62012432 On-off-On 62012461 62012462 On-off-(On) 62012471 62012472 (On)-off-(On) 62012481 62012482 Notes: 1 Base part number specifies black rocker and bezel. To specify paddle actuator, change 2nd digit of part number from 2 to 1 (ex. 61012421) For additional ratings and colors, consult factory. ( ) indicates momentary function. .171[4.34] .078[1.98] .250[6.35] .284[7.21] END CENTER .046[1.17] x .080[2.03] X .047[1.19] SLOT .029[.736] .590[14.98] PC TERMINAL .080 SOLDER LUG .750[19.05] .182[4.62] .620[15.74] .510[12.95] TERMINAL TYPE .050[1.27] .515[13.08] .606[15.39] .500[12.70] .171[4.34] BARRIER .300[7.62] .625[15.87] .250[6.35] .750[19.05] MOUNTING HOLE Panel Thickness: PADDLE .030[.762] min. to .093[2.36] max. *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 113 611/621-Series Small-Sized Rocker Switches - Introduction 611/621 611/621-Series SMALL-SIZED ROCKER SWITCHES The 611/621-Series small-size, sleek styling, actuator and termination choices make this switch a cost effective solution to most any switching need. International approvals, single or double pole circuitry, and ratings to 11A 125VAC further the broad appeal of this product family. Product Highlights: Typical Applications: • Single or double pole • Appliance • Paddle and single color or dual color visi-rocker • Audio-Visual options • Power Supplies • UL, CSA and VDE approvals for select circuits • Choice of 7 termination options 114 www.carlingtech.com 611/621-Series Small-Sized Rocker Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength Electrical Life UL/CSA: 50,000 cycles- single pole 1000V - live to dead metal parts & 50,000 cycles- double pole opposite polarity Operating Temperature VDE: 4000V - live to dead metal parts; 1250V - opposite polarity & across 32°F to 185°F (0°C to 85°C) open contacts Mechanical Life 100,000 cycles 62116919 0 9 V 1 2 3 4 Base Part Number Epoxy Rocker Visi-Rocker Sealing Legend End Color 2 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / CIRCUITRY / RATING / TERMINATION 4 187 Tabs .080 Solder Lugs PC Terms Wire Leads PC Front Mount PC Back Mount .187 Solder Lugs 4 Single Pole; 4A 250VAC; 8A 125VAC; 6(4) A 250V 6 6 ON-NONE-OFF 62116919 - - 62111914 62111918 62111917 62111916 6 6 ON-NONE-ON 62116929 62116421 62111422 62111924 62111928 62111927 62111926 3 7 ON-OFF-ON - 62111461 62111462 62111263 - - - 3 7 ON-NONE-(ON) - 62111431 62111432 62111233 - - - 3 7 ON-OFF-(ON) - 62111471 62111472 62111273 - - - 3 7 (ON)-OFF-(ON) - 62111481 62111482 62111283 - - - 4 Double Pole; 4A 250VAC; 8A 125VAC; 6(4) A 250V 6 6 ON-NONE-OFF 62115919 - - 62112914 62112918 62112917 62112916 6 6 ON-NONE-ON 62115929 62112421 62112422 62112924 62112928 62112927 62112926 3 7 ON-OFF-ON - 62112461 62112462 62112263 - - - 3 7 ON-NONE-(ON) - 62112431 62112432 62112233 - - - 3 7 ON-OFF-(ON) - 62112471 62112472 62112273 - - - 3 7 (ON)-OFF-(ON) - 62112481 62112482 62112283 - - - 2 TERMINAL SEALING 3 ROCKER LEGEND 5 0 None E Epoxy sealed terminals molded in hot stamp NO LEGEND 0 0 Off-On vertical n/a A Notes: Off-On horizontal n/a B 1 Base part number specifies black rocker with black bezel. To specify paddle actuator change 2nd digit from 2 to 1. ex.: 61115919 = black paddle with black bezel. I-O horizontal 8 D For additional ratings & colors, consult factory. I-O vertical 9 E 2 Dry circuit rating is available, consult factory. O on rocker radius n/a F (Indicates ON) 3 Not available with 6(4) A 250 V rating or VDE approval. 4 6(4)A 250V VDE approved rating available with On-none-Off and On-none-On circuits only. 4 VISI-ROCKER END COLOR 5 Available with visi-rocker option only. N n/a 6 Consult factory for PC footprint. V visi-red 7 Rated 2A 250VAC, 5A 125 VAC resistive. W visi-white ( ) Indicates momentary function. .171[4.34] .200[5.08] .062[1.57] DIA MIN .250[6.35] .825[20.95] .207[5.26] .046[1.17] .590[14.98] .125[3.18] CENTER x END .080[2.03] .185[4.70] .380[9.65] .029[.736] .080[2.03] X .047[1.19] SLOT .080 SOLDER LUG PC TERMINAL FRONT MOUNT & MOUNTING PATTERN (terminal option 1) functions 2,3,6,7,8 (terminal option 2) functions 2,3,6,7,8 .877[22.27] P.C. .892[22.66] (option 2) TERMINAL TYPE .120[3.05] .677[17.20] .187[4.74] X 6.000[152.40] DIA HIGH .843[21.41] .032[.812] .505[12.83] .315[8.00] BARRIER .080 SOLDER LUG OPTION .500[12.70] .825[20.95] WIRE LEAD .187 TAB (Q.C) .187 SOLDER LUG (terminal option 9) (terminal option 6) .465[11.81] functions 1,2 functions 1,2 PADDLE +.000[.00] 1.040[26.42] PANEL -.004[.10] X Y Y THICKNESS TEST CUT .030[.762]-.060[1.52] .508[12.90] .756[19.20] +.004[.10] HOLE IN -.000[.00] .060[1.52]-.093[2.36] .508[12.90] .764[19.40] X ACTUAL MATERIAL TAB .093[2.36]-.156[3.96] .508[12.90] .780[19.81] *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 115 622/632-Series Small-Sized Rocker Switches - Introduction 622/632 622/632-Series SMALL-SIZED ROCKER SWITCHES A high powered offering packed into a small-sized envelope, the 622/632-Series is a staple of numerous markets. With its silver-alloy butt contacts, the 622/632 will handle inrush spikes up to 100 amps and steady state current to 12A 125VAC. The lighted 632-Series features a multitude of illumination circuit options available with LED, incandescent and neon style lamps. Product Highlights: Typical Applications: • Illuminated or Non-Illuminated • Appliance • Silver Plated Butt contacts that handle high • Food Service Inrush spikes • Transportation • Independent or Dependent lamp circuitry • General Purpose • Industry standard size mounting hole 116 www.carlingtech.com 1 2 3 6 622/632-Series Small-Sized Rocker Switches - General & Dimensional Specifications, Ordering Scheme Dielectric Strength Mechanical Life UL/CSA: 100,000 cycles 1000V-live to dead metal parts & opposite polarity Operating Temperature 32°F to 185°F (0°C to 85°C) Electrical Life 50,000 cycles 632121 1 B K N 1 2 3 4 5 Base Part Number Actuator Base Lamp Legend Color Color BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / CIRCUITRY / RATING / TERMINATION 8A 250VAC; 12A 125VAC; 1/2 HP 125-250VAC 622-SERIES NON-ILLUMINATED ROCKER Solder Lugs .187 Tabs ON-none-OFF (Single Pole) 622121 622122 ON-none-OFF (Double Pole) 622221 622222 632-SERIES ILLUMINATED ROCKER ON-none-OFF (Single Pole, dependent lamp) schematic 1 632121 632122 ON-none-OFF (Single Pole, independent lamp) schematic 3 632321 632322 ON-none-OFF (Single Pole, independent lamp unballasted) schematic 5 632521 632522 ON-none-OFF (Double Pole, dependent lamp with 5 terms.) schematic 2 632221 632222 ON-none-OFF (Double Pole, dependent lamp with 4 terms.) schematic 4 632421 632422 3 1 2 ACTUATOR COLOR 4 LAMP VOLTAGE / STYLE A 6V incandescent 622 (non illuminated) 632 (illuminated) N 622 (non illuminated) C 12V incandescent B Black 1 Clear Amber 1 unballasted LED E 18V incandescent W White 2 Clear Red 2 6V LED H 24V incandescent 2 3 Clear Blue 3 12V LED J 125V neon 4 Clear Green 4 24V LED K 250V neon 5 Clear 5 ROCKER LEGEND 3 3 BASE COLOR N NO Legend B Black W White A OFF-ON vertical B OFF-ON horizontal D I-O horizontal Notes: E I-O vertical 1 For all incandescent or LED lamps specify 5 in 5th digit of part number. Example 632151-1B-CN F O on rocker radius 2 Available with incandescent lamps only. 3 Additional colors available. Consult factory for details. .125[3.17] .187[4.74] X DIA .032[812] .150[3.81] .590[14.99] .825[20.96] .315[8.00] .405[10.29] .080[2.03] .187 TAB (Q.C) .187 SOLDER LUG .630[16.00] TERMINAL TYPE .315[8.00] .945[24.00] RECOMMENDED +.004[.10] PANEL A -.000[.00] OPENING .505[12.83] +.000[.00] -.004[.10] 632 SCHEMATIC UNBALLASTED B 1 1 1 1 1 PANEL A B THICKNESS 5 2 2 5 +2 5 2 5 2 +5 .030[.76]-.050[1.27] .508[12.90] .756[19.20] .050[1.27]-.078[1.98] .508[12.90] .764[19.40] +3 +3 6 3 6 +3 6 3 BOTTOM VIEW OF TERMINAL ARRANGEMENT .078[1.98]-.125[3.17] .508[12.90] .780[19.81] 1 2 3 4 5 *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 117 651/652-Series Small-Sized Rocker Switches - Introduction 651/652 651/652-Series SMALL-SIZED ROCKER SWITCHES This switch is ideal for applications with back panel size constraints. It fits in a standard rectangular cutout and is designed to provide ease of insertion along with superior panel retention qualities. A high profile rocker and butt-action contacts provide the user with a crisp positive-type feel and electrical ratings to 12A 125VAC 10A 250VAC. A variety of ratings, circuitry and termination choices will appeal to many market segments. Product Highlights: Typical Applications: • Ratings to 12A 125VAC, 6A 250VAC • Handheld Appliance • Suitable for low voltage 12/24V DC • Audio-Visual • Solid or 2 color visi-rocker options • Power Supplies • 5 choices of termination 118 www.carlingtech.com 651/652-Series Small-Sized Rocker Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength Mechanical Life UL/CSA: 100,000 cycles 1000V-live to dead metal parts Operating Temperature Electrical Life 32°F to 185°F (0°C to 85°C) 100,000 cycles- maintained 50,000 cycles- momentary 50,000 cycles- T-rating 651 122 B B A N 1 2 3 4 5 6 Series Circuit/Rating/ Actuator Base Color Legend Visi-Rocker End/ Termination Color Legend Color 1 SERIES 4 BASE COLOR 651 Matte Finish 652 Gloss Finish B Black W White 2 CIRCUITRY / RATING / TERMINATION 5 ROCKER LEGEND 4 10A 250VAC, 10A 125VAC, 1/4 HP, 125-250 VAC molded in hot stamp .187 .187 PC PC Wire NO LEGEND 0 0 Solder Lugs Tabs Terms Rt. Angle Leads Off-On vertical 1 A ON-NONE-OFF 121 122 123 124 125 Off-On horizontal – B 1 (ON)-NONE-OFF 261 262 263 264 265 I-O horizontal 8 D 1 ON-NONE-(OFF) 361 362 363 364 365 I-O vertical 9 E ON-NONE-ON 421 422 423 424 425 O on rocker end – F 1 ON-NONE-(ON) 561 562 563 564 565 II-O-I vertical – G 2 ON-OFF-ON 681 682 683 684 686 II-O-I horizontal – H 2 ON-OFF-(ON) 781 782 783 784 785 2 (ON)-OFF-(ON) 881 882 883 884 885 6 VISI-ROCKER END / LEGEND COLOR N N/A 3 ACTUATOR COLOR B Black B Black W White V Visi-red W White Notes: Additional ratings (including 14V T) & color options are available; Consult factory. 1 Rated 12A 125VAC, 6A 250 VAC, 1/4HP 125-250VAC. 2 Rated 8A 125-250VAC, 1/4HP 125-250VAC. 3 Additional colors available. Consult factory for details. 4 Available with Visi-Rocker option only. ( ) Indicates momentary function. .080 [2.03] .215 .222[5.63] .825[20.96] .289[7.34] .590[14.99] .085[2.16] DIA .050 .236 [5.99] .188 [4.77] .050 .735 [18.67] x.032 [.81] PC TERMINAL SOLDER LUG FRONT AND RIGHT ANGLE .460[11.68] .507 [12.88] .270 [6.86] TERMINAL TYPE .720 [18.29] 2 POSITION .187[4.74] X .032[.812] .270 [6.86] TYP .080 [2.03] .062 [1.57] DIA TYP .590[14.99 ] .825[20.96] PC TERMINAL .236 [5.99] .188[4.77] .187 TAB (Q.C) HOLE PATTERN .835 [21.21] x.032[.81] +.000[.00] -.004[.10] PANEL THICKNESS A B B .500[12.70] RECOMMENDED .030[.76]-.050[1.27] .508[12.90] .756[19.20] PANEL +.004[.10] TEST CUT .270[6.86] .507 [12.88] -.000[.00] HOLE IN OPENING .050[1.27]-.078[1.98] .508[12.90] .764[19.40] A .720 [18.29] ACTUAL MATERIAL .078[1.98]-.125[3.17] .508[12.90] .780[19.81] 3 POSITION *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 119 TOGGLE SWITCHES Carling bushing mount toggle switches range from 1 to 4 poles, 1 to 20 amps. They offer a variety of nylon and metal toggle styles, as well as illuminated toggles. Several families of heavy-duty toggle switches are available, as well as a high-temperature snap-in toggle switch series. SELECTOR GUIDE ST-Series LT-Series F / G / H / I C / D 110-Series DK / EK MAAOA / 215 1, 2 1, 2 1, 2, 3, 4 1 1, 2 1, 2 1 Poles up to up to up to up to up to up to 6A 125VAC/ 20A 125VAC/ 20A 125VAC 15A 125VAC 20A 125VAC 16A, 12/24V 20A 125VAC DC DC 10A 250VAC Ratings 10A 250VAC 20A 277VAC 10A 250VAC 3A 250VAC/ 10A 250VAC/ 1/2HP 125- 15A 12-28VDC 2 HP 250VAC DC DC 250VAC paddle, toggle paddle, toggle paddle, toggle toggle (bat), toggle (bat), IP68, bat toggle (bat) Actuator (bat) (bat) (bat) toggle (ball) toggle (ball) .500” dia .500” dia .656” x 1.218” .500” dia .500” dia .500” dia .500” dia [12.7mm] [12.7mm] [16.66mm x Mounting Hole [12.7mm] [12.7mm] [12.7mm] [12.7mm] bushing bushing 30.54mm] Specifications bushing mount bushing mount bushing mount bushing mount mount mount snap-in mount .187 tabs .187 tabs .250 tabs solder lug solder lug solder lug solder lug .250 tabs Screw Terminals .250 tabs .250 tabs .250 tabs .250 tabs screw terms screw terms Termination with cage screw terms screw terms screw terms screw terms wire leads clamps wire leads wire leads wire leads wire leads PC terms PC terms incandescent, n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a Illumination neon UL, cUL pending n/a UL, CSA, VDE UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA Approvals *Options and approvals shown may apply to specific construction combinations only, consult factory for clarification. Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specifications without prior notice. 120 www.carlingtech.com ST–Series Sealed Toggle Switches - Introduction ST-Series ST-Series SEALED TOGGLE SWITCHES Designed to comply with MIL-DTL-3950G requirements for environmentally sealed toggle switches, ® Carling Technologies ST-Series Sealed Toggle Switch features innovative design and performance principles sure to withstand the most demanding applications. The ST-Series features a toggle seal composed of dynamic silicone material that bonds to the metal toggle, pin and bushing, providing ideal sealing and protection against the environment, vibration and shock, while withstanding extreme temperature variations. It also utilizes up to three terminal seals per pole and an optional o-ring assures additional under panel sealing protection. All silicone seals on the ST-Series comply with A-A-59588 for silicone rubber performance specifications and, together, these features meet the international IEC 60529 standard for sealing performance to an IP68 level. Resources: Download 3D CAD Files IGS STP Watch Product Video Product Highlights: Typical Applications: Š Designed to comply with MIL-DTL-3950G Š Military Equipment requirements Š Armored Vehicles Š IEC 60529 IP68 sealing performance Š Law Enforcement Vehicles Š Toggle seal bonds to toggle, pin and bushing Š Off-Highway Vehicles Š Complies with UL 61058-1 electrical spacing Š Applications requiring stringent sealing and requirements performance capabilities www.carlingtech.com 121 ST–Series Sealed Toggle Switch - Design Features ST-Series Switch DESIGN FEATURES PINNED TOGGLE / BRASS ROLLER PIN BASE SEAL CHANNEL TERMINAL BARRIERS BUSHING Provides rolling metal Perfectly fits the toggle Comply with Keeps metal toggle firmly in on metal actuation for assembly seal decreasing UL-61058-1 electrical place and prevents rotation maximum endurance the dependence on spacing requirements clamping forces and rivets OPTIONAL O-RING BUSHING/TOGGLE SEAL RIVETS TERMINAL SEALS Assures additional Composed of dynamic High purity copper composite Assure a secure seal at extreme under panel sealing silicone material that bonds and silver alloy materials handle temperatures. Eliminates potential protection to the metal toggle, pin various electrical loads and for separated joints associated with and bushing maintain low contact resistance insert molded constructions 122 www.carlingtech.com ST–Series Sealed Toggle Switch - General Specifications Electrical Mechanical Contact Rating 16A 12V/24V Life Mechanical Endurance: 150,000 cycles total (at 25°C) Dielectric Strength MIL-STD-202G, Method 301 (1500 Volts RMS) Insulation Resistance MIL-STD-202G, Method 302 Environmental (50 MegOhms, 500 VDC) Temperature Operating: -40°C to +85°C Initial Contact Resistance MIL-STD-202G, Method 307 Storage: -65°C to +85°C (10 milliOhms max.) Vibration MIL-STD-202G: Method 204D, Life Overload: MIL-DTL-3950G, Test Condition A (10 G peak, Section 4.8.11.1 Harmonic, 10Hz to 500Hz Electrical Endurance and sweeps, 9 hours total). Temperature: UL 61058-1 Shock MIL-STD-202G: Method 213B, Momentary circuits: 25,000 Test Condition K (30 G, half sine) operations, minimum. Handling Drop SAE J1455, Section 4.11.3.1, 1 Maintained circuits: 50,000 meter drop in each of three operations, minimum. planes Testing ongoing to determine Sealing MIL-STD-202G, Method 110 maximum values. (sand and dust) Contacts Silver Alloy IEC 60529, IP68 (dust-tight and Terminals Brass or Copper / silver plated. continuous immersion in water) Tab Terminal: ¼” quick-connect Salt Atmosphere MIL-STD-202G, Method 101, Test Screw Terminal: #6-32 brass Condition A (96 hrs) screw and cage clamp Thermal Shock MIL-STD-202G, Method 107, Test MIL-STD-202G, Method 211 Test Condition A (five cycles in air: Condition A, and B: 25 lb. pull -55°C, +25°C, +125°C, +25°C) test, two terminal bends. Moisture Resistance, MIL-STD-202G, Method 106 Humidity (ten 24-hour stepped cycles) Physical Chemical Resistance No permanent loss of function, Function Single/Double Pole with obvious loss of sealing, distortion, Single/Double Throw functions softening, embrittlement, Operation Two/ Three position, Maintained/ discoloration or corrosion after Momentary circuits being brushed for 10 minutes, Toggle Tin plated brass wetting all exposed surfaces. Relevant chemical compatibility Actuator Polyester PBT, UL94-V0 and documentation may be used in fungus resistant per ASTM G- 21 place of testing. Internal Seals All internal seals are silicone per Chemical Concentration A-A-59588-1A. Gasoline 100% Mounting 15/32”-32 UNS-2A threaded Ethylene Glycol 50% in water bushing with a keyway. A single Ethanol/Methanol 10% in water nut and lock washer are supplied Diesel Fuel 100% unassembled. Bushing/Top Plate Zinc/aluminum die cast, with tin plating. Base Polyester PBT, UL94-V0 and fungus resistant per ASTM G-21 Actuation Force Initial Actuation Forces ± 0.3 lb (2-Pole circuits) Angular Movement 14.5 degrees, each side of center *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 123 ST–Series Sealed Toggle Switch - Ordering Scheme ST A 2 E 1 53 6 1 2 3 4 5 Toggle Series Circuit Poles Rating Termination Style 1 1 SERIES 4 RATING ST Sealed Toggle E 16A, 12/24V 2 CIRCUIT 5 TERMINATION 2 & 3, 5 & 6 Connected Terminals 1 & 2, 4 & 5 1 .250 (6.4mm) TAB (QC) Position: 1 2 3 4 Screw with Cage Clamps 5 A ON NONE OFF B .250 (6.4mm) TAB (QC). Jumper T2 to T5. No terminal at T5 5 B (ON) NONE OFF E Screw with Cage Clamps. Jumper T2 to T5. No terminal at T5 C ON NONE (OFF) D ON NONE ON F ON NONE (ON) 6 TOGGLE STYLE J ON OFF ON Without Panel Seal Toggle Length Bushing Length K ON OFF (ON) 53 .561 .385 L (ON) OFF (ON) With Panel Seal (Bulk) Special Circuits 58 .561 .385 2,3 E 5 & 6 5 & 3 5 & 1 2,4 G 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 OFF 2,4 Notes: M (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 OFF 1 Standard hardware is (1) inner tooth lock washer and (1) hex nut bulk. 2 Available only with 2 pole option in selection box # 3. 3 External customer supplied jumper required between terminals 2 & 4 to get SP ON-ON-ON circuit. 3 POLES 4 Available with termination B and E only. 1 Single pole using terminals 1, 2 & 3 5 Available with special circuit G and M only. 2 Double pole using terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 & 6 124 www.carlingtech.com ST–Series Sealed Toggle Switch - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] TERMINALS PANEL CUTOUTS www.carlingtech.com 125 LT-Series Toggle Switches - Introduction LT-Series LT-Series TOGGLE SWITCHES The LT-Series illuminated toggle switches feature up to a three-color lighting sequence from a single lamp. These lighted toggles contain neoprene bushing seals for dust and moisture protection. A variety of circuits and terminations are available. Product Highlights: Typical Applications: Š 1 or 2 Pole Š Marine Š Independent or Dependent Illumination Š Transportation Š Choice of 5 Actuator Styles Š Up to 3 different colors under a single lens 126 www.carlingtech.com LT-Series Toggle Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength Mechanical Life 1000V - live to dead metal parts 100,000 cycles Electrical Life Operating Temperature 50,000 cycles - maintained 32°F to 185°F (0°C to 85°C) 25,000 cycles - momentary LT-1561 1 30 012 1 2 3 4 Base Part Number Actuator Lighting Lamp Voltage Style Sequence 3,4 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / POLES / ILLUMINATION / 3 LIGHTING SEQUENCE 5 CIRCUITRY / RATING / TERMINATION position 1 position 2 position 3 10A 250VAC, 15A 125VAC, 3/4 HP 125-250VAC, 15A 12-28VDC 01 red red red Single Pole Solder Lug .250 Tab QC Screw Terms Wire Leads 02 amber amber amber 03 green green green On-None-Off LT-1510 LT-1511 LT-1514 LT-1515 10 red --- none On-None-(Off) LT-1520 LT-1521 LT-1524 LT-1525 11 red clear red (On)-None-Off LT-1530 LT-1531 LT-1534 LT-1535 12 red clear amber On-None-On LT-1540 LT-1541 LT-1544 LT-1545 13 red clear green On-None-(On) LT-1550 LT-1551 LT-1554 LT-1555 14 red clear blue On-Off-On LT-1560 LT-1561 LT-1564 LT-1565 15 red clear clear On-Off-(On) LT-1570 LT-1571 LT-1574 LT-1575 20 amber --- none (On)-Off-(On) LT-1580 LT-1581 LT-1584 LT-1585 21 amber clear red Double Pole Solder Lug .250 Tab QC Screw Terms Wire Leads 22 amber clear amber On-None-Off LT-2510 LT-2511 LT-2514 LT-2515 23 amber clear green On-None-(Off) LT-2520 LT-2521 LT-2524 LT-2525 24 amber clear blue (On)-None-Off LT-2530 LT-2531 LT-2534 LT-2535 25 amber clear clear On-None-On LT-2540 LT-2541 LT-2544 LT-2545 30 green --- none On-None-(On) LT-2550 LT-2551 LT-2554 LT-2555 31 green clear red On-Off-On LT-2560 LT-2561 LT-2564 LT-2565 32 green clear amber On-Off-(On) LT-2570 LT-2571 LT-2574 LT-2575 33 green clear green (On)-Off-(On) LT-2580 LT-2581 LT-2584 LT-2585 34 green clear blue 35 green clear clear 40 blue --- none 2 41 blue clear red 2 ACTUATOR STYLE Snapkap Style 1 Paddle 5 Bright Chrome 42 blue clear amber 43 blue clear green 1 Clear Paddle 6 Satin Chrome 44 blue clear blue 4 Solid Color Paddle 7 Black Molded 45 blue clear clear 50 clear --- none Notes: 1 Solid color paddle available with lighting sequence 01, 02, 10 or 20. 51 clear clear red 2 SnapKap Toggle Lenses are available separately. Consult factory. 52 clear clear amber 3 Independent lamp is standard. Dependent lamp with ON-OFF function 53 clear clear green (including momentary) is available with Lighting Sequences 10, 20, 30, 40 and 50. 54 clear clear blue (No light in OFF position.) 55 clear clear clear 4 Green and blue not recommended with 125 volt or 250 volt neon lamps. 5 Additional terminations available. Consult factory for details. 6 Ignition protected (UL 1500) construction is available, consult factory for details. 4 4 LAMP VOLTAGE ( ) Indicates momentary function. incandescent 006 6 volt 012 12 volt 018 18 volt 024 24 volt neon 125N 125 volt neon 250N 250 volt neon .075[1.91] DIA .055[1.40] DIA .125[3.18] DIA .274[6.96] DIA .394[10.00] .437[11.09] .168[4.27] DIA LENS .330[8.38] 15/32-32UNS-2A THREAD .187[4.74] .187[4.74] .250[6.35] KEYWAY .072[1.82] SOLDER LUG .250 TAB (Q.C.) .187 TAB (Q.C.) .379[9.63] X .038[.965] DP .890[22.61] TERMINAL TYPE .715[18.16] #6-32NC-2 .187[4.75] 6.000[152.40] THREAD .865[21.97] .141[3.58] .422[10.72] .370[9.39] .187[4.75] .500[12.70] 1.375[34.92] .750[19.05] .286[7.26] .350[8.89] 1.088[27.64] SCREW PRINTED WIRE LEAD SINGLE POLE (ASSEMBLED) CIRCUIT DOUBLE SNAPKAP TOGGLES 5,6,7 POLE .062[1.57] .250[6.35] .270[6.86] .500[12.70] DIA MOUNTING HOLE .625[15.87] Keyway should point down for maximum water resistance TOGGLE STYLES 1,4 .038[9.65] *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 127 F-Series Single Pole Toggle Switches - Introduction F-Series F-Series SINGLE POLE TOGGLE SWITCHES General purpose workhorses with options tailored to meet most any need. Ratings to 20A 277VAC, various actuator, bushing, termination, and circuit choices allow this versatile switch to easily integrate into a variety of different applications. The F-Series is appropriate for usage in low voltage DC applications. Resources: Download 3D CAD Files IGS STP Product Highlights: Typical Applications: Š Ratings to 20A Š Marine Š Suitable for low voltage 12/24V DC Š Food Service Š Variety of termination options Š Generator Š Consult factory for large choice of bushing/toggle Š Industrial Control length combinations Š Office Automation 128 www.carlingtech.com F-Series Single Pole Toggle Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength Mechanical Life 1000V - live to dead metal parts 100,000 cycles Electrical Life Operating Temperature 50,000 cycles - maintained 0°F to 150°F (-17.8°C to +65.6°C) 25,000 cycles - momentary 2FA54 73 / TABS 1 2 3 Base Part Number Actuator Tab Terminals Style 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / CIRCUITRY / RATING / 2 ACTUATOR STYLE 1 2 TERMINATION BAT STYLE TOGGLE 10A 250VAC; 15A 125VAC; 3/4 HP 125-250VAC unsealed sealed toggle length bushing length Solder Lug .250 Tab QC Screw Terminals 73 78 0.687 0.465 On-None-Off 2FA53 2FA53- . . . /TABS 2FA54 E3 E8 2.000 0.465 (On)-None-Off 6FA53 6FA53- . . . /TABS 6FA54 On-None-(Off) 6FA57 6FA57- . . . /TABS 6FA58 On-None-On 2FB53 2FB53- . . . /TABS 2FB54 3 TAB TERMINALS On-None-(On) 6FB53 6FB53- . . . /TABS 6FB54 /TABS Tab Terminals On-Off-On 2FC53 2FC53- . . . /TABS 2FC54 (blank) Leave blank if tab terminals not required. On-Off-(On) 6FC57 6FC57- . . . /TABS 6FC58 (On)-Off-(On) 6FC53 6FC53- . . . /TABS 6FC54 Additional ratings up to 20A 125VAC, 12A 250VAC, 1HP 120-240 VAC available. Consult factory for specifics. Notes: 1 Consult factory for .187 tab, wire lead and combination screw/tab/solder lug termination callouts. 2 Additional toggle options are available. Consult factory. ( ) indicates momentary function. .075 [1.91] DIA .055 [1.40] DIA .125 [3.18] DIA 15/32-32UNS-2A .437 [11.09] .394 [10.00] .330 [8.38] THREAD .250 [6.35] .187 [4.74] .187 [4.74] KEYWAY SOLDER LUG .250 TAB (Q.C.) .187 TAB (Q.C.) .687 [17.44] .072 [1.82] X .038 [.965] DP TERMINAL TYPE .465 [11.81] #6-32NC-2 6.00 [152.40] THREAD .141 [3.58] .670 [17.02] .370 [9.39] .500 [12.70] .286 [7.26] SCREW WIRE LEAD (ASSEMBLED) 1.134 [28.80] .634 [16.10] .348 [8.84] .062 [1.57] .376 [9.55] .500 [12.70] DIA .500 [12.70] DIA .500 [12.70] DIA .038 [9.65] .125 [3.17] DIA MOUNTING HOLE WITH KEYWAY WITH LOCKING RING *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 129 G-Series Toggle Switches - Introduction G-Series G-Series TOGGLE SWITCHES General purpose workhorses with options tailored to meet most any need. Ratings to 20A 277VAC, international approvals, various actuator, bushing, termination, and circuit choices allow this toggle switch to easily integrate into a variety of different applications. The G-Series is appropriate for usage in low voltage DC applications. Resources: Download 3D CAD Files IGS STP Product Highlights: Typical Applications: Š Ratings to 20A 277VAC available Š Marine Š Metal bat or nylon bat/paddle actuator styles Š Food Service Š UL, CSA and VDE approvals for select circuits Š Generator Š Suitable for low voltage 12/24V DC Š Industrial Control Š Office Automation 130 www.carlingtech.com G-Series Toggle Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength Electrical Life UL/CSA: 1000V - live to dead 50,000 cycles - maintained metal parts & opposite polarity 25,000 cycles - momentary Mechanical Life VDE: 4000V - live to dead metal parts; 1250V - opposite polarity & 100,000 cycles across open contacts Operating Temperature 32°F to 185°F (0° to 85°C) 2GM51 73 1 2 Base Part Number Actuator Style 3 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / CIRCUITRY / RATING / TERMINATION Single Pole in Double Pole base Double Pole 10A 250VAC, 15A 125VAC, 3/4 HP 125-250VAC solder lug .250 tab screw term. solder lug .250 tab screw term. 2GA50 2GA51 2GA54 On-None-Off 2GK50 2GK51 2GK54 6GA5A 6GA5B 6GA5E (On)-None-Off 6GK5A 6GK5B 6GK5E 6GA5L 6GA5M 6GA5S On-None-(Off) 6GK5L 6GK5M 6GK5S 2GB50 2GB51 2GB54 On-None-On 2GL50 2GL51 2GL54 6GB5A 6GB5B 6GB5E On-None-(On) 6GL5A 6GL5B 6GL5E 2GC50 2GC51 2GC54 On-Off-On 2GM50 2GM51 2GM54 6GC5A 6GC5B 6GC5E On-Off-(On) 6GM5A 6GM5B 6GM5E 6GC5L 6GC5M 6GC5S (On)-Off-(On) 6GM5L 6GM5M 6GM5S 1 10A 250VAC, 15A 125VAC, 12 (6)A 250VAC T85/55 ENEC/VDE Approved 2GA90 2GA91 - On-None-Off 2GK90 2GK91 2GB90 2GB91 - On-None-On 2GL90 2GL91 2GC90 2GC91 - On-Off-On 2GM90 2GM91 Additional ratings up to 20A 125VAC, 12A 250VAC, 1HP 120-240 VAC available. Consult factory for specifics. 4 2 ACTUATOR STYLE unsealed sealed toggle length bushing length BAT 73 78 0.687 0.465 5 PADDLE NBL3 NBL8 0.687 0.465 2 BAT D-3B-B - 0.687 0.379 2 PADDLE - D-4B-B 0.687 0.379 Notes: 1 Not available with 73 or NBL3 style toggles, T55 with 78 and NBL8 style toggles. 2 All nylon bushing and toggle. 3 Consult factory for .187 tab, wire lead and combination screw/tab/solder lug termination callouts. 4 Additional actuator options available. Consult factory. 5 Nylon toggle with black ebanol plated bushing. ( ) Indicates momentary function. .075 [1.91] DIA .687 [17.44] .055 [1.40] DIA .125 [3.18] DIA 15/32-32UNS-2A THREAD .394 [10.00] .437 [11.09] .330 [8.38] .187 [4.74] .187 [4.74] .250 [6.35] SOLDER LUG .250 TAB (Q.C.) .187 TAB (Q.C.) .465 [11.81] .778 [19.76] TERMINAL TYPE #6-32NC-2 .187 [4.75] 1.308 [33.22] .750 [19.05] 6.00 [152.40] THREAD .422 [10.72] .141 [3.58] KEYWAY .370 [9.39] .187 [4.75] .072 [1.82] .500 [12.70] X .038 [.965] DP .286 [7.26] .350 [8.89] .778 [19.76] SCREW PRINTED WIRE LEAD (ASSEMBLED) CIRCUIT .490 [22.86] .062 [1.57] .376 [9.55] .500 [12.70] DIA .500 [12.70] DIA .500 [12.70] DIA .750 [19.05] .038 [9.65] .075 [1.905] .125 [3.17] DIA IEC APPROVED CONSTRUCTION MOUNTING HOLE WITH KEYWAY WITH LOCKING RING *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 131 H/I-Series Toggle Switches - Introduction H/I-Series H/I-Series TOGGLE SWITCHES General purpose workhorses with options tailored to meet most any need. Ratings to 17A 125VAC, various actuator, bushing, termination, and circuit choices allow this toggle to easily integrate into a variety of different applications. The H/I-Series is appropriate for usage in low voltage DC applications. Product Highlights: Typical Applications: Š Ratings up to 600VAC Š Food Service Š Available reversing and progressive switch circuits Š Generator Š Variety of termination options Š Industrial Control Š Consult factory for large choice of bushing/toggle Š Office Automation length combinations 132 www.carlingtech.com H/I-Series Toggle Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength Mechanical Life UL/CSA: 1000V - live to dead 100,000 cycles metal parts Operating Temperature Electrical Life 32°F to 185°F (0° to 85°C) 50,000 cycles - maintained 25,000 cycles - momentary HK251 73 1 2 Base Part Number Actuator Style 2 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / CIRCUITRY / RATING / TERMINATION 10A 250VAC, 15A 125VAC, 3/4 HP 125-250VAC, 1, 2 or 3 phase Three Pole Four Pole solder .250 tab screw wire solder .250 tab screw wire lug tab term. leads lug tab term. leads HK250 HK251 HK254 HK255 Off-None-On IK250 IK251 IK254 IK255 HK25A HK25B HK25E HK25F Off-None-(On) IK25A IK25B IK25E IK25F HK25L HK25M HK25S HK25S On-None-(Off) IK25L IK25M IK25S IK25T HL250 HL251 HL254 HL25E On-None-On IL250 IL251 IL254 IL255 HL25A HL25B HL25E HL25F On-None-(On) IL25A IL25B IL25E IL25F HM250 HM251 HM254 HM255 On-Off-On IM250 IM251 IM254 IM255 HM25A HM25B HM25E HM25F On-Off-(On) IM25A IM25B IM25E IM25F HM25L HM25M HM25S HM25T (On)-Off-(On) IM25L IM25M IM25S IM25T Additional ratings up to 20A 125VAC, 12A 250VAC, 1HP 120-240 VAC available. Consult factory for specifics. 1 2 ACTUATOR STYLE unsealed sealed toggle length bushing length BAT 73 78 0.687 0.465 E3 E8 2.000 0.465 3 PADDLE NBL3 NBL8 0.687 0.465 Notes: 1 Additional actuator options available. Consult factory for details. 2 Consult factory for .187 tab and combination screw/tab/solder lug termination callouts. 3 Nylon toggle with black ebanol plated bushing. ( ) Indicates momentary function. .075[1.91] DIA .055[1.40] DIA .125[3.18] DIA .394[10.00] 15/32-32UNS-2A .437[11.09] .330[8.38] THREAD KEYWAY .465[11.81] .072[1.82] .687[17.44] .187[4.74] .187[4.74] .250[6.35] X .038[.965] DP SOLDER LUG .250 TAB (Q.C.) .187 TAB (Q.C.) .803[20.40] TERMINAL TYPE 3-POLE #6-32NC-2 6.000[152.40] THREAD .141[3.58] 1.308[33.22] 1.088[27.64] .422[10.72] KEYWAY .370[9.39] .072[1.82] .500[12.70] .465[11.81] X .038[.965] DP .286[7.26] .687[17.44] SCREW WIRE LEAD NYLON (ASSEMBLED) .803[20.40] TOGGLE .062[1.57] .376[9.55] .500[12.70] DIA IN .500[12.70] DIA 4-POLE BASE 1.436[36.47] .500[12.70] DIA 1.308[33.22] .038[9.65] .125[3.17] DIA .422[10.72] MOUNTING HOLE WITH KEYWAY WITH LOCKING RING *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 133 C-Series Single Pole Toggle Switches - Introduction C-Series C-Series SINGLE POLE TOGGLE SWITCHES The C-Series single pole compact high current toggle switches are ideal for applications with back panel size constraints. These switches feature self-cleaning contacts and ratings up to 20A 125VAC, 10A 250VAC, 1 1/2 HP 125-250VAC. With a rugged metal construction, these switches figure prominently in markets with stringent current carrying requirements. Product Highlights: Typical Applications: Š Ratings to 20A 125VAC and 1.5HP 125-250VAC Š Environmental Controls Š Compact size Š Marine Š Self-cleaning wiping style contacts Š Food Service Š 4 termination choices Š Vacuum Cleaners 134 www.carlingtech.com C-Series Single Pole Toggle Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength Mechanical Life 1000V - live to dead metal parts 100,000 cycles and opposite polarity. Operating Temperature Electrical Life 32°F to 185°F (0°C to 85°C) 25,000 cycles CA201 73 1 2 Base Part Number Actuator Style 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / POLES / CIRCUITRY / RATING / TERMINATION 10A 250VAC, 20A 125VAC, 1 1/2 HP 125-250VAC Single Pole Solder Lug .250 Tab Screw Term. Wire Leads On-None-Off CA200 CA201 CA204 CA205 On-None-On CB200 CB201 CB204 CB205 1 2 ACTUATOR STYLE unsealed sealed toggle length bushing length BAT 73 78 0.687 0.465 Notes: 1 Additional toggle styles available. Consult factory. .125[3.17] DIA .075[1.90] DIA .375[9.52] 15/32-32UNS-2A THREAD .250[6.35] .250[6.35] .250 .250 T TAB (Q.C.) AB (Q.C.) SOLDER LUG KEYWAY .072[1.82] .687[17.44] X TERMINAL TYPE .038[.965] DP #6-32NC-2 THREAD 6.000[152.40] .465[11.81] .141[3.58] .370[9.39] .500[12.70] .585[14.86] .286[7.26] SCREW WIRE LEAD (ASSEMBLED) .312[7.92] .500[12.70] DIA .376[9.55] .062[1.57] .500[12.70] DIA .875[22.22] .522[13.26] .500[12.70] DIA .038[9.65] .125[3.17] DIA MOUNTING HOLE WITH KEYWAY WITH LOCKING RING *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 135 D-Series Single Pole Toggle Switches - Introduction D-Series D-Series SINGLE POLE TOGGLE SWITCHES The D-Series single pole compact high current toggle switches are ideal for applications with back panel size constraints. These switches feature self-cleaning contacts and ratings up to 20A 125VAC, 10A 250VAC, 1 1/2 HP 125-250VAC. With an economical double insulated all nylon construction, these switches figure prominently in markets with stringent current carrying requirements. Product Highlights: Typical Applications: Š Compact all nylon double insulated construction Š Environmental Controls Š Ratings to 20A 125VAC, 1.5 HP 125-250VAC Š Marine Š Integrated wire lead construction Š Food Service Š Paddle of Bat style actuators Š Vacuum Cleaners 136 www.carlingtech.com D-Series Single Pole Toggle Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength Electrical Life UL/CSA: 1000V - live to dead 50,000 cycles metal parts & opposite polarity Mechanical Life TUV: 4000V - live to dead metal parts; 750V - across open contacts 100,000 cycles Operating Temperature 32°F to 185°F (0° to 85°C) DA221 P B B 1 2 3 4 Base Part Number Actuator Actuator Bushing Style Color Color 1 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / CIRCUITRY / RATING / TERMINATION 10A 250VAC, 20A 125VAC, 1 1/2 HP 125-250VAC Solder Lug .250 Tab Wire Leads On-None-Off DA220 DA221 DA225 On-None-On DB220 DB221 DB225 On-Off-On DC220 DC221 DC225 5A 250VAC, 10A 125VAC, 1/2 HP 125-250VAC, 4(4) 250VACμ TUV approved Wire Leads Solder Lugs .250 Tabs On-None-Off DA945 DA940 DA941 2 ACTUATOR STYLE B Bat P Paddle 2 3 ACTUATOR COLOR B Black W White 2 4 BUSHING COLOR B Black W White Notes: 1 DA945 available with wire leads and ON-OFF circuit only. 2 Additional colors available. Please consult factory. .156[3.96] DIA .069[1.75] DIA 6.000[152.4] .375[9.52] .500[12.70] .250[6.35] .250[6.35] INTEGRATED WIRE LEAD SOLDER LUG .250 TAB (Q.C.) (no exposed conductors) KEYWAY .072[1.82] .687[17.44] X TERMINAL TYPE .038[.965] DP .280[7.11] .687[17.44] .500[12.70] DIA .062[1.57] .376[9.55] .500[12.70] DIA .375[9.52] .500[12.70] DIA .038[9.65] .125[3.17] DIA .588[14.93] 1.000[25.40] MOUNTING HOLE WITH KEYWAY WITH LOCKING RING *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 137 110/216-Series Heavy Action Toggle Switches - Introduction 110/216-Series 110/216 HEAVY ACTION TOGGLE SWITCHES The 110/216-Series is a compactly designed, versatile metal construction toggle switch which is appropriate for a variety of uses. Features include single or double pole options, maintained or momentary construction with termination choices including solder lug end or bottom, wire leads and .250 tab terminals. The quick make/quick break contact mechanism makes the switch suitable for high voltage (125-250 volt) applications. Product Highlights: Typical Applications: Š 125/250V AC or DC rated Š Small Appliance Š Compact space saving envelope Š Floor Maintenance Š Single or double pole Š Lighting Š 2 position Maintained or Momentary circuits 138 www.carlingtech.com 110/216-Series Heavy Action Toggle Switches - General & Dimensional Specifications, Ordering Scheme Dielectric Strength Mechanical Life UL/CSA: 1000V - live to dead 100,000 cycles metal parts & opposite polarity Operating Temperature Electrical Life 0°F to 150°F (-17.8°C to +65.6°C) 25,000 cycles 110-S 73 1 2 Base Part Number Actuator Style 1 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / CIRCUITRY / RATING / 2 ACTUATOR STYLE 2 TERMINATION BAT STYLE TOGGLE 3A 250V, 6A 125V, AC/DC unsealed sealed toggle length bushing length Solder Lug Solder Lug Screw Wire 52 57 0.375 0.343 (end) (bottom) Terminals Leads 63 68 0.500 0.465 Single Pole 73 78 0.687 0.46555 On-None-Off 110 110-B 110-S 111-16 Off-None-(On) 110-M-NO 110-BM-NO 110-SM-NO 111-16M-NO BALL STYLE TOGGLE On-None-(Off) 110-M-NC 110-BM-NC 110-SM-NC 111-16M-NC unsealed sealed toggle length bushing length Double Pole 21 - 0.375 0.250 On-None-Off 2BK62 - - 2BK65 22 - 0.375 0.343 On-None-On 2BL62 - - 2BL65 25 - 0.375 0.875 1A 250V, 3A 125V, AC/DC Notes: 1 Momentary function only available with 73 toggles. Single Pole 2 160H and 110-Series are available with .250 tab terminals. Add suffix /TABS to end On-None-On 112 - - 112-A of part number. ex. 110-73/TABS On-None-(On) 112-M - - 112-M-A ( ) Indicates momentary function. Double Pole On-None-Off 216 - - 216A Off-None-(On) 216-M-NO - - 216A-M-ANO On-None-(Off) 216-M-NC - - 216A-M-ANC On-None-On 316 316-B - - On-None-(On) 316-M 316-BM - - 2 circuit 1 On - 1 Off 516 516-B - 516-A 1 (On) - 1 (Off) 516-M 516-BM - 516-AM 6A 120VAC Single Pole On-None-On 2BB62 - - 2BB65 5A 250V, 10A 125V, 1/4HP, 125V Single Pole On-None-Off 160H 160H-B 160H-S 160H-A .075[1.90] DIA .070[1.77] DIA .093[2.36] DIA .250[6.35] .174[4.42] 15/32-32UNS-2A THREAD KEYWAY KEYWAY .072[1.82] .072[1.82] .120[3.05] X X .687[17.46] .293[7.44] .351[8.92] .038[.965] DP .038[.965] DP .580[14.73] .250 TAB (Q.C.) SOLDER LUG SOLDER LUG .465[11.81] (SPST only) (bottom) TERMINAL TYPE .465[11.81] #6-32NC-2 .528[13.41] THREAD 6.000[152.4] .984[25.00] 112, 2BK, 2BL 2BL62 SERIES SERIES .270[6.86] .500[12.70] .687[17.46] .415[10.54] KEYWAY .072[1.82] SCREW INTEGRATED WIRE LEAD X (ASSEMBLED) (no exposed conductors) .038[.965] DP .376[9.55] .062[1.57] .500[12.70] DIA .560[14.22] .500[12.70] DIA .465[11.81] 110 SERIES .038[9.65] .500[12.70] DIA .125[3.17] DIA .890[22.60] .524[13.31] MOUNTING HOLE WITH KEYWAY WITH LOCKING RING *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 139 DK/EK-Series Heavy Duty Toggle Switches - Introduction DK/EK-Series DK/EK HEAVY DUTY TOGGLE SWITCHES The switch that can handle your heavy duty requirements. Single or double pole with wire lead or screw terminations, and ratings to 20A 125V 10A 250V, the ac/dc DK/EK-Series is the most heavy duty toggle switch in the Carling line. Its sturdy metal construction and stiff actuation force will withstand the abuses of virtually any stringent application. The quick make/quick break contact mechanism is ideal for high voltage DC applications. Product Highlights: Typical Applications: Š Ratings up to 20A 125V AC or DC Š Industrial Motor Control Š Screw Term or Wire Lead terminations Š General Purpose Š Quick Make / Quick Break contact mechanism Š Bat or Ball style toggle options 140 www.carlingtech.com DK/EK-Series Heavy Duty Toggle Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength Mechanical Life UL/CSA: 1000V - live to dead 100,000 cycles metal parts & opposite polarity Operating Temperature Electrical Life 0°F to 150°F (-17.8°C to +65.6°C) 25,000 cycles DK284 73 1 2 Base Part Number Actuator Style 1 2 ACTUATOR STYLE 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / POLES / CIRCUITRY / BAT STYLE TOGGLE RATING / TERMINATION unsealed toggle length bushing length 73 0.687 0.465 8A 250V, 16A 125V, 1 HP 125-250V Screw Terminals Wire Leads BALL STYLE TOGGLE Single Pole unsealed toggle length bushing length On-None-Off DA284 DA285 32 0.500 0.343 Double Pole On-None-Off DK284 DK285 Notes: 1 Additional toggle lengths available. Consult factory for details. 10A 250V, 20A 125V, 1 1/2 HP 125-250V Screw Terminals Wire Leads Single Pole On-None-Off EA204 EA205 Double Pole On-None-Off EK204 EK205 #6-32NC-2 THREAD 6.000[152.40] .270[6.86] KEYWAY 15/32-32UNS-2A .500[12.70] .072[1.82] THREAD (TYP) X .038[.965] SCREW .465[11.81] .687[17.44] WIRE LEAD (ASSEMBLED) TERMINAL TYPE .765[19.43] DK SERIES .836[21.23] 1.750[44.45] 1.764[44.80] .376[9.55] KEYWAY .062[1.57] .500[12.70] DIA .072[1.82] .500[12.70] DIA .465[11.81] X .038[.965] .038[9.65] .500[12.70] DIA .687[17.44] .125[3.17] DIA MOUNTING HOLE WITH KEYWAY WITH LOCKING RING .895[22.73] EK SERIES 1.000[25.40] 2.093[53.16] *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 141 MAAOA/215-Series Toggle Switches - Introduction MAAOA/215 MAAOA/215-Series TOGGLE SWITCHES The MAAOA/215-Series toggle switches are single pole, AC rated at 20 amps and 125 VAC. These switches are snap-in mounted, with a phenolic toggle and base, and are suitable for high ambient temperature applications. Product Highlights: Typical Applications: Š High temperature Phenolic base and toggle Š Coffee Makers Š Ratings to 125VAC Š Food Warmers Š Optional embossed On-Off legend Š Choice of screw, .250 Tab or integrated wire lead connections 142 www.carlingtech.com MAAOA/215-Series Toggle Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength Mechanical Life UL/CSA: 1000V - live to dead 100,000 cycles metal parts & opposite polarity Operating Temperature Electrical Life 32°F to 185°F (0°C to 85°C) 25,000 cycles MAAOA BL / ON-OFF 1 2 3 Base Part Number Color Legend 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / CIRCUITRY / RATING / 2 BASE & ACTUATOR COLOR BL Black BN Brown TERMINATION 10A 250 VAC, 20A 125 VAC, 1/2 HP 125-250 VAC .250 Tabs Screw Terms. Wire Leads 1 Single Pole 3 LEGEND On-Off MAAOA 215 215A On-Off (On)-Off MM-021 - - Notes: Panel Cut-Out recommendations: For sheet metal panels, switch must enter panel in same direction as the punch. (Burr on bottom.) Test cut hole in actual material. 1 Imprinting is available. ON-OFF legend is not standard and must be specified after color. If not specified, switch will be manufactured with no legend. ( ) Indicates momentary function. .075[1.90] DIA #6-32NC-2 6.000[152.4] THREAD .365[9.27] .500[12.70] .250[6.35] .270[6.86] .420[10.67] SCREW INTEGRATED WIRE LEAD .250 TAB (Q.C.) (ASSEMBLED) (no exposed conductors) TERMINAL TYPE 1.218[30.94] .156[3.96] .906[23.01] TEST CUT HOLE IN ACTUAL .656[16.66] MATERIAL .379[9.63] MOUNTING HOLE Panel Thickness: .030[.762] min - .090 [2.28] max. Specific cutout dimension range dependent on panel thickness and material. *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 143 Toggle Accessories - Protective Hexboot Carling Technologies full or half hexboot is the perfect complement to Carling’s line of toggle switches. The boot is compatible with 15/32” threaded bushings and will provide extra protection against the elements in harsh environments. Product Highlights: Š Flexible tear-resistant silicone rubber overmolded onto a 15/32” brass hexnut Š Full hexboot completely covers toggle actuator and bushing Š Meets ROHS 2011/65/EU directive Š Inhibits the rotation of switches subjected to low frequency vibration Š Complementary, cost effective addition to Carling’s toggle switches Š Suitable for toggle models: F-Series, G-Series, 110-Series, C-Series, D-Series, DK/EK-Series, H/I-Series, LT-Series Full Hexboot Half Hexboot Part #: 999-37246-001 Part #: 999-37245-001 Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] 0.602 Full Hexboot 0.472 0.256 0.315 0.433 15/32-32NS-2B 0.551 0.630 0.65 Half Hexboot 0.43 0.33 0.47 0.10 0.26 15/32-32NS-2B 0.65 0.75 144 www.carlingtech.com 0.12 0.118 0.104 0.20 0.063 0.087 0.04 0.965 0.22 0.31 0.41 Toggle & Pushbutton - Bushing Accessories Bushing Accessories The hardware options and accessories listed below were specifically designed to be used with toggle and pushbutton switches. The drawings are representative of the actual products. When other hardware options are required, please consult factory. .570 [14.47] .555 [14.09] .621 [15.77] KNURLED .120 [3.04] .070 [1.77] .078 [1.98] KNURLED STANDARD HEXNUT STANDARD FACENUT PLASTIC FACENUT .562 in. [14.27 mm] X .076 in. [1.93 mm] .570 in. [14.47 mm] X .078 in. [1.98 mm] (Wrench Supplied N/C) NICKEL: 380-08602 NICKEL: 380-08693 .625 in. [15.87 mm] X .120 in. [3.04 mm] BLACK: 380-08606 BLACK: 380-08694 BLACK: 384-17126-001 RED: 384-17126-002 WHITE: 384-17126-003 .075 [1.90] .636 [16.15] .593 - .607 .722 [18.33] [15.06 - 15.41] .155 [3.93] .029 [0.73] min. KNURLED .031 [0.78] DRESS FACENUT LOCKWASHER LOCKING RING .636 in. [16.15 mm] X .155 in. [3.93 mm] NICKEL-PLATED: 728-15907 ZINC: 728-15946 NICKEL: 380-08810 BLACK:728-15947 BLACK: 380-08811 All indicator plates are nickel-plated steel. Odd keyway locations, alternate imprints and plating available on special order. Contact factory for minimum quantities and specifications. ON HI ON HIGH ON O O OFF OFF F N F OFF LOW OFF LO OFF YO1 Y02 Y51 Y1O1 Y311 Y500 272-06747 272-06764 272-06842 272-06935 272-07258 272-07293 ALL PLATES SHOWN FIT 15/32" ( .465 [11.81]) BUSHINGS www.carlingtech.com 145 PUSHBUTTON SWITCHES Carling bushing mount, single and double pole push button switches range from 1 to 20 amps. They offer a variety of nylon and metal push button styles with actuation force ranging from light action 0.4 oz to heavy- duty 8 lbs. UL & CSA certified. SELECTOR GUIDE 16-3P 170 / 172 P26 / P27 641 / 110 P / PP 1 1 1 1, 2, 3 1 Poles up to up to up to up to up to 15A 125VAC 6A 125VAC 5A 125VAC 20A 125VAC Ratings 3A 125VAC 10A 250VAC 3A 277VAC 2A 250VAC 10A 250VAC .500” dia .500” dia .500” dia .500” dia .500” dia Mounting Hole [12.7mm] [12.7mm] [12.7mm [12.7mm] [12.7mm] ] Specifications bushing mount bushing mount bushing mount bushing mount bushing mount solder lug .250 tabs solder lug .250 tabs solder lug screw terms solder lug wire leads screw terms Termination wire leads wire leads wire leads PC terms wire leads UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA, TUV Approvals *Options and approvals shown may apply to specific construction combinations only, consult factory for clarification. Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specifications without prior notice. 146 www.carlingtech.com 16-3P-Series Pushbutton Switches - Introduction 16-3P-Series 16-3P PUSHBUTTON SWITCHES The 16-3P-Series pushbutton switches are single pole and AC rated up to 3 amps. These momentary action switches have a slow-make, slow-break contact mechanism and require only light actuation force (4 oz. - 1 lb.). These switches are typically used in general purpose applications requiring finger actuation. Product Highlights: Typical Applications: Š Maintained, Momentary and 2 circuit function Š Test & Measurement choices Š Audio Visual Š Available with optional overtravel plunger action Š Light 4 oz – 1 lb actuation force Š Metal plunger available with optional colored plastic cap www.carlingtech.com 147 16-3P-Series Pushbutton Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength Mechanical Life UL/CSA: 1000V - live to dead 100,000 cycles metal parts Operating Temperature Electrical Life 32°F to 185°F (0°C to 85°C) 25,000 cycles 16-3POFF 4 CBL 1 2 3 Base Part Number Bushing Actuator Style 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / POLES / CIRCUITRY / 2 BUSHING STYLE RATING / TERMINATION 2 .312 length Single Pole Solder Lug Wire Leads 4 .562 length 3A 125VAC 2 Off-(On) 16-3P Off 16-3AP Off 3 ACTUATOR STYLE 1 Off-(On) with overtravel 16-3P Off-Ov 16-3AP Off-Ov CBL black plastic color cap On-(Off) 16-3P On 16-3AP On CRD red plastic color cap 1A 125VAC Notes: On-On 116-P 116-AP 1 Overtravel only available with #4 bushing. 1 On-On with overtravel 116-P-OV 116-AP-OV 2 When selection 3 is left blank, a standard nickel plated plunger is supplied. ( ) Indicates momentary function. 1 On-1 Off (2 circuit) 516-P 516-AP 1 1 On-1 Off with overtravel (2 circuit) 516-P-OV 516-AP-OV 6.000[152.4] .080[2.03] DIA .230[5.84] .500[12.70] 15/32-32UNS-2A INTEGRATED WIRE LEAD THREAD SOLDER LUG (no exposed conductors) .140[3.56] .345[8.76] DIA TERMINAL TYPE KEYWAY .327[8.30] .072[1.82] X .510[12.95] .038[.965] DP .562[14.27] .062[1.57] .500[12.70] DIA .500[12.70] DIA .478[12.14] .038[9.65] MOUNTING HOLE WITH KEYWAY .359[9.12] 1.132[28.75] *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. 148 www.carlingtech.com 170/172-Series Pushbutton Switches - Introduction 170/172-Series 170/172 PUSHBUTTON SWITCHES The 170/172-Series pushbutton switches are single pole, high amperage switches suitable for shallow back panel applications. These switches are momentary action and require an actuation force of 2.5 lbs. The 170/172-Series switches are equipped with a slow-make, slow-break contact mechanism and are rated at 15 amps at 125VAC. Product Highlights: Typical Applications: Š Rated to 15A 125VAC Š Test & Measurement Š Sturdy metal clad construction Š Meters Š Metal plunger available with optional colored Š Horns plastic cap Š Momentary On or Momentary Off circuitry www.carlingtech.com 149 170/172-Series Pushbutton Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength Mechanical Life UL/CSA: 1000V - live to dead 100,000 cycles metal parts Operating Temperature Electrical Life 32°F to 185°F (0°C to 85°C) 25,000 cycles - Momentary 172 CBL 1 2 Base Part Number Cap Style/Color 1 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / POLES / CIRCUITRY / 2 CAP STYLE / COLOR RATING / TERMINATION CBL Black Plastic 10A 250VAC; 15A 125VAC CGN Green Plastic Single Pole Solder Lug Wire Leads Screw Terms. CRD Red Plastic On-(Off) 170-B 170-A 170 CWH White Plastic Off-(On) 172-B 172-A 172 Notes: 1 When selection 2 is left blank, a standard nickel plated plunger is supplied. ( ) Indicates momentary function. #6-32NC-2 .285[7.24] .122[3.10] DIA THREAD .270[6.86] DIA 6.000[152.40] 15/32-32UNS-2A THREAD .500[12.70] .140[3.56] .190[4.83] .345[8.76] DIA SCREW SOLDER LUG WIRE LEAD (ASSEMBLED) KEYWAY .072[1.82] TERMINAL TYPE X .038[.965] DP .320[8.13] 9/16 HEX NUT .240[6.10] .500[12.70] DIA .562[14.27] (1) REQ'D .604[15.34] 170 172 NICKEL PLATED MOUNTING HOLE .062[1.57] 1.382[35.10] .576[14.63] .460[11.68] .370[9.40] BINDING HEAD .500[12.70] .038[.965] SCREWS DIA 170 172 PLASTIC WITH KEYWAY *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. 150 www.carlingtech.com P26-Series Pushbutton Switches - Introduction P26-Series P26-Series PUSHBUTTON SWITCHES The P26-Series pushbutton switches are single pole, AC rated for 6 amps at 125 VAC and suitable for shallow back panel applications. These switches are momentary action with a medium actuation force (13 oz. typical). The P26-Series switch is equipped with a slow-make, slow-break contact mechanism. Product Highlights: Typical Applications: Š 6A 125VAC, 3A 277VAC rated Š Intercoms Š Momentary On or Momentary Off circuitry Š Security System Š 4 bushing size combinations Š Electronic Signs Š Round Metal, Concave Metal and Nylon Style Š Marine Actuators Š Lighting www.carlingtech.com 151 P26-Series Pushbutton Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength Mechanical Life UL/CSA: 1000V - live to dead 100,000 cycles metal parts Operating Temperature Electrical Life 32°F to 185°F (0°C to 85°C) 25,000 cycles P26L 1D BL 1 2 3 Base Part Number Bushing Style Button Style/Color 2 BUSHING STYLE 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / POLES / CIRCUITRY / length diameter RATING / TERMINATION 1A .406 .375 Single Pole Solder Lug .250 Tab Wire Leads 1B .406 .468 3A 250VAC, 6A 125 VAC, 3/4A 125V 1C .465 .375 Off - (On) P26A P26B P26F 3 1D .465 .468 On - (Off) P26L - P26T 1 3A 277VAC, 6A 125 VAC Off - (On) P267A P267B P267F On - (Off) P267L - P267T 3 BUTTON STYLE / COLOR BL Black Nylon RD Red Nylon 2 RND MTL Round Metal Notes: 2 CON MTL Concave Metal 1 Additional ratings available. Consult factory for details 2 Only available with 1D bushing in .562 length 3 Length is .562 for RND MTL and CON MTL buttoms ( ) Indicates momentary function. .075[1.90] DIA .093[2.36] 6.000[152.4] .250[6.35] DIA 15/32-32UNS-2A THREAD .500[12.70] .293[7.44] .351[8.92] .468[11.89] DIA INTEGRATED WIRE LEAD .250 TAB (Q.C.) SOLDER LUG (no exposed conductors) (Momentary ON only) .248[6.29] DIA TERMINAL TYPE .250[6.35] KEYWAY .465[11.81] .072[1.82] X .062[1.57] .500[12.70] DIA .038[.965] DP .500[12.70] DIA .542[13.76] .038[.965] .524[13.30] MOUNTING HOLE WITH KEYWAY 1.183[30.04] *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. 152 www.carlingtech.com P27-Series Pushbutton Switches - Introduction P27-Series P27-Series PUSHBUTTON SWITCHES The P27-Series pushbutton switches are single pole, AC rated switches suitable for general purpose applications with a shallow back panel. These switches are momentary action with a medium actuation force (26 oz. typical). The P27-Series switch is equipped with a slow-make, slow-break contact mechanism, rated at 6 amps with a nylon concave pushbutton. Product Highlights: Typical Applications: Š Ratings to 6A 125VAC 3A 250VAC Š Intercoms Š Momentary On or Momentary Off circuitry Š Security System Š .250 Tab, Solder Lug or Wire Lead terminations Š Electronic Signs Š Shallow space saving envelope Š Marine www.carlingtech.com 153 P27-Series Pushbutton Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength Mechanical Life UL/CSA: 1000V - live to dead 100,000 cycles metal parts Operating Temperature Electrical Life 32°F to 185°F (0°C to 85°C) 25,000 cycles P27A BL 1 2 Base Part Number Button Color 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / POLES / CIRCUITRY / 3 BUTTON STYLE / COLOR RATING / TERMINATION BL Black Single Pole Solder Lug .250 Tab Wire Leads RD Red 3A 250VAC, 6A 125 VAC, 3/4A 125V WH White Off - (On) P27A P27B P27F On - (Off) P27L - P27T Notes: ( ) Indicates momentary function. .075 [1.90] DIA .093 [2.36] DIA .250 [6.35] 6.00 [152.4] 15/32-32UNS-2A THREAD .500 [12.70] .293 [7.44] .351[8.92] .250 TAB (Q.C.) INTEGRATED WIRE LEAD SOLDER LUG (Momentary ON only) (no exposed conductors) .468 [11.89] DIA .420 [10.67] DIA TERMINAL TYPE .250 [6.35] .562 [14.27] KEYWAY .072 [1.82] .500 [12.70] DIA X .038 [.965] DP .542 [13.76] MOUNTING HOLE .524 [13.30] 1.183 [30.04] *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. 154 www.carlingtech.com 641-Series Pushbutton Switches - Introduction 641-Series 641-Series PUSHBUTTON SWITCHES The single, double and triple pole 641-Series represents the most compact offerings of the Carling’s pushbutton switch line. These switches are UL approved and meet ENEC spacing requirements. Additionally, the new 3-pole switch affords the versatility to control an extra function or indicator light. Rugged metal construction, self-cleaning contacts and stiff actuation force (3-3 1/2 lbs. typical) have made these switches ideal for most “foot pedal” type applications. These alternate action switches fit a standard .500” mounting hole with options of solder lug, wire lead and PC terminals. Resources: Download 3D CAD Files IGS STP Product Highlights: Typical Applications: Š Available in 1-3 poles Š Music Equipment Š 3+ lbs. actuation force ideal for Foot pedal Š Test & Measurement Devices applications Š Audio-Visual Equipment Š Solder Lug, Wire Lead or PC Terminal options Š Appliances Š Self-cleaning wiping style contacts www.carlingtech.com 155 641-Series Pushbutton Switches - General Specifications Electrical Physical Rating 5A 125VAC, 2A 250VAC Function Circuits Three Pole Single Throw, TPST Three Pole Double Throw, TPDT Dielectric Strength 1500V RMS Operation Alternate Action, Push ON, Insulation Resistance 50 Megohms Push OFF Initial Contact Resistance 10 Milli Ohm max @ 4Vdc Button Travel 0.19 (4.83mm) Electrical Life 50,000 Cycles Actuation Force 3 to 5 LB, 1360 to 2268 g Terminals Solder Lug, Wire Leads Base Polyester, PBT Glass Filled and PC Button Brass, Nickel Plated Bushing Brass, Nickel Plated Mechanical Plunger Brass, Nickel Plated Mechanical Life 100,000 Cycles Top Plate Stainless Steel Actuator (Internal) Nylon 6/6 Environmental 1 Vibration Sinusoidal Mil STD 202G, Method 204D, Pin (Internal) Nylon 6/6 Test Condition A 0.06DA or 10G’s Driver Cold Rolled Steel 10-500Hz Shock MIL-STD 2020G, Method 213B Springs Music Wire Test Condition K, 30G’s Movable Contact Copper Handling Shock 1 Meter Drop onto Hard Surface, Terminals Brass (tin plated) all surfaces and planes Thermal Shock MIL-STD 2020G, Method 107G Mounting ½” Dia. Hole, with and without Test Condition A -55 C to 85 C keyway, or with locking ring Moisture Resistance MIL-STD 2020G, Method 106F 10 25 C to 65 C Cycles 95% RH Safety & Regulation Agency UL 61058, EN 61058 (3 Pole Version) Thermal Cycling 25 Cycles -40 C to 85 C UL 1054 (1 & 2 Pole Version) Materials RoHS, REACH Operating Temperature 32°F to 185°F (0°C to +85°C) *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. 156 www.carlingtech.com 641-Series Pushbutton Switches - Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications 64111210 1 Part Number 1 1 PART NUMBER: SERIES / POLES / CIRCUITRY / RATING / TERMINATION One Pole Two Pole Three Pole 2A 250VAC, 5A 125VAC solder lug PC term. wire leads. solder lug PC term. wire leads solder lug PC term. wire leads 64111210 64111212 64111215 ON-OFF 64112210 64112212 64112215 64113210 64113212 64113215 64111220 64111222 64111225 ON-ON 64112220 64112222 64112225 64113220 64113222 64113225 Notes: 1 For 1 and 2 pole only. 3 Pole switches use brass Pin .094[2.38] 1OR 2POLE SHOWNWITHSOLDER LUG .093[2.36] DIA 6.000[152.40] 15/32-32UNS-2A .396[10.05] DIA THREAD .500[12.70] .200[5.08] .186[4.72] DIA .468[11.90] KEYWAY .254[6.45] .160[4.06] .072[1.82] X .038[.965] DP SOLDER LUG WIRE LEAD PC TERMINAL 9/16 HEX NUT .378[9.60] (1) REQ'D TERMINAL TYPE .562[14.27] 1.783[45.29] .500[12.70] DIA .376[9.55] .062[1.57] .038[.965] .500[12.70] DIA .500[12.70] DIA .125[3.17] DIA .670[17.02] .560[14.22] MOUNTING HOLE WITH KEYWAY WITH LOCKING RING .406 3POLE SHOWNWITHPC TERMINAL 3POLE SHOWNWITHSOLDER LUG .406 .378 .072 [1.82] X .038 [.965] DP KEYWAY .072 [1.82] X .038 [.965] .562 DP KEYWAY 15/32-32 UNS-2A THREAD .562 15/32-32 UNS-2A .195 THREAD .195 .378 9/16 HEX NUT (FURN. .254 9/16 HEX NUT .216 ASSEMBLED). (FURN. ASSEMBLED). 1.020 1.076 .094 .094 .160 .718 .718 NOTES: .800 .800 1. KEYWAY TOWARD T3 AND 6 FOR ONE AND TWO POLE SWITCHES 1.121 2. KEYWAY TOWARD T4 FOR .272[6.91] TYP THREE POLE SWITCHES. 4 OUTSIDE T1 CORNER LOCATIONS Ø .062[1.57] TYP .345[8.76] .276[7.01] TYP T1 4 OUTSIDE CORNER LOCATIONS .282 [7.16] TYP .270[6.86] Ø .062[1.57] TYP 2 MIDPOINT LOCATIONS .270[6.86] .296[4.37] TYP 2 MIDPOINT LOCATIONS 1 AND 2 POLE PC TERMINAL 3 POLE PC TERMINAL MOUNTING HOLES www.carlingtech.com 157 110/316P-Series Pushbutton Switches - Introduction 110/316P 110/316P-Series PUSHBUTTON SWITCHES The 110/316P-Series provides a compact yet rugged solution to general purpose switch needs. Alternate action, metal construction and stiff (6-8 lb) actuation force have combined to make this switch a pillar in a variety of markets. This versatile switch is available in maintained and momentary circuits with a variety of termination and rating options. Product Highlights: Typical Applications: Š Ratings to 5A 250V, 10A 125V AC or DC Š Music Industry Š Maintained or momentary circuitry Š Audio/Visual Š On-Off, On-On and 2 circuit function options Š Electronic Road Signs Š Choice of 4 different termination options 158 www.carlingtech.com 110/316P-Series Pushbutton Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength Mechanical Life UL/CSA: 1000V - live to dead 100,000 cycles metal parts & opposite polarity Operating Temperature Electrical Life 32°F to 185°F (0°C to 85°C) 25,000 cycles 110-P 1 Part Number 1 PART NUMBER: SERIES / ACTUATOR / CIRCUITRY / RATING / TERMINATION solder lug (end) solder lug (bottom) screw terminals wire leads Single Pole 3A 250V, 6A 125V OFF-ON 110-P 110-BP 110-SP 111-16-P OFF-(ON) 110-PM-OFF 110-PBM-OFF 110-SPM-OFF 111-PM-OFF ON-(OFF) 110-PM-ON 110-PBM-ON 110-SPM-ON 111-PM-ON 5A 250V, 10A 125V, 1/4 HP 125V OFF-ON 160H-P 160H-BP 160H-SP 160H-AP 1A 250V, 3A 125V ON-ON 112-P - - 112-PA ON-(ON) 112-PM - - 112-PAM Double Pole 1A 250V, 3A 125V OFF-ON 216-PP - - 216-PPA OFF-(ON) 216-PM-OFF - - 216-PAM-OFF ON-(OFF) 216-PM-ON - - 216-PAM-ON ON-ON 316-PP 316-B-PP - 316-PPA ON-(ON) 316-PM 316-B-PM - 316-PAM 1 ON - 1 OFF (2 circuit) 516-PP - - 516-PPA 1 (ON) - 1 (OFF) (2 circuit) 516-PM - - 516-PAM Notes: ( ) Indicates momentary function. .075[1.90] DIA .070[1.77] DIA .093[2.36] DIA .250[6.35] .174[4.42] .120[3.05] 15/32-32UNS-2A .293[7.44] .351[8.92] THREAD KEYWAY SIDE .250 TAB (Q.C.) SOLDER LUG SOLDER LUG .437[11.09] .406[10.31] DIA (SPST only) (bottom) TERMINAL TYPE #6-32NC-2 .270[6.85] .270[6.86] 6.000[152.4] THREAD .562[14.27] .080[2.03] DIA .500[12.70] .415[10.54] .542[13.76] END INTEGRATED WIRE LEAD SCREW (ASSEMBLED) TERMINAL (no exposed conductors) (SPST ONLY) .062[1.57] .500[12.70] DIA .524[13.31] 1.183[30.04] .500[12.70] DIA NOTE: .038[9.65] KEYWAY .072[1.82] X .038[.965] DP MOUNTING HOLE WITH KEYWAY *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 159 P-Series Pushbutton Switches - Introduction P-Series P-Series PUSHBUTTON SWITCHES These rugged pushbutton-type switches feature international approvals, ratings to 20A 125VAC and a heavy actuation force (3-5 lbs. typical) which makes this switch ideal for use as a “foot-pedal” switch. The metal bushing and plunger construction enables this alternate action switch to withstand the rigors of most any stringent pushbutton application. Product Highlights: Typical Applications: Š Rugged metal clad construction ideal for foot Š Vacuum Cleaners pedal applications Š Ratings to 20A 125VAC Š UL, CSA and TUV approvals Š Maintained On-Off or On-ON circuitry 160 www.carlingtech.com P-Series Pushbutton Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength Electrical Life UL/CSA: 1000 - live to dead 50,000 cycles metal parts & opposite polarity TUV: 4000V - live to dead metal Mechanical Life parts; 1250V - opposite polarity 100,000 cycles across open contacts Operating Temperature 0°F to 85°F (32°C to 85°C) PA341 1 Part Number 1 PART NUMBER: SERIES / ACTUATOR / CIRCUITRY / RATING / TERMINATION .250 Tab Screw Terms. Wire Leads 1 10A 250VAC, 15A 125VAC, 3/4 HP 120-240 VAC On-Off PA341 PA344 PA345 On-On PB341 PB344 PB345 1 10A 250VAC, 20A 125VAC, 1 1/2 HP 120-240 VAC On-Off PA301 PA304 PA305 On-On PB301 PB304 PB305 2 10A 250VAC, 15A 125VAC, 10(6)a 250 VACu, T85 On-Off PA951 PA954 PA955 Notes: 1 Additional ratings available. Consult factory. 2 UL, CSA & TUV approved. .075[1.90] DIA #6-32NC-2 6.000[152.4] THREAD .365[9.27] 15/32-32UNS-2A .270[6.86] THREAD .500[12.70] .317[8.05] DIA .250[6.35] .283[7.18] SCREW INTEGRATED WIRE LEAD KEYWAY .250 TAB (Q.C.) (ASSEMBLED) (no exposed conductors) .072[1.82] X .038[.965] DP TERMINAL TYPE .562[14.27] .500[12.70] DIA .062[1.57] .982[24.94] .038[.965] .500[12.70] DIA MOUNTING HOLE WITH KEYWAY 1.125[28.58] .398[10.11] .602[15.29] *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 161 PP-Series Pushbutton Switches - Introduction PP-Series PP-Series PUSHBUTTON SWITCHES The PP-Series plastic pushbutton switches are heavy duty, single pole switches with wire leads. They are alternate action, available in single throw construction, with AC ratings up to 15 amps. Both bushing and bracket are made out of nylon. These high current switches are popular within the Appliance market. Product Highlights: Typical Applications: Š Ratings to 15A 125VAC Š Vacuum Cleaners Š All nylon construction Š Stiff actuation force suitable for foot pedal applications Š Integrated wire lead termination 162 www.carlingtech.com PP-Series Pushbutton Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength Mechanical Life UL/CSA: 1000V - live to dead 100,000 cycles metal parts & opposite polarity Operating Temperature Electrical Life 32°F to 185°F (0°C to 85°C) 50,000 cycles PPA525-AC 1 Part Number 1 PART NUMBER: SERIES / ACTUATOR / CIRCUITRY / RATING / TERMINATION Wire Leads 10A 250VAC, 15A 125VAC, 3/4HP 125-250VAC On-Off PPA525-AC 10A 250VAC, 15A 125VAC On-Off PAA515-AC 6.000[152.40] .375 DIA[Ø9.53] .500[12.70] 16AWG INTEGRATED WIRE LEAD (No Exposed Conductors) .250[6.35] TERMINAL TYPE .250[6.35] TRAVEL .565[14.35] .540[13.72] DIA .781[19.84] MAX. .550[13.97] DIA 1.000[25.4] .776[19.71] .540[13.72] MOUNTING HOLE FASTENER 1.120[28.45] FASTENER THICKNESS .010 .610[15.49] 1.308[33.22] OPTIONAL FASTENER *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 163 ROTARY SWITCHES Carling offers four-position, eight-position, and repeating action single pole rotary switches ranging from 1 to 20 amps. UL & CSA certified. SELECTOR GUIDE V-Rotary R135 700 / 800 1, 2 1 1 Poles up to 1.5A 250VAC up to Ratings 15A 24VDC 3A 125VAC 3A 250VAC 20A 12VDC 5A 12VDC 6A 125VAC Sealing / Actuator IP67, ergonomic knob round asymmetrical .375” dia [9.52mm] .830” x 1.450” .500” dia Mounting Hole bushing mount [21.08mm x 36.83mm] [12.7mm] Specifications .500” dia [12.7mm] snap-in mount bushing mount snap-in mount solder lug .125 tabs .250 tabs wire leads solder lug Termination wire leads .250 tabs incandescent, LED n/a n/a Illumination Approvals pending UL, CSA UL, CSA *Options and approvals shown may apply to specific construction combinations only, consult factory for clarification. Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specifications without prior notice. 164 www.carlingtech.com V-Series Contura Rotary Switch - Introduction Rotary V-Series CONTURA ROTARY SWITCHES The V-Series Contura Rotary Switch was designed for maximum performance and reliability leveraging the features of the widely popular V-series Contura Rocker Switches. Available in maintained and momentary circuit options, the V-Series Rotary features a sturdy knob construction, up to three separate LEDs, and fits in an industry standard panel opening. Internally, the V-Series Contura Rotary uses a patented mechanism that translates rotary to linear motion. This allows for common switch functionality and terminal connections with the V-Series rocker version and requires no harness change. A secondary CAM, which helps drive the mechanism, provides definitive detent positions and prevents the switch from stopping between positions, while improving tactile feel. The V-Series Rotary also features an innovative PC board that supports the LED and surface mount resistors; and IP67 sealing protection above panel by utilizing LED and actuator stem seals. Together, these features make the V-Series Contura Rotary switch the best choice available in the market today. Resources: Download 3D CAD Files IGS STP Watch Product Video Product Highlights: Typical Applications: • Accommodates up to three separate LEDs • On/Off Highway Equipment • Patented mechanism translates rotary into linear motion • Marine • Secondary CAM for definitive detent positions • Test & Measurement • PC Board supports LED and surface mount resistors • Instrumentation • IP67 sealing protection above panel • Speed Control • Common terminal & circuit functionality with V-Series Rocker switches, with no harness change required www.carlingtech.com 165 V-Series Contura Rotary Switch - Design Features V-Series Rotary Switch DESIGN FEATURES OPTIONAL PANEL SEAL SEALS PC BOARD TERMINALS Prevents water/dust LED and stem seals provide Supports LEDs and Same pinout as V-Series ingress behind panel IP67 protection above panel surface mount resistors Rocker Switches, requiring no harness change LEDS ROTARY & LINEAR ACTUATOR SECONDARY CAM Up to three Patented mechanism that Provides definitive detent positions with separate LEDs translates rotary to linear motion ball & spring located in rotary actuator 166 www.carlingtech.com V-Series Contura Rotary Switch - General Specifications Electrical Mechanical Rating Mechanical Life 100,000 Cycles Maintained Circuits 50,000 Cycles Momentary Circuits Circuit Voltage Max Current Resistive Knob Impact 50 Gram weight dropped from a height of 18 inches on Top & Sides 2 Position Maintain 12 20 2 Position Momentary 12 20 3 Position All 12 20 Environmental Sealing IP67, in accordance with IEC 60529, 2 Position Maintain 24 15 BS 5490, DIN 40050 & NFC 20 010. 2 Position Momentary 24 15 This rating applies to front panel components of the actual switch only, 3 Position All 24 15 and signifies protection against dust and the prolonged effects of immersion under pressure. Dielectric Strength 1500 Volts RMS Dust Mil STD 810, Method 510.2 Air Velocity Insulation Resistance 50 Megohms 300 Ft/Min Duration 16Hr Initial Contact Resistance 10 Milli Ohm max @ 4VDC Corrosion IEC 68-2-60 Mixed Flowing Gas (MFG) Life 50,000 Cycles Two Position 14 Days 25,000 Cycles Two Position Chemical Splash Gasoline, Diesel, Motor Oil, Brake Fluid, Ammonia, Armour All Momentary and All Three position Salt Spray Mil STD 202G, Method 101, Test Terminals 0.250” (6.3mm) Quick Connect Condition A 96 Hr Vibration Random Mil STD 202G, Method 214 test Condition C 10G’s RMS Physical Vibration Sinusoidal Mil STD 202G, Method 204D, Test Condition A 0.06DA or 10G’s 10-500Hz Function Circuits Double Pole Single Throw, DPST Shock MIL-STD 202G, Method 213B Test Double Pole Double Throw, DPDT Condition K, 30G’s Operation Two and Three Position Handling Shock 1 Meter Drop onto Hard Surface Maintained and Momentary Thermal Shock MIL-STD 202G, Method 107G Test Knob Rotation Two Position 60 Degrees Condition A -55 C to 85 C Three Position 30 Degrees from Moisture Resistance MIL-STD 202G, Method 106F 10, 25 Center C to 65 C Cycles 95% RH Illumination LED; Red, Green, Amber, Yellow, Thermal Cycling 25 Cycles -40 C to 85 C Ignition Protection ISO 8846 with EC Directive 94/25/EC White, Blue for Marine Products Seals LED O-ring(s) – Silicone, Bezel UV Protection 300 hr Xenon Arc, 1.4W/m2 gasket – Neoprene, Knob seal - wavelength 420 nm NBR ESD Human Static Discharge, +/- 15KV Flammability Exceeds FVMSS 302 applied during normal operation Requirements, Exterior Shipping/Handling, frequency range Components, UL 94 V-2 or Better 200-2000 MHz applied voltage is +8KV to +15KV and -8KV to -15KV 3 Interior Components, UL 94 HB or discharge cycles Better Base Polyester, PBT Bracket Nylon 66, PA Knob Polybutylene Terephthalate, PBT 6.5%GF Lens Polycarbonate, PC Connector Nylon 66, PA Mounting Front Panel Snap In, 1.450” (36.83mm) X 0.830” (21.08mm) Panel Thickness, 0.030” – 0.187” (0.76 – 4.75mm) *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 167 V-Series Contura Rotary Switch - Ordering Scheme RV 21 D 2 B 6 0 0 B K R C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Termination Lamp 3 Bracket Actuator Lens Knob Color Series Circuit Rating Illumination Lamp 1 Lamp 2 6, 8 1 SERIES 5 ILLUMINATION RV Rotary Contura Sealed Lamps when illuminated Terminals S NONE A # 1 Independent 8+ 7- 1 2 CIRCUIT B # 1 Dependent 3+ 7- Terminal Connections as viewed ( ) - momentary C # 1 Independent 8+ 7- from bottom of switch: & # 3 Independent 10+ 7- 8 - - 7 DP - double pole uses 1, 2, 3 and 4, 5, 6. D # 1 Dependent 3+ 7- 1 - - 4 & # 3 Dependent 1+ 7- 2 - - 5 E # 1 Independent 8+ 7- 3 - - 6 # 2 Independent 9+ 7- 10 - - 9 # 3 Independent 10+ 7- F # 1 Dependent 3+ 7- Position: 1 2 3 # 2 Independent 9+ 7- DP 2 & 3, 5 & 6 Connected Terminals 1 & 2, 4 & 5 # 3 Dependent 1+ 7- 21 ON NONE OFF G # 1 Dependent 3+ 7- 22 (ON) NONE OFF # 3 Independent 8+ 7- 23 ON NONE (OFF) H # 2 Independent 8+ 7- 24 ON NONE ON J # 1 Independent 8+ 7- 26 ON OFF ON # 2 Independent 10+ 7- 28 (ON) OFF (ON) K # 1 Dependent 3+ 7- SPECIAL CIRCUITS # 2 Dependent 1+ 7- 55 (ON) OFF ON L # 1 Dependent 3+ 7- 61 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3, 4 & 5 1 & 2, 4 & 5 # 2 Independent 8+ 7- 62 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 OFF M # 2 Independent 8+ 7- 64 (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 OFF # 3 Independent 10+ 7- N # 2 Dependent 3+ 7- # 3 Dependent 1+ 7- P # 2 Independent 10+ 7- 3 RATING # 3 Dependent 1+ 7- 1 .4VA 28VDC Resistive B 15A 24V R # 3 Independent 8+ 7- D 20A 12V T # 3 Dependent 1+ 7- 6, 8 6, 7, 8 LAMP #1, 2 AND OR LAMP #3 4 TERMINATION / BASE STYLE Selection 6: above terminal 7; Selection 8: above terminal 8 8 Term 10 Term Termination Jumper No lamp 0 1 2 .250 TAB (QC) - no barriers No LED Red Amber Green Blue White A B .250 TAB (QC) - with barriers No 12VDC C N H E 6 4, 5 4, 5 J K .250 TAB (QC) - no barriers Yes (T2 to T5) 24VDC D P J K 8 Notes: 1 Switch circuit uses terminals 1,2,3,4,5 & 6. Terminals 7,8,9 & 10 are for lamp 7 9 BRACKET COLOR & PANEL SEAL circuit only. Color No Gasket 1 Gasket 2 Gasket 2 Jumper between terminals 2 & 5 for Circuits 61, 62, & 64 to be specified in the Black B C D Termination & Jumper selection. Gray G H J 3 Circuit 61 may be used for SP, OFF-ON-ON circuit. White W Y Z 4 Base will not have terminal insulating barriers when connector and/or jumpers are used. 5 Code J,K are optional for circuits 62 and 64. Customer may provide externally 10 ACTUATOR STYLE ACTUATOR ORIENTATION wired jumper to connect terminals 2 and 5. K Rotary Knob (Standard) ABOVE TERMINALS 6 Lamp #1 located at top end of switch, above terminal 4. Lamp #2 located at top end of switch between terminals 1 & 4. 4 1 Lamp #3 located at top end of switch, above terminal Positive (+) and negative (-) symbols apply to L.E.D. lamps only. 7 Mounting hole size is 1.450” (36.83mm) by 0.830” (21.08mm). To mount multiple switches in single panel cut-out order optional interlocking mounting panels. 8 Lens color for L.E.D.s must be clear, white, or match color of L.E.D. 8 11 LENS COLOR No Lens Z Clear White Amber Green Red Blue 4 9 E K R W 12 KNOB COLOR Black Gray Red White C H S Y 168 www.carlingtech.com V-Series Contura Rotary Switch - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] 1.400 [35.56] 1.700 [43.18] .845 [21.47] 1.079 [27.40] 1.550 [39.37] 10 TERMINAL BASE W/ BARRIERS .960 [24.38] 1.126 [29.24] .250 [6.35] .353 [8.64] X .031[.78] .820 [20.83] .960 [24.38] 10 TERMINAL BASE W/O BARRIERS 8 7 1 4 2 5 3 6 10 9 BOTTOM VIEW SWITCH SHOWN WITH VC1 TERMINAL ARRANGEMENT CONNECTOR 10 TERMINAL 10 TERMINAL BASE 1.266 [32.16] 1.318 [33.48] www.carlingtech.com 169 V-Series Contura Rotary Switch - Circuit Diagrams Circuits Diagrams: CIRCUIT KNOB CIRCUIT KNOB CIRCUIT CIRCUIT CODE CODE DIAGRAM POSITION DIAGRAM POSITION 3 6 3 1 6 4 1 3 2 1 3 21 55 2 5 2 5 3 6 3 1 6 4 2 1 3 1 3 22 61 2 5 2 5 3 6 3 6 2 1 3 1 3 23 62 2 5 2 5 3 1 6 4 3 6 2 1 3 1 3 24 64 2 5 2 5 3 1 6 4 2 1 3 26 LEGEND 2 5 SYMBOL DEFINITION 3 1 6 4 2 TERMINAL LOCATION 1 3 28 MAINTAINED CIRCUIT MOMENTARY CIRCUIT 2 5 INTERNAL CONNECTION (JUMPER TERMINAL) 2 POSITION CONNECTION 2 POSITION CONNECTION P1 P3 2 POSITION P2 P1 P3 3 POSITION 170 www.carlingtech.com V-Series Contura Rotary Switch - Lamp Circuit Diagrams Lamp Circuit Diagrams: LAMP CIRCUIT LAMP CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DIAGRAM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM CODE CODE +8 +8 +3 1 1 2 A L -7 -7 +3 +8 +10 B 1 M 2 3 -7 -7 +8 +10 +3 +1 2 3 C 1 3 N -7 -7 +1 +10 +3 +1 1 3 2 3 D P -7 -7 +8 +8 +9 +10 3 E 1 2 3 R -7 -7 +3 +1 +9 +1 3 1 2 3 F T -7 -7 +8 +3 1 3 G -7 +8 2 H -7 +8 +10 2 1 J -7 +3 +1 1 2 K -7 www.carlingtech.com 171 R135-Series Rotary Switches - Introduction R135-Series R135-Series ROTARY SWITCHES The R135 and R135A-Series rotary switches are single pole, single throw “L” rated up to 3A, feature an ON- OFF repeating action, and are available with a nylon actuating knob; nylon snap-in bracket or nickel-plated brass bushing. These switches are typically used to control lighting functions. Product Highlights: Typical Applications: Š 3A 125VAC “L” rating to control lighting Š Appliance Š Off-On repeating action circuitry Š HVAC Š Integrated wire lead termination Š Bushing or snap in mounting styles 172 www.carlingtech.com R135-Series Rotary Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength Mechanical Life UL/CSA: 1000V - live to dead 100,000 cycles metal parts Operating Temperature Electrical Life 32°F to 185°F (0°C to 85°C) 100,000 cycles R135-A BL 1 2 Base Part Number Knob Color 1 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / CIRCUITRY / RATING / 2 KNOB COLOR TERMINATION BL Black Wire Leads WH White 1.5A 250 VAC; 3A 125 VAC L; 5A 12 VDC OFF-ON repeating .375 threaded bushing R135 OFF-ON repeating nylon snap-in bezel R135-A Notes: Standard Wire Leads are 6” long, stripped 1/2” black. If different length required, please specify at the end of the part number. ex. R135-A-BL/20”. Panel Cut-Out Recommendations: For sheet metal panels, switch must enter panel in same direction as the punch. Burr on bottom. Test cut hole in actual material. 1 Custom colors available. Consult factory. .500[12.70] DIA .700[17.78] DIA .718[18.23] OFF .500[12.70] NYLON BEZEL MOUNTING HOLE Snaps into .500[12.70] Dia. hole Panel Thickness: .020[.508] to .078[1.98] ON ON .600[15.24] .375[9.52] DIA .265[6.73] 6.000[152.40] ROTATION OFF THREADED BUSHING MOUNTING HOLE Fits into .375[9.52] Dia. hole Bushing Length: .312[7.92] *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 173 700/800-Series Rotary Switches - Introduction 700/800 700/800-Series ROTARY SWITCHES The 700 and 800-Series are single pole multi-position, general purpose rotary switches. These switches feature a nylon actuator in a metal clad construction along with a self-cleaning silver plated contact design. The 700 and 800-Series are typically used in applications requiring multi-position speed controls, such as electric fans. Product Highlights: Typical Applications: Š Ratings to 3A 250VAC, 6A 125VAC Š Small Appliance Š Up to 8 available detent positions Š Industrial Control Š Double “D” bushing mount Š Marine Š Sturdy metal clad construction 174 www.carlingtech.com 700/800-Series Rotary Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength Base Material UL/CSA: 1000V (minimum) Steel/Zinc Plate Actuator Material Insulation Resistance Brass/Nickel Plate 100 Megohms (minimum) 700-1A BL 1 2 Base Part Number Knob Color 1 2 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / POLES / CIRCUITRY / RATING / TERMINATION 2 ACTUATOR COLOR BL Black 2A 250VAC; 4A 125VAC; 1A 125V Solder Lugs .250 Tabs Position 1 Position 2 Position 3 Position 4 - 700-A OFF ON ON ON 700-1 700-1A OFF ON - - Notes: 700-2 700-2A OFF ON ON ON repeating for 8 positions 1 700-2 and 700-2A feature 8 detent positions. 700-3 700-3A OFF ON ON OFF 2 800-Series terminal is a combination solder 700-4 700-4A OFF ON ON - lug and quick connect. 700-5 700-5A OFF ON OFF - 700-6 700-6A - ON OFF ON 700-7 700-7A - ON ON - 700-8 700-8A - ON ON ON 700-9 700-9A OFF ON OFF ON 3A 250VAC; 6A 125VAC Switch Positions OFF Position 800-2 2 positions 800-A 1st position 800-3 3 positions 800-A2 2nd position 800-4 4 positions 800-A3 3rd position 800-5 5 positions 800-A4 4th position 800-6 6 positions 800-A5 5th position 800-7 7 positions 800-A6 6th position 800-8 8 positions 800-A7 7th position 800-A8 8th position 700 SERIES POSITION 1 ACTUATOR KNOB .075 [1.90] DIA .475 [12.06] .093 [2.36] POSITION 2 .700 [17.78] DIA DIA 45 TYP .281 [7.13] .475 [12.07] .330 [8.38] 1.125 [28.57] DIA 3 POSITION .187 [4.75] .250 [6.35] .250 TAB (Q.C.) SOLDER LUG 1.150 [29.21] TERMINAL TYPE 4 POSITION .372 [9.44] .468 [11.88] .450 [11.43] 1.537 [39.04] MOUNTING HOLES .072 [1.83] .390 [9.90] POSITION 7 DIA 800 SERIES .281 [7.13] .355 [9.02] POSITION 45 TYP .188 [4.78] 6 POSITION 8 .125 [3.18] .468 [11.88] DIA SOLDER LUG .468 [11.88] DIA 1 1 TERMINAL TYPE POSITION 5 POSITION 1.125 [28.57] DIA 4 POSITION POSITION 2 .468 [11.88] .372 [9.44] 1.417 [35.99] POSITION 3 Notes: 1. Terminal is combination solder lug and quick connect. *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 175 BATTERY DISCONNECT Carling Technologies battery disconnect switches are designed to minimize battery drain, ensure maintenance personnel safety, and when used in conjunction with a padlock, provide vehicle theft protection. SELECTOR GUIDE BD-Series BD1-Series 1 Poles 1 100-300 Amps 250 Amps Ratings 12VDC/24VDC 12VDC/24VDC ergonomic knob; ergonomic knob Actuator removable option available Mounting Hole M8 Bolt and Nut M6/M7 Bolt and Nut Specifications M10 Stud M10 Stud; Termination M14 Stud 19 and 27mm length *Options and approvals shown may apply to specific construction combinations only, consult factory for clarification. Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specifications without prior notice. 176 www.carlingtech.com BD-Series Battery Power Switch - Introduction BD-Series BD-SERIES BATTERY DISCONNECT POWER SWITCH Carling Technologies BD-Series battery disconnect switch is designed to minimize battery drain, ensure maintenance personnel safety, and when used in conjunction with a padlock, provide vehicle theft protection. Resources: Configure a Complete Part Download CAD & Sales Drawing Watch Product Video Product Highlights: Typical Applications: Š 100-300 Amps Š On/Off-Highway Equipment Š 12VDC/24VDC Š Military Š IP67 Sealing Protection Š Marine Š Lock Compatible www.carlingtech.com 177 BD-Series Battery Power Switch - Design Features BD-Series DESIGN FEATURES STUD SLIDING CONTACT ROTARY KNOB SHAFT SEALS BODY SEAL LOCK COMPATIBLE 178 www.carlingtech.com BD-Series Battery Power Switch - General Specifications Electrical Environmental Application Voltage DC Operating Temp. -40 ºC to +85 ºC. Rated voltage: 12VDC / 24VDC Moisture Resistance IEC 60068-2-38 or G/T 2423.34, Test Range of operating voltage: Z/AD: Composite temperature/humidity 12VDC: min 9VDC, max 16VDC; cycle test, ten 24-hour cycles @ -10ºC 24VDC: min 18VDC, max 32VDC to +65ºC, ≤80-96% RH. Current Ratings 12VDC/24VDC: rated 100A, Thermal Cycling IEC 60068-2-14 or GB/T 2423.22, Test max 250A (M10 Studs); Nb, 25 Cycles -40˚C to +85˚C 12VDC/24VDC: rated 300A Thermal Shock IEC 60068-2-14 or GB/T 2423.22, Test (M14 Studs) Na (5 cycles @ -55ºC to +25ºC to Intermittent Current 24VDC/1500A, 3 seconds on, +85ºC to +25ºC) 60 seconds off, 10 cycles: voltage Thermal Resistance IEC 60068-2-1 or GB/T 2423.1 drop should not exceed 400mV Cold: Test A, operate 8 hours @ -40°C between main terminals. IEC 60068-2-2 or GB/T 2423.2 28V/1500A/30 seconds: voltage Heat: Test B, operate 8 hours @ +85°C drop should not exceed 400mV Vibration IEC 60068-2-34 or GB/ T 2423.11, 28V/2000A/5 seconds followed by 10-500 Hz, Random vibration 28V/750A/30 seconds followed by test for 8 hours in each of the 3 28V/250A/24 hours: voltage drop mutually perpendicular axes. 25Gs @ Z should not exceed 100mV axes, 12.5Gs @ X/Y axes. powered. Dielectric Strength 50HZ, 550VAC for 1 minute Salt Spray IEC 60068-2-11 or GB/T 2423.17, between electrically / isolated 48 hours terminals in main circuit; between terminals of main circuit, knob Fire and Smoke IEC 60695-11-10 or GB/T 2408, HB and enclosure. Dust / Waterproof IEC 60529 or GB4208, IP 67 Insulation Resistance Minimum of 100 Megohms 1 min Chemical Splash Gasoline, Diesel, Motor Oil, Brake @ 500VDC Fluid, Ammonia, Armor All Temperature Rise Terminal should not exceed 60°C UV Protection ASTM G155-05a, cycle 11, 300 hr above ambient. Xenon Arc, 1.4W / (m2 Nm), Endurance For M10 Studs: wavelength 420 Nm 2 seconds ON and 2 seconds OFF per operation, load with Physical rated current & voltage. 12V test @14V±0.1V; 24V test @28V±0.2V. Number of Poles 1 pole 50,000 cycles: 100A current; Wiring Terminals Line / Load terminal: M10 brass nuts 20,000 cycles: 200A current; Torque value: M10 (6-8 Nm); 3,000 cycles: 250A current M14 (10-14 Nm) For M14 Studs: Mounting M8 Iron nut, torque value: 2 seconds ON and 6 seconds OFF (10-15 Nm) per operation, load with rated Torque Operation 1.0-3.0 Nm current & voltage. 12V test @14V±0.1V; 24V test @28V±0.2V Body Color Black 3,000 cycles: 300A current Actuator Color Red handle, with white color “Arrow” legends. Weight (M10 Studs): 340±10 g / set; Mechanical (M14 Studs): 385±10 g / set Handling Shock Fully functional after 3 drops from Material Base (PBT glass filled), 1000 mm height. Surface damage Bracket & Knob (nylon glass filled), may occur. Studs (Copper + Tin plating), Endurance More than 100,000 cycles without load Nuts (Brass) *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 179 BD-Series Battery Power Switch - Ordering Scheme & Dimensional Specifications BD A 10 R A 4 5 1 2 3 Series Rating Termination Knob Legend Color 1 SERIES 3 TERMINATION ) BD Battery Disconnect Power Switch 10 M10 Stud (Available only with Rating Code A ) 14 M14 Stud (Available only with Rating Code B 2 RATING / CYCLES 4 KNOB COLOR A 100A @ 24VDC: 50,000 Cycles R Red 200A @ 24VDC: 20,000 Cycles 250A @ 24VDC: 3,000 Cycles B 300A @ 24VDC: 3,000 Cycles 5 LEGEND A Arrow Legend, White Color Note: Refer to General Specifications for test parameters. Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] 180 www.carlingtech.com BD-Series Battery Power Switch - Mounting Method 1 Mounting Method 1: in. [mm] Notes: 1 Switch can be mounted horizontally or vertically. www.carlingtech.com 181 BD-Series Battery Power Switch - Mounting Method 2 Mounting Method 2: in. [mm] Notes: 1 Switch can be mounted horizontally or vertically. 182 www.carlingtech.com BD-Series Battery Power Switch - Wiring Wiring: in. [mm] www.carlingtech.com 183 BD1-Series Battery Power Switch - Introduction BD1-Series BD1-SERIES BATTERY DISCONNECT POWER SWITCH Carling Technologies BD1-Series battery disconnect switch is designed to minimize battery drain, ensure maintenance personnel safety. Additionally, the optional, removable key adds an extra layer of security to protect against vehicle theft. Resources: Configure a Complete Part Download CAD & Sales Drawing Watch Product Video Product Highlights: Typical Applications: • 250 Amps • On/Off-Highway Equipment • 12 or 24VDC • Military • Permanent or Removable Key Options • Marine • IP67 Sealing Protection • Choice of 19mm or 27mm Length Studs 184 www.carlingtech.com BD1-Series Battery Power Switch - Design Features BD1-Series DESIGN FEATURES OFF POSITION ON POSITION OFF POSITION WITH KEY REMOVED STUD TERMINAL BASE SEAL KEY IP67 Sealing Protection Removable option available to provide vehicle theft protection www.carlingtech.com 185 BD1-Series Battery Power Switch - General Specifications Electrical Environmental Application Voltage DC Operating Temp. -40 ºC to +85 ºC. Rated voltage: 12VDC / 24VDC Moisture Resistance IEC 60068-2-38 or G/T 2423.34, Test Range of operating voltage: Z/AD: Composite temperature/humidity 12VDC: min 9VDC, max 16VDC; cycle test, ten 24-hour cycles @ -10ºC 24VDC: min 18VDC, max 32VDC to +65ºC, ≤80-96% RH. Current Ratings 250A@ 12VDC/24VDC Thermal Cycling IEC 60068-2-14 or GB/T 2423.22, Test Contact Voltage Drop Voltage drop≤100mV after 300 sec. Nb, 25 Cycles -40˚C to +85˚C. ON at 200% rated current prior to Thermal Shock GB/T 28046.4-2011, 5.3.2, Test Na endurance test; (100 cycles@ -40ºC to +25ºC to Voltage drop≤500mV after 5 msec. +85ºC to +25ºC). ON at 1600A max. current prior to Thermal Resistance ISO 16750-4 or GB/T 28046.4 Cold: endurance test. Test A, work 24 hours @ -40°C Dielectric Strength 50HZ, 1200VAC for 1 minute ISO 16750-4 or GB/T 28046.4 Heat: between electrically / isolated Test B, work 48 hours @ +85°C. terminals in main circuit; between Vibration IEC 60068-2-34 or GB/ T 2423.11, terminals of main circuit, knob 10-500 Hz, Random vibration and enclosure. test for 8 hours in each of the 3 Insulation Resistance Minimum of 100 Megohms 1 min mutually perpendicular axes. 25Gs @ Z @ 500VDC. axes, 12.5Gs @ X/Y axes, powered. Temperature Rise Terminal should not exceed 90°C Salt Spray IEC 60068-2-11 or GB/T 2423.17, above ambient at rated current after 48 hours. endurance test. Fire and Smoke IEC 60695-11-10 or GB/T 2408, HB Endurance 2 seconds ON and 3 seconds OFF (horizontal burning) and V0 (vertical per operation, load with rated current burning). & voltage. 12V test @14V; Sealing IEC 60529 or GB4208, IP 67 24V test @28V. Total 20,000 cycles: 250A current Chemical Splash Gasoline, Diesel, Motor Oil, Brake ratings, including 4,000 cycles Fluid, Ammonia, Mixture of previous respectively at -40 ºC±2 and five chemicals. +85 ºC±2; UV Protection ASTM G155-05a, cycle 11, 300 hr 12,000 cycles at 23 ºC±2. Xenon Arc, 1.4W / (m2 Nm), Overload 500A: 300 seconds ON; wavelength 420 Nm. 1600A: 30 seconds ON. Mechanical Physical Handling Shock Fully functional after 3 drops from Number of Poles 1 pole 1000 mm height. Surface damage Wiring Terminals Line / Load terminal: brass nuts may occur. Torque value: M10 (10-15 Nm). Endurance Minimum 50,000 cycles without load. Mounting M6/M7 bolt and nut, torque value: 4-5 Nm. Torque Operation 0.5-1.0 Nm. Body Color Black Actuator Color Red Weight Approximately 165g Material Base & Bracket & Key (glass filled nylon), Studs (Tin plated brass), Nuts (Brass) Locking Washers (SUS304). *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. GPS-0010 Rev: B 186 www.carlingtech.com BD1-Series Battery Power Switch - Ordering Scheme & Dimensional Specifications BD1 1 A 2 3 4 1 2 Series Rating Key Style Termination 1 SERIES 3 KEY STYLE 1 BD1 Battery Disconnect Power Switch (1 Pole) A Removable B Non-Removable 2 RATING / CYCLES 4 TERMINATION 1 250A @ 12/24VDC 1 M10 Stud 19 mm length Notes: 2 M10 Stud 27 mm length 1 Individual Keys separately available, reference part number 308-39943-001. Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] Notes: 1 Torque for mounting nut: M6 or M7 (4-5 nm) 2 Torque for wiring nut: M10 (10-15 nm) COS-0099 Rev: A 3 Switch can be mounted vertically or horizontally CLA-0154 Rev: A www.carlingtech.com 187 Terminology, Agency Approvals Terminology Agency Approvals Agency data UL File #E7560 These marks are granted by national certification CSA File # LR9280 bodies for use on products which comply with their Single Pole (SP) A switch device that opens, closes or changes specifications. connection of a single conductor in an electrical circuit. Agency Country Mark Double Pole (DP) A switch device that opens, closes or changes connection of two conductors in an UL USA electrical circuit. Single Throw (ST) A switch that opens, closes or completes a circuit at only one of the extreme positions of UL Canada its actuator. Double Throw (DT) A switch that opens, closes or completes a circuit at both extreme positions of its actuator. UL USA & Canada Normally Open (NO) A momentary switch where one or more circuits are open when the switch actuator is at rest (the normal position.) BEAB United Kingdom Normally Closed (NC) A momentary switch where one or more circuits are closed when the switch actuator is at rest Terminology, Agency Approvals (the normal position.) CSA Canada Power Rating A switches current handling capability measured in amperes, horsepower, lamp loads or combinations thereof, in conjunction with applicable voltage levels. VDE Germany L Rating Denotes the ability of a switch to handle the initial high inrush of a Tungsten Filament Lamp on AC voltage only. TUV Germany T Rating Denotes the ability of a switch to handle the initial high inrush of a tungsten filament lamp on AC or DC voltage. SEMKO Sweden Typical European Rating 16 resistive load amperage (4) motor load amperage NEMKO Norway A amperage 250V voltage ~ AC KEMA Netherlands T85 max. operating temp. in centigrade μ micro-gap (<3mm) approved DEMKO Denmark Microgap (μ) European marking required for contact separation of less than 3mm. Switches with microgap (μ) approval are not acceptable as UTE(USE) France the safety disconnect of equipment from the main power source. The equipment requires an additional means for safe disconnection from SEV Switzerland the main power source such as a cord and plug. Bulb Life Neon 25,000 hours Incandescent 25,000+ hours OVE Austria LED 100,000 hours Lamp Characteristics Neon (120-240V) .002A Current Draw Incandescent 6V .20A Current Draw IMQ Italy 12-14V .08A Current Draw 18V .04A Current Draw 24-28V .04A Current Draw CCC China FIMKO Finland 188 www.carlingtech.com Standard Legend Imprinting Standard Legend Imprinting Codes: YK UA UB US UV UW UX UY MP MR PX MS MT VU MW NZ NX NY YM VW PS PW PZ WG WM RN RP YG TX VD VE VF VG SH SM SN SP SR SY WY WZ UH UJ PD PE PF VC VJ UF UG MU TN NS PB SE VZ YE NN RW PU WA YN UE NM RJ NR YD TL VR SL VA UC VN PK VY UZ RH NU NV RB RC RK RL MZ RG WS WT UD UR WD TY WATER PUMP PA UK WR UU UT YR PM VV WB TB TC TD TE MY PV TA TZ WC PT PN PH RA TU TT YL SK VS UL UM WK TS VT WL VP YJ PJ RY UP NW NP RE RF PP PR TV PC YT YU PL WJ MV RR TK RT SZ VX WF WH PG SJ YA YB RM TM RD RS UN TP TR NT MX YC TW TJ YF TH TF TG YS YH SX RZ YP WN WP WW WX SA SB SC SD ST SU WU WV SV SW VB VH VK VL VM WE SF SG SS RU RV RX Notes: 1 ISO compliant symbols. Consult factory for custom icons. 2 New legend codes recommended for new part set ups. Previous codes still valid for existing customers. www.carlingtech.com 189 Carling Technologies Materials Below is a list of useful product catalogs. Please scan the QR codes below or visit carlingtech.com/onthego for complete details. WEBSITE Switches and Controls Product Selector, Resources, Configurit, Rocker, toggle, pushbutton, rotary, battery Find Rep, Product Materials and Videos. disconnects and controls. carlingtech.com /onthego catalog Mini & Sub-Mini Switches Hydraulic-Magnetic circuit protection Sealed and non-sealed rocker, toggle, 1-6 poles from .02 to 700A with CSA, VDE, TUV, pushbutton and slide options. UL489, UL489A, UL1500 approvals. catalog catalog Thermal circuit protection GFCI/ELCI circuit protection 1 pole from 3 to 60A with UL, cUL, CE, 1-3 poles from 0.10 to 50A with CSA, UL489, UL1500/ISO 8846 approvals. UL1077, UL1053, UL1500 approvals. catalog catalog 190 www.carlingtech.com Carling Technologies Materials Below is a list of useful market specific catalogs and brochures. Please scan the QR codes below or visit carlingtech.com/onthego for complete details. On-Off Highway Marine Switches, Controls and Custom Solutions Circuit Protection and Switches catalog brochure catalog brochure RENEWABLE ENERGY Military Circuit Breakers and Disconnect products COTS Switches and Circuits Breakers catalog brochure catalog brochure Telecom/Datacom Industrial Automation Hydraulic-Magnetic Circuit Breakers Switches and Circuit Breakers catalog brochure brochure www.carlingtech.com 191 Sales Representatives, Distributors & Company Profile Authorized Sales Representatives and Distributors Click on a region of the map below to find your local representatives and distributors or visit www.carlingtech.com/findarep. CANADA EUROPE USA MIDDLE EAST MEXICO AFRICA ASIA-PACIFIC OCEANIA SOUTH AMERICA About Carling Founded in 1920, Carling Technologies is a leading manufacturer of electrical and electronic switches and assemblies, circuit breakers, electronic controls, power distribution units, and multiplexed power distribution systems. With four ISO registered manufacturing facilities and technical sales offices worldwide, Carling Technologies Sales, Service and Engineering teams do much more than manufacture electrical components, they engineer powerful solutions! To learn more about Carling please visit www.carlingtech.com/company-profile. To view all of Carling’s environmental, quality, health & safety certifications please visit www.carlingtech.com/environmental-certifications 192 www.carlingtech.com www.carlingtech.com 193 Worldwide Headquarters Carling Technologies, Inc. 60 Johnson Avenue, Plainville, CT 06062-1177 Phone: 860.793.9281 Fax: 860.793.9231 @ Email: sales carlingtech.com www.carlingtech.com @ Northern Region Sales Office: nrsm carlingtech.com @ Southeast Region Sales Office: sersm carlingtech.com @ Midwest Region Sales Office: mrsm carlingtech.com @ West Region Sales Office: wrsm carlingtech.com @ Latin America Sales Office: larsm carlingtech.com Asia-Pacific Headquarters Carling Technologies, Asia-Pacific Ltd., Suite 1607, 16/F Tower 2, The Gateway, Harbour City, 25 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Phone: Int + 852-2737-2277 Fax: Int + 852-2736-9332 @ Email: sales carlingtech.com.hk @ Shenzhen, China: shenzhen carlingtech.com @ Shanghai, China: shanghai carlingtech.com @ Pune, India: india carlingtech.com @ Kaohsiung, Taiwan: taiwan carlingtech.com @ Yokohama, Japan: japan carlingtech.com | | Europe Middle East Africa Headquarters Carling Technologies LTD 4 Airport Business Park, Exeter Airport, Clyst Honiton, Exeter, Devon, EX5 2UL, UK Phone: Int + 44 1392.364422 Fax: Int + 44 1392.364477 @ Email: ltd.sales carlingtech.com @ Germany: gmbh carlingtech.com @ France: sas carlingtech.com SW-C_06_2018